CN110881079B

CN110881079B - Method for switching multiple resources in parallel in flat interaction hierarchy and electronic equipment

Info

Publication number: CN110881079B
Application number: CN201910322124.4A
Authority: CN
Inventors: 张小林
Original assignee: Shanghai Co Technology Co ltd
Current assignee: Shanghai Co Technology Co ltd
Priority date: 2018-09-06
Filing date: 2019-04-19
Publication date: 2023-09-12
Anticipated expiration: 2039-04-19
Also published as: CN110401764B; CN110401589A; CN110881080A; CN110881079A; CN110881080B; CN110401764A

Abstract

The invention discloses a method for switching a plurality of resources in parallel in a flat interaction level and electronic equipment, belongs to the technical field of software interface interaction, and provides a resource providing method for the electronic equipment in an embodiment thereof, wherein the method comprises the following steps of: loading one of a plurality of applications through a display of an electronic device; and switching and outputting a plurality of application programs through the display in response to a switching operation of the application programs currently presented on the display by a user. Based on the interface resource allocation method, the interactivity of the application program in the electronic equipment is improved.

Description

Method for switching multiple resources in parallel in flat interaction hierarchy and electronic equipment

Technical Field

The present invention relates to the field of interface interaction technology, and in particular, to the field of providing multiple resources through a flat interaction hierarchy of an electronic device.

Background

The development of science and technology greatly changes the communication modes of people, intelligent terminal products such as smart phones and the like are continuously appeared and various Application programs (App) are continuously introduced, so that people can establish communication with families, colleagues and friends at any time and any place without being limited by distance.

However, in real life, some users, including but not limited to old people and children, have difficulty adapting to technological development of daily and new technology due to lack of capability, are difficult to adapt to upgrading and updating of various communication means, and cannot proficiently use intelligent terminals and various communication apps, so that they may not be able to well establish communication with families and friends.

This situation is more pronounced in the following circumstances: young children work in metropolitan areas, while parents and young children may remain in distant hometown. Even though a child buys a smart phone for the elderly and installs various communication apps and other apps, the elderly often cannot normally operate the smart phone and various apps inside, and thus cannot effectively establish communication with family members and friends.

On the other hand, the technical routes of the related communication technologies and the related communication application software technologies also take place for many generations of complex evolution processes.

The communication system may provide a fixed line connection or a wireless connection for subscribers to communicate, such as voice or data communications. An example of a fixed line system is the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). One example of a wireless communication system is a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN), and another example is a satellite-based mobile communication system. Wireless communication typically occurs via a radio frequency connection between a subscriber's mobile station and at least one network element of the communication system. Communications within a network are typically, but not necessarily, handled using fixed line connections between different network elements. Communications may also be transmitted within a system that includes one or more data networks. One example of such communication is a voice over IP (internet protocol) scheme that implements a voice call over a packet switched data network.

The communication network is a cellular radio network consisting of access entities, commonly referred to as cells. In most cases, a cell is defined as a certain area covered by one or more Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs) that serve User Equipment (UEs), such as Mobile Stations (MSs), via a radio interface that may be connected to a Base Station Subsystem (BSS). Several cells cover a larger area and typically form a radio coverage area called a Location Area (LA) or in some standards a Routing Area (RA). It should be appreciated that the size of the location area or routing area depends on the system and environment and may be equal to one cell or less, such as a portion of the coverage area of a base station. One feature of a cellular system is that it provides mobility for a mobile station, i.e. enables the mobile station to move from one location area to another, even from one network to another that is compatible with the standard for which the mobile station is adapted.

The wireless communication is a communication system using only electromagnetic waves and not through a cable, and mainly includes microwave communication and satellite communication. Microwaves are radio waves that travel distances of typically only tens of kilometers. But the frequency band of the microwave is wide and the communication capacity is large. A microwave relay station is built every tens of kilometers for microwave communication. Satellite communication is the establishment of microwave communication links between two or more earth stations or between mobile bodies on the ground using communication satellites as relay stations.

The wireless communication (Wireless Communication) is a communication system for exchanging information by utilizing the characteristic that electromagnetic wave signals can propagate in free space, and in the field of information communication in recent years, the most widely-developed wireless communication technology is the fastest-growing one. Wireless communication implemented in mobile is also known as mobile communication, and both are commonly referred to as wireless mobile communication.

In the network system of wireless mobile communication, the network system of mobile phones for mobile users mainly comprises four types of GSM, CDMA, 3G and 4G, and the mobile phones have undergone the first generation of analog mobile phones (1G), the second generation of digital mobile phones (2G) such as GSM, TDMA and the like, the 2.5 th generation of mobile communication technology CDMA, the third generation of mobile communication technology 3G and the fourth generation of mobile communication technology 4G from the prior art.

Wherein the full digitization starts from GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications global system for mobile communications), which developed on the basis of cellular systems, belongs to the second generation digital mobile communications system. The method is characterized by the most mature and advanced technology, and has the advantages of multiple types of openable mobile communication service, high mobile phone connection speed, good conversation quality, strong security and confidentiality, strong anti-interference capability and wide network coverage. In the topology structure, the public mobile communication network generally adopts a cellular topology, which is based on the consideration of improving the frequency spectrum utilization rate, reducing the mutual interference and increasing the system capacity.

In order to realize the support from the traditional voice service to the data service, the GPRS superimposes the network supporting the high-speed packet data on the basis of the original GSM network, provides the functions of WAP browsing (browsing Internet pages), E-mail and the like for users, promotes the initial leap development of the mobile data service, and realizes the perfect combination of the mobile communication technology and the data communication technology (especially Internet technology).

From the second generation GSM, most mobile communications are digital, and besides voice communications, they can also send and receive short messages (short messages, SMS), MMS (technical) MMS (multimedia messaging), wireless Application Protocol (WAP), etc.

The short message (short message service, SMS) is a part of a "converged communication" service plan, and the number of characters that a user can receive and send a short message each time is 160 english, digital characters or 70 chinese characters by directly sending or receiving text or digital information through a mobile phone or other telecommunication terminals.

In general, the term "mobile data traffic" refers to data traffic generated by surfing the internet through mobile communication technologies such as GPRS, EDGE, TD-SCDMA, HSDPA, WCDMA, LTE or using related data value added services, and does not include traffic generated by surfing the internet through other means such as WLAN and CSD.

A mobile communication network between mobile subscribers or between mobile subscribers and fixed subscribers, the public mobile communication network and the private mobile communication network being classified according to service objects; a distinction can be made between mobile telephone networks and mobile data networks by service nature. The mobile telephone network supports communication in the form of short messages and voice. Correspondingly, the terminal equipment is provided with an SMS short message interface and a voice interface, so as to access a mobile telephone network, send and receive short messages and dial/answer a telephone from the voice network.

In addition, the mobile terminal may be connected to the internet through the mobile data traffic based on the public mobile data network, or may be connected to the internet through a WLAN access point based on a conventional home or enterprise broadband derivative, so that real-time communication is one of various network services and programs.

The above-mentioned WLANs are all referred to as: wireless Local Area Networks, chinese name: the wireless local area network is a system for transmitting data by utilizing Radio Frequency (RF) technology, and the technology is used for overcoming the defects of a wired local area network so as to achieve the aim of network extension and realize a clear network without network wires and distance limitation. The protocol standards currently included in WLANs are: IEEE802.11b protocol, IEEE802.11a protocol, IEEE802.11g protocol, IEEE802.11e protocol, IEEE802.11i protocol, wireless Application Protocol (WAP), etc., and WIFI (wireless fidelity) technology is a wireless network communication technology based on the IEEE802.11 series of standards.

And for both mobile data networks and WLAN communication networks, are known in the industry as wireless data transmission networks.

The real-time communication (Instant Messaging, abbreviated as IM) derived by the above communication technology is a real-time communication system (generally including service and user side software), which allows two or more people to communicate text messages, files, data, voice and video using the network in real time, including ICQ, skype, MSN, etc. before the mobile data network is not popularized, and a great deal of mobile instant messaging services and software, such as micro-messaging, wechat, etc. have been developed with the popularization of wireless data transmission technologies such as mobile data network, WLAN, etc. and smart phone operation systems.

There is an urgent need for a communication method and related apparatus based on the above communication technology and application software technology, which meets various potential needs of users including, but not limited to, elderly people, children, etc.

Disclosure of Invention

It would be beneficial if the accessibility of multiple programs provided in an electronic device having an interaction hierarchy could be improved.

Menu interface for switching between various application interfaces

In some embodiments according to the present invention, there is also provided a resource providing method for an electronic device in which a plurality of application programs are provided, the method including two steps: a) Loading at least one application of the plurality of applications through the display; b) And switching and outputting a plurality of application programs through the display in response to a switching operation of the application programs currently presented on the display by a user. Wherein the loading of the at least one application in step a) may be done automatically by the electronic device or in response to a user operation of the display. The user may perform a sliding gesture in a horizontal direction or a vertical direction on the display, or may perform a selection operation on a menu option provided on the display. These menu options may for example be located in the bottom row of the display, see other embodiments for detailed description of the menu options.

It will be appreciated that in some embodiments, the display is schematically illustrated as being integrally assembled with the electronic device. Of course, the electronic device may not include a display. In other words, the display may not belong to the electronic device, but may be a separate display unit of the electronic device, such as a television, and correspondingly, the electronic device may be a signal processing apparatus such as a set-top box, and may be coupled to the television to perform video presentation. Correspondingly, the operation part of the electronic device can also be a remote controller which is physically independent of the electronic device such as a set top box and the like, and is coupled with the set top box device in a wired or wireless mode. Of course, the electronic device such as the set-top box may be configured integrally with the display unit such as the television. For simplicity of description, these all modifications are not individually illustrated in detail in the present disclosure, but are applicable to the electronic device of any one of the embodiments of the present disclosure. In this regard, details may not be described.

Alternatively, the plurality of applications provided in the electronic device may be stored locally on the electronic device or may be invoked remotely and loaded via the display. For applications that are configured locally on the electronic device, they may be separately published applications that are independent of the operating system of the electronic device; or may be integrated into the operating system, its functions are also implemented by the operating system runtime (performed).

Alternatively, the plurality of applications may include: a communication program for a first contact, a communication program for a second contact, a communication program for a first contact group, a communication program for a second contact group, and the like, and a plurality of applications such as an album program and a weather/time broadcast program.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of applications includes a first application. Alternatively, the plurality of applications includes, in addition to the first application, a program for exposing a set of application identifications. And the step of loading at least one application of the plurality of applications via a display to which the electronic device is coupled further comprises: the first application or collection item is loaded through the display, either automatically or in response to manual operation of the display. Wherein the active state is entered once the first application or collection item is currently loaded on the display.

Optionally, in some embodiments, an application manager that manages a plurality of applications is further configured in the electronic device, and an interface of the plurality of applications is configured as a top layer of a user interface of the application manager; the interface of the first application or collection item is optionally configured on a first page of the top layer of the application manager user interface such that when the application manager is launched, the interface of the first application or collection item is output by default through the user interface of the application manager.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the interfaces of the plurality of applications are arranged side-by-side on top of the user interface of the application manager, and the step of loading the first application or the collection item through the display further comprises: preferentially loading a first application or collection item program on a top layer of an application manager user interface relative to other applications in the plurality of applications; and the step of "outputting the plurality of applications through the display switching" further includes any one of the following 4 steps S1, S2, S3, S4:

s1, responding to a lateral sliding gesture aiming at an application management program user interface, and scheduling a plurality of application programs to be respectively output through the top layer of the application management program user interface;

s2, responding to a lateral sliding gesture aiming at an application management program user interface, and switching a plurality of application programs in parallel through the top layer of the application management program user interface to be output to a display one by one;

s3, loading corresponding application programs in the application management program user interface according to the switching operation of the user on the application programs through the top layer of the application management program;

S4, responding to the lateral sliding gesture of the interface aiming at the current application program, and sequentially outputting the next interface of the current application program or the next program in the plurality of application programs through the top layer of the application management program user interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of "loading the first application or the collection item preferentially at a top level of an application manager user interface" further comprises: after the electronic device is started, the first application program is loaded preferentially on the top layer of the application management program user interface. And, any of the steps S1S 2S 3 or S4 further includes loading a subsequent program of the plurality of application programs in response to the lateral swipe gesture, the subsequent program including an aggregate item program.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of "loading the first application or the collection item preferentially at a top level of an application manager user interface" further comprises: after the electronic device is started, the collection item program is loaded preferentially at the top layer of the application management program user interface. And, either of steps S1S 2S 3 or S4 further comprises, in response to the lateral swipe gesture, subsequently loading the first application.

Alternatively, in the process of switching the plurality of applications to output through the display, for example, in the process of switching from the first application to the second application or the collection item in response to a switching operation of the display by the user, the switching from the first application to the second application may be performed in a hysteresis manner. For example, the electronic device may need to sense that the duration of the user's sliding operation on the display exceeds a certain threshold, e.g., 1 second or 2 seconds, before switching the first application to the second application. Alternatively, when the current interface is sensed to deviate from the display by more than a certain threshold (e.g. 2 cm) along with the switching operation of the user, the switching of the current program is started, that is, the current program is scheduled to run in the background, and the next program is activated and loaded on the display. If the inexpensive magnitude does not exceed the threshold although the current interface shifts on the display with the user's switching operation, the current program is still maintained at the output through the display for continued user interaction. Thus, unexpected application program switching caused by misoperation of a user is prevented.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the application management program may be set as a start-up item, so that the electronic device more automatically completes the loading process of the first application program or the collection item program on the display.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the application manager is an operating system of the electronic device or a program independent of the operating system; and if the application manager is independent of the operating system, the method further comprises: the application manager is loaded through the display in response to a start-up operation of the application manager.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of "loading at least one application of the plurality of applications through the display" may further comprise: one of a plurality of applications is loaded through the display.

Wherein the plurality of applications may include a first application; and, the step of loading one of the plurality of application programs on the display further comprises: a first application of the plurality of applications is preferentially loaded through the display relative to other applications of the plurality of applications or even the operating system.

It should be noted that: in some embodiments, a first application may be loaded on the display first after the electronic device is booted and before other applications are loaded, one of the purposes of this distinction in loading order being to increase the accessibility of the first application relative to the other applications. However, this does not mean that the interface of the first application must be the first visual interface after the electronic device is started. The electronic device may also play other media, advertising, or blank interfaces through the display after the electronic device is started, for example, before the first application is loaded on the display, or load some interactive interface (e.g., an interactive interface with purchase guidance), and then load the user interface of the first application automatically or in response to user operation of the display. The user may perform a sliding gesture in a horizontal direction or a vertical direction on the display, or may perform a selection operation on a menu option optionally provided on the display. These menu options may for example be located in the bottom row of the display, see other embodiments for detailed description of the menu options.

It will be appreciated that in the above exemplary description, after the electronic device is booted, menu items are optionally provided through the top layer of the operating system user interface or the top layer of the application manager, e.g., a menu area at the bottom of the current media interface on the display. In the electronic device, a first application program of the plurality of application programs and a user interface thereof are preferentially loaded to replace the interactive interface or the blank interface and the like in response to the operation of the user on the interactive interface such as the media interface and the like. Or in the electronic equipment, in response to the selection operation of the menu items in the menu area by a user, loading the application programs corresponding to the selected menu items on the display to replace the interactive interface or the blank interface. The application programs respectively correspond to the menu items in the menu area, and the interactive interface or the blank interface such as the pre-display media playing interface may not correspond to any menu item in the menu area, in other words, the pre-display user interface is loaded before the application programs after the electronic device is started and is irrelevant to the options or the application programs. In addition, it should be noted that, generally, the above media playing interface or blank interface is merely a transitional interface or floating layer, and does not belong to the top layer of the operating system user interface, and under this definition for the top layer of the operating system user interface, the top layer of the operating system user interface configures an interface of a plurality of application programs instead of the media playing interface. In other embodiments, if the interactive interface such as the media playing interface is considered as at least a portion of the top layer of the operating system user interface, in these embodiments, the interface of the plurality of applications may also be configured on the top layer of the operating system user interface in parallel with the media playing interface, in other words, the plurality of applications may be configured after the start page program (e.g., the media playing program, etc. described above) on the top layer of the operating system user interface (or the user interface of the application management program), or alternatively (alternantly), the interface of the plurality of applications may be configured as the second layer of the interaction hierarchy of the operating system user interface. Similarly, this modification of the user interface of the operating system is also applicable to an embodiment in which a plurality of applications are managed by an application manager independent of the operating system, and will not be described in detail. Correspondingly, in the electronic device based on the further embodiment of this modification, in response to the switching operation of the user to the second layer of the interaction hierarchy of the operating system or the second layer of the interaction hierarchy of the application management program, the plurality of application programs are switched in parallel to be output one by one to the display through the second layer interaction interface of the interaction hierarchy. The applicant reserves the rights to sort, continue and partially continue applications for the designs described above, such as "load menu area via display and/or separate front-facing interface (including blank interface) before multiple applications are output on the user interface". Further alternatively, the plurality of application programs may further include a program for exposing an identification set of the plurality of applications. The aggregate item may be disposed on top of the operating system UI in parallel with other ones of the plurality of applications or on top of a user interface of an application manager for the plurality of applications, the aggregate item may be located on page 2 or page n (n is greater than 2) of the user interface and thus loaded on the electronic device display after the first application. If the collection item program is loaded and executed, a collection item interface for a plurality of application identifications is output through the display, in other words, the display presents an interface or icon collection interface comprising one or more identifications respectively associated with one or more application programs, and when one of the identifications is selected by a user, the application associated with the selected identification is executed.

Icons of some programs, such as relatively low frequency use programs, may be provided on the collection item interface so that while individual applications for high frequency use are first loaded after the electronic device is started, some applications for low frequency use may still be accessible to the user through the collection item interface so that the user may still access most of the available resources in the electronic device. Of course, the collection item program may alternatively be configured on page 1 (or start page) of the user interface, while the first application program is configured on a subsequent page, and the collection item program is loaded on the display first through the user interface. Subsequently, in response to a switching operation of the user, the first application program is loaded on the display.

In some embodiments, the first application program or the collection item program is loaded and run preferentially through the display, where the collection item program is loaded on the display to form a collection item interface, or identify the collection interface, and the collection item interface may include icons, shortcuts, links, and the like of some other application programs besides the plurality of application programs.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the interface resources of the plurality of applications are configured as a top layer of an operating system user interface of the electronic device, in other words, the interactive interfaces of the plurality of applications are integrated into the operating system as a top layer of the operating system user interface. The step of preferentially loading the first application program or the collection item program further comprises: the first application program is loaded on the display through the user interface of the operating system after the electronic equipment is started; wherein the step of switching output of the plurality of applications via the display further comprises: according to the switching operation of the user to the plurality of application programs through the user interface of the operating system, the corresponding application programs in the plurality of application programs are loaded through the display, for example, in an activated state.

In some embodiments, the top layer of the operating system UI includes interface resources of a plurality of application programs configured in parallel, and the output can be switched in parallel at the top layer of the operating system UI through operation gestures such as lateral sliding of the display by a user or through operation such as pressing of a switching operation key of an entity of the electronic device. After the electronic device is booted, a first application is preferentially loaded on top of the operating system user interface over other applications in the plurality of applications.

If the top layer of the operating system UI is configured with not only the interface resources of the plurality of general applications including the interface of the first application but also the icon set interface, correspondingly, in other embodiments, after the electronic device is started, the first application is preferentially loaded on the top layer of the operating system user interface, and then the icon set interface is loaded in response to a switching operation for the display or for an entity switching key of the electronic device. Alternatively, the icon set interface is loaded preferentially at the top layer of the operating system user interface and the first application is subsequently loaded in response to a switching operation for the display or for an entity switching key of the electronic device. Alternatively, the user's switching operation for the display may be a single switching gesture, such as a swipe gesture to the left or right of the display; the switching operation of the entity switching key configured on the electronic device may be a single pressing operation, a toggle operation, or the like. Here, it should be noted that in these embodiments, after the electronic device is started, the first application is loaded preferentially through the top layer of the operating system UI, and then the second application or icon set interface is loaded sequentially with the user's switching operation of the slide gesture for the display. In the process that the first application program and the icon set interface are respectively loaded on the display in sequence through the top layer of the UI of the operating system in response to the switching operation of the user, the first application program and the icon set interface are not limited to be adjacently output on the display, in other words, interfaces of other application programs may be also output between the first application program and the icon set interface. Otherwise, if the icon assembly interface is loaded in advance through the top layer of the operating system UI and then the first application program is loaded after the electronic device is started, the details are not repeated. The descriptions herein also apply to any other embodiment, and are not repeated.

For the interface resource providing method of some embodiments in the case where an application manager independent of an operating system is configured in an electronic device to manage a plurality of applications, similar to the above embodiments, interface resources of a plurality of applications are configured in parallel at the top layer of the application manager UI. The plurality of applications may switch output in parallel at the top layer of the application manager UI by an operation gesture such as a lateral slide of the user with respect to the application manager UI, or by an operation such as a press of a switch operation key with respect to an entity of the electronic device. Since the icon of the application management program may be configured on the desktop of the operating system for the user to access, the user also needs to perform a startup operation on the application management program through the desktop of the operating system. The resource providing method in the related embodiment mainly comprises the following steps: 1) Loading an application management program through a display in response to a starting operation of the application management program by a user; 2) The first application is loaded preferentially through the top layer of the application manager user interface, and the icon set interface is subsequently loaded at the top layer of the application manager user interface in response to a switching operation for the display. Alternatively, the icon set interface is preferentially loaded through the top layer of the application manager user interface, and the first application is subsequently loaded at the top layer of the application manager user interface in response to a switching operation for the display.

It should be understood that: in some embodiments, the plurality of applications or interface resources thereof are configured as a top layer of the operating system user interface, and are not limited to the top layer of the operating system user interface being composed solely of interface resources of the plurality of applications. In other words, other interface elements may also be configured at the top layer of the operating system user interface, e.g., the top layer of the operating system user interface may also include a menu area as a global fixed/floating window on the display of the electronic device as mentioned in other embodiments for accommodating a plurality of options (or menu items) corresponding to the plurality of resources, respectively, the menu area being maintained at the perimeter (e.g., bottom) of the display or the current interface (e.g., top layer of the operating system user interface) during the switching of the plurality of applications. The plurality of options correspond to a plurality of resources, respectively. These implicit or explicit menu areas (or option areas) and the options therein may be kept presented across the interface, i.e., the option areas remain loaded on the current interface, such as the area at the bottom of the display, regardless of whether the current interface is loaded with a communication program interface, an album program interface, a collection item interface, or other resources. Of course, the interface resources of the plurality of applications are configured as the top layer of the application manager user interface for the plurality of applications, and similar, no further description is given.

Here, the interface resources of the plurality of applications are preferentially loaded on the display as an operating system user interface, which to some extent masks the user interface architecture of the operating system or "desktop+application" of the electronic device. For example, it is not necessary for the user to manually load certain programs through interactive operations with respect to the desktop of the system, which allows the user to perceive only specific functionalities of the relevant application through the electronic device, which reduces the complexity of the user interface of the electronic device, shortens the logical distance between the user and the application in the interaction between the user and the electronic device. Furthermore, as described in some embodiments, the plurality of applications in the electronic devices may be configured with the installation portal and the setting portal for the applications at a remote second terminal, and the professional user of the other electronic device may operate the second terminal to remotely perform installation, uninstallation or other maintenance work for the plurality of applications in the electronic device according to the embodiments of the present invention. The cognitive difficulty of the electronic equipment is further reduced, and the operability of the electronic equipment and the accessibility of application programs and information in the electronic equipment are improved.

In some embodiments of the present invention, the top layer of the application manager user interface or the operating system user interface of the electronic device configures a plurality of applications in parallel, and the electronic device outputs the plurality of applications one by one to the display for access by the user by parallel switching on the user interface through the lateral sliding gesture detected on the user interface. The configuration of the method, apparatus or device interactive interface resources in these embodiments overcomes, to some extent, the thinking and technical prejudice of those skilled in the art of communication devices, and in particular smart phones, in the resource configuration and solution design process. The method for providing program resources and interface resources according to the embodiment of the present invention is completely different from the prior art. In the resource providing method according to some embodiments of the present invention, the concept of "individual (e.g., specific application) priority" or "individual (e.g., specific application) followed by whole (collective provision of other resources)" is adopted. That is, a specific application program is preferentially provided in the electronic device, and optionally, an application set interface can be configured in the electronic device to support the user to further access other resources such as software capabilities configured in the electronic device except the individual application as a complement to the provision of the individual application. The individual and the whole are mutually independent and parallel. The technical prejudice in the prior art is inherited by the design mode of a user interface of a desktop or a personal computer, which takes a 'platform/operating system+functional program' as a main logic architecture, or a 'desktop+application program portal', and the corresponding software resource configuration mode which takes the distinction of functions or function groups (functions groups) of an application program as a guide. In this technical concept in the prior art, the resource is provided in a 'whole first, then individual', and the individual application programs are not parallel to the whole (all available software and hardware capabilities in the electronic device), but are in a inclusive relationship. In other words, in the prior art, individual programs are not provided separately from the whole. For example, in the logic architecture of "platform/operating system+functional program" or the architecture of "desktop+application portal" user interface, the portals of the plurality of resources are collectively output to the display in the form of a desktop or the like for the user to select from. This requires that the user understand the resource management manner of the electronic device to be able to access a specific application program selectively, and, for the electronic device set up from the factory, the user is especially required to customize the resource configuration of the electronic device as required to conform to his own usage habit on the basis of learning and understanding the resource management manner of the electronic device.

The logic architecture, the user interface design and the like in the prior art come from a long prior technical development history as the whole configuration mode of software resources, but the prior art mainly comprises most of electronic devices including smart phones, the personal computers and the current mobile electronic devices are different in hardware configuration, use scenes and use habits of users, some design concepts and logic architectures in the personal computers are not suitable for the mobile electronic devices, and the personal computers and the mobile electronic devices inheriting the design concepts and the functional architectures of the personal computers bring difficulty to some users due to the fact that users are required to have more understanding of the professional technologies related to the electronic devices.

In contrast to the prior art, some embodiments of the present invention support direct user access to specific individual resources, such as communication applications. Moreover, optionally, in some embodiments, remote configuration of the resources in the electronic device by the remote second device is also supported, which further improves accessibility of the resources in the electronic device.

Optionally, in some embodiments, an application manager for the plurality of applications is configured in the electronic device to centrally manage identification information of the plurality of applications, such as icons, shortcuts, and the like. The electronic device is started to finish displaying the common desktop, and the shortcut of the application management program can be provided on the desktop. When the user clicks on to start the application management program, the program output through the user interface of the application management program may be one of the plurality of application programs or any other program not belonging to the plurality of application programs. Thus, alternatively, the user interfaces of the plurality of applications may be configured as the top layer of the user interface of the application manager, and the user interface of the first application, e.g., the first contact communication program, may occupy a first page of the top layer of the operating system user interface such that the first contact communication interface is preferentially loaded by the user interface of the application manager after the application manager is launched. In other words, the step of preferentially loading the first application program or the collection item program further includes: in response to a user's launch operation of the application manager, the first application is preferentially loaded on the display through the user interface of the application manager.

The step of switching output of the plurality of applications via the display further comprises: according to the switching operation of the application management program to the plurality of application programs by the user, the corresponding application programs in the plurality of application programs are loaded on the display, for example, in an activated state.

It can be understood that: and responding to the switching operation of the user, starting the first application program under the dispatching of the application management program and loading the first application program on the current interface, wherein once the first application program is loaded on the current interface, the first application program enters an activated state and can be directly interacted by the user, and other operations such as selecting the current application on the current interface before accessing are not needed. In this regard, the description is omitted in other embodiments. Alternatively, the activated current program may be presented in full screen on the current interface.

By integrating a plurality of locally or remotely deployed application programs in the application management program, some application programs in the electronic device, such as application programs which are used frequently by users and are interested in comparison, are provided for the users in a concentrated manner through a user interface of the application management program, so that the users can conveniently select and load the application programs.

The application management program or the operating system serves as a manager of a plurality of application programs, the independent or associated application programs are scheduled to run through the loading of the user interfaces defined in the embodiments, so that the switching overhead (overheads) among the plurality of application programs in user interaction is reduced, the operating efficiency of users on the application programs is improved, a plurality of application program entries can be obtained through the manager in a centralized manner, and the entries, icons and the like of the application programs scattered in a plurality of levels (such as a desktop of a common operating system, deep folders and the like) of the user interface of the electronic device do not need to be accessed respectively. For example, an icon of the application management program may be set on a desktop of the electronic device, after the electronic device is started, the desktop is a first operable interface presented to a user, and by clicking the icon of the application management program, the user can manage all application programs commonly used or interested by the user through the application management program, and the application programs used at high frequencies keep a standby (standby) state for the user and can be loaded and activated in response to a switching operation of the user for the application management program at any time, so that operability of the electronic device and accessibility of specific resources are improved.

Optionally, in the method of some embodiments, the method further comprises the step of: and configuring the output sequence of the plurality of application programs through an operating system user interface or an application management program according to the sequence setting of the plurality of application programs by a user and/or the access frequency or the access time of the plurality of application programs by the user respectively.

Optionally, the application programs corresponding to the plurality of identifiers provided in the collection item interface are, for example, programs with low access frequency or low user interest.

Alternatively, the applications may be independent from each other, where the applications have independent interaction interfaces. The multiple applications may be automatically arranged in the order of output via the display according to the user's access frequency and access time to the user interface of each application, or ordered by the user in accordance with their interest level. Thereby, the order of configuration of the plurality of applications in the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device is consistent with the user's desire to access the relevant programs and interfaces. Accessibility of application programs provided through the user interface and interaction efficiency of users on the interface are improved.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the switching operation is a single switching gesture.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the single switch gesture is a swipe gesture for a display, and the switch outputting step of the plurality of applications further comprises: in response to a slide gesture to the left or right of the current interface for the current application, the plurality of applications are output one by one through the display.

Alternatively, the plurality of applications may be configured in a particular order, or randomly. Correspondingly, the plurality of application programs may be outputted through the display in a certain order or may be outputted randomly in response to the operations such as the sliding gesture of the user with respect to the current interface. Thus, the user can switch different application programs in parallel through one gesture aiming at the display, and the application program switched to the current interface can be in an activated state for direct access by the user. Compared with the situation that in the mobile communication device in the prior art, a user needs to perform two or more operations to switch the application program on the display, the operability of the application program in the user interaction process is improved.

Alternatively, the electronic device may lock the interface of the current program loaded on the display so that it is temporarily not switchable by the switching gesture in response to a predetermined gesture by the user with respect to the current interface on the display or an operation with respect to a hardware key of the electronic device.

Optionally, the method of some embodiments further comprises the step of: a plurality of options in thumbnail form are provided through a display or a top layer of the operating system user interface or a top layer of the application manager user interface and associated with a plurality of applications, respectively. Here, there is no temporal limitation between the providing step of the plurality of options and the loading step of the plurality of applications. For example, the application program may be presented on the display in synchronization with a first application program of the plurality of application programs after the electronic device is started, and of course, the application program may be preferentially presented on the display before being loaded on the display, so as to be used as an operation portal for selectively running the plurality of application programs by a user. In addition, there is no temporal limitation between the steps in any one embodiment of the present invention unless specifically stated.

Alternatively, these options may be icons, shortcuts, etc. for each of a plurality of applications. If the application management program is configured in the electronic device, icons, shortcuts and the like of the plurality of application programs are centrally managed by the application management program, and the step of providing a plurality of options in a thumbnail form through a display and respectively associating with the plurality of application programs further comprises: a plurality of options in thumbnail form are provided at a top level (e.g., resident and/or globally) of the user interface of the application manager, the plurality of options being associated with the plurality of applications, respectively. That is, the abbreviated plurality of options remains output at the top of the user interface of the application manager regardless of the user interface of the application manager outputting any one of the plurality of applications or some other program that does not belong to the plurality of applications. This constitutes a global menu window for the application manager for exposing a plurality of options. So that the user of the electronic device always maintains a general preview of the application resources available through the application manager. In this regard, the description is omitted. If the application management program is not configured in the electronic device, the icons, shortcuts and the like of the plurality of application programs can be centrally managed and displayed through the operating system of the electronic device, and correspondingly, the step of providing a plurality of options in a thumbnail form through a display and respectively associating with the plurality of application programs further comprises the steps of: multiple options in thumbnail form are provided at the top level of the operating system user interface (e.g., in resident and/or global fashion) and are associated with multiple applications, respectively.

Alternatively, the multiple options described above may be presented in whole or in part around the perimeter of the current interface. When the number of the plurality of options is smaller, the plurality of options can be all provided for the user to select, if the number of the plurality of options is larger, the plurality of options can be divided into a plurality of groups, and the options of different groups can be sequentially displayed respectively in response to the scrolling or sliding operation of the user on the area where the options are located.

Optionally, in some embodiments, a plurality of options are located at a perimeter of the current interface, the plurality of options being operable to execute in a one-to-one correspondence and output the plurality of applications through the display. In particular, the current interface described above may include a contact communication interface, an operating system user interface, or a user interface of an application manager. Multiple applications may be output through an application manager or an operating system UI (user interface). For this reason, the description is omitted.

Here, it should be noted that: if multiple applications are managed by a separate application manager that is independent of the operating system of the electronic device, the application manager may provide configuration options in the above-described region where multiple options are located, referred to as the options region. The electronic device may be responsive to user manipulation of the configuration options to add an icon or the like of a new application to the options area. When the user selects the newly added option in the option area, the application program associated with the newly added option can be output on the display through the application management program through the management or scheduling of the application management program, and is in an activated state for the user to access.

It will be appreciated that the step of loading at least one of the plurality of applications via the display or the step of loading one of the plurality of applications via the display does not preclude loading the first application via the display while loading the second application. Thus, alternatively, a plurality of application programs may be individually output (one by one) on the display, or the plurality of application programs may be loaded at a time through the display, for example, 2 or more programs in the plurality of interfaces may be collectively output on the display. Wherein, one or more programs on the current interface are in an activated state for direct interaction by a user.

Optionally, in response to an adjustment operation by the user for the order of the plurality of options, an arrangement order of the plurality of options on the current interface, for example, the bottom, is configured correspondingly.

Therefore, for the application programs commonly used by the user, the interactive operation of the user is simplified, the application programs can be started only through 1 or 2 operations, the one-key loading of the high-frequency use software is kept or the application programs are started through one operation, the operation of returning to the desktop to reposition and select the entry of the application programs is not needed through the inefficient operation, and more time expenditure is avoided. Furthermore, by presenting the plurality of options in thumbnail form on the current interface or display, a preview of more available applications through the current interface is provided to the user to further promote interactivity or operability of the plurality of applications.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of options are arranged in a matrix. Correspondingly, the method further comprises the steps of: in response to a switching operation for the option area, a plurality of options are mobile presented. Optionally, in some embodiments, before the step of loading the first application or the collection item program through the display, further comprising: a user interface, such as a separate video play interface, interactive interface, etc., is loaded via the display, independent of the plurality of options.

In particular, the plurality of options may be located in one or more rows above or below the current interface or display, or in one or more columns to the left/right of the current interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, all or part of the plurality of options are arranged laterally below the current interface, and the mobile presenting step further includes: in response to a switching operation for the option area, a plurality of options are presented in the option area moving part by part.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of switching the plurality of programs through the display further comprises: in response to a user selection among the plurality of options, switching the current interface to the interface corresponding to the selected option on the display, and synchronously focusing the selected option in the option area. In other words, in response to a user's selection among a plurality of options, the application program corresponding to the selected option is output through the operating system UI or UI switching of the application management program, and the selected option is focused in the option area in synchronization.

Optionally, a first option of the plurality of options corresponds to a first application of the plurality of programs; and the step of switching the plurality of programs through the display further comprises: when the first application program is loaded on the current interface, responding to the selection of a second option in the plurality of options by a user, loading the program corresponding to the second option on the current interface instead of the first application program, and synchronously shifting the focus display from the first option to the second option in the option area

Optionally, in some embodiments, each section includes the same number of options, the same number being 3-6; the width of the option area in the longitudinal direction is 1.5cm-2.5cm.

Optionally, the method further comprises the step of: in response to switching of the application loaded on the current interface, the current focus display is correspondingly switched, i.e., the focus display of the plurality of options is switched to correspond to the switched application.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of programs are executable programs, a current program currently loaded on the display entering an active state; and, the electronic device further includes an application operation unit virtually provided at the current interface and/or physically provided at the electronic device; the application operation unit may be operated by a user to access a current program.

Among other things, it can be appreciated that: the application currently loaded on the display for access by the user may be referred to as the current program.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the application operation unit is functionally and correspondingly variable according to the current program, so as to maintain operability of the Feature (Feature) and capability (capability) of the current program.

In other words, the functionality of the application operating unit may be redefined across interfaces/across programs, dynamically configured. Specifically, the application operation unit is operable to call the characteristics of the different current program, respectively, regardless of whether the program on the current interface is switched to the first application program or the second application program. Optionally, the functions provided by the first application program and the second application program are integrated functions (integrated functionality), the number of application operation units such as keys can be corresponding to the integrated functions, and the user can call different functions of the application program or activate characteristics or routine functions of the application program by operating different application operation units. The number of application operation units may correspond to these integrated functions one-to-many. For example by different operations on the same key to invoke different functions of the application provided by the current interface. I.e. the function of the same key may also be redefined for the current program to invoke different properties of the current program.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the application operating unit comprises a set of keys. The method of these embodiments further comprises: in response to an operation for the key group, a plurality of characteristics of the current program are respectively invoked.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the key set is a push key set or a toggle key set, a knob, or the like.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the key set further includes a plurality of virtual keys of a column to the right of the current interface, or a plurality of physical keys of a column configured to the right of the electronic device corresponding to the virtual key column on the display; and, the plurality of applications are individually customized configured for the plurality of physical keys such that a plurality of characteristics of each of the plurality of applications may be correspondingly activated in response to physical operations (e.g., presses from a user) experienced by the plurality of physical keys, respectively. This supports the operability of the same hardware key set across interfaces for different applications, or multiple different applications through the same hardware key set.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the first application is a communication program for the first contact executable to output a communication interface for the first contact via the display, including a message area; the key sets are each associated with at least one communication network; the related method further comprises the steps of: in response to a user operation of the key set, a plurality of communication information with the first contact via the at least one communication network is output in a message area. Wherein when a key of the set of keys is given a predetermined gesture by the user, the key will be activated and cause the electronic device to perform the function associated with the activated key, e.g. establish a communication or the like. For this reason, the description is omitted.

Of course, the program for the first contact and the program for the second contact may be loaded separately on the display, for example, the communication interface of the first contact and the communication interface of the second contact may be configured as top layers of the operating system user interface, and the priority order may be set according to the access frequency, for example, the first contact communication interface occupies the first page of the top layers of the operating system user interface, and then the first contact communication program is preferentially started to form the first contact communication interface after the electronic device is started. Or in some electronic devices with larger displays, the communication programs of multiple contacts can also share the same page on the top layer of the user interface of the operating system, and the communication programs are arranged at different positions in the same page, for example, the first contact communication program and the second contact communication program can be preferentially started after the electronic device is started so as to be collectively loaded on the display of the tablet computer or the mobile phone with the folding screen, so that the first contact communication interface and the second contact communication interface are simultaneously presented on the current interface of the display, and a user can conveniently communicate with the first contact and the second contact without performing interface switching operation. Of course, alternatively, the first contact communication program and the second contact communication program may share (share) some of the same/similar software capabilities or underlying functionality. Thus, from another aspect it can be appreciated that: the plurality of first contact options, second contact options, etc. in the menu area/options area collectively correspond to the same communication program. This is a many-to-one correspondence between options and their associated executable programs, rather than a one-to-one correspondence.

The communication interfaces of the different contacts are used as the top layer of the user interface of the operating system (the different contacts can monopolize a page, the page can be arranged according to the priority order, if the page occupies the first page, the page can be directly the first visible interface after the user starts, or the different contacts can share the same page and are arranged according to different positions in a page), and share a communication operation program, and the program is integrated in the operating system as a basic function (and interface).

As described above, here, the first contact option, the second contact option may be understood in two ways: 1) The first contact options and the second contact options are in one-to-one correspondence with the first contact interface and the second contact interface which are respectively loaded on the display by running the same communication program; 2) The first contact option, the second contact option, … … and the N contact option are in a one-to-one correspondence with the communication program, and the N contact options and the N contact interfaces are in a one-to-one correspondence. For the second understanding, the top layer of the user interface of the communication program is provided with N parallel switchable interfaces, and in a manner similar to that of the application software such as WeChat, etc., four interactive interfaces of WeChat, address book, discovery and I are arranged on the top layer of the user interface of the application software. Thus, for the second case (abbreviated as top-level multi-interface, multiple UI on top) described above, in some embodiments, the switching step of the plurality of applications or the switching step of the plurality of interfaces similar to "responsive to the switching operation of the application currently presented on the display by the user, to switch and output the plurality of applications through the display" may further include: the plurality of applications are sequentially output (e.g., one by one) through the display in response to a slide gesture to the left or right of a current interface for the current application. In other words, in response to a slide gesture to the left or right for the first application through the display or the switch key, a next user interface of the first application or a user interface of the second application is sequentially switched through the display. The plurality of options provided at the bottom of the user interface of the application manager, for example, described above, includes an identification of the third party application, for example, an icon of the WeChat application. And responding to the clicking of the icon by the user, loading the WeChat program on the display by the application management program, and sequentially displaying three interactive interfaces of an address book and a discovery and I by the application management program along with the continuous gesture of 3 left sliding of the user on the display. Thereafter, responsive to a gesture by the user to the display that again slides to the left, the second application is switched out on the display through the user interface of the application manager for the user to access the user interface of the second application. Similarly, the above-mentioned switching output steps of the plurality of programs or the plurality of interfaces are also applicable to the switching operation of the user on the electronic device by the physical operation key. In addition, it can be appreciated that: each time the current interface is switched, for example, the address book interface of the WeChat application program is switched to the discovery interface, after the switching, the discovery interface is loaded on the display currently, and the current interface is changed to the discovery interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one communication network comprises a plurality of communication networks having different traffic properties, the key group being associated with the plurality of communication networks, respectively; the communication information outputting step further includes: a) In response to a user operation on the key set, establishing communication with the first contact through a plurality of communication networks to generate a plurality of communication information; and b) integrating and outputting a plurality of communication information with different service properties through the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of communication networks comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks including a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network; the key sets are associated with a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network, respectively, and the communication establishing step further comprises: in response to a user operation of the key set, communication is established with the first contact via the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively, to generate a plurality of communication information.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the wireless data transmission network comprises a mobile data network and a wireless local area network, and the related method further comprises the steps of: the key sets are selectively associated with a mobile telephone network, a mobile data network, or a wireless local area network such that the key sets are operable to establish corresponding services based on the associated communication networks, respectively.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of communications information includes: voice service information, at least two of short message service information and data service information; the communication establishing step further includes:

when the key set is associated with the mobile telephone network, in response to a user operation of the key set, establishing communication with the first contact through the mobile telephone network to generate voice service information and/or short message service information;

when the key set is associated with the wireless data transmission network, in response to a user operation of the key set, communication is established with the first contact through the wireless data transmission network to generate a data traffic message.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the first contact communication interface further includes a switch option, the selectively associating step includes: the key set is selectively configured to be associated with a mobile telephone network, a mobile data network, or a wireless local area network based on at least one of i) user operation of a handoff option, ii) a connection status of the electronic device to the wireless local area network, or iii) peripherally available communication network conditions.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of selectively associating further comprises:

in response to the electronic device accessing the wireless local area network, configuring the key set to be associated with the wireless local area network in a communication function; and

The set of keys is configured to be associated with the mobile telephone network over the communication function in response to the electronic device being disconnected from the wireless local area network.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the first contact communication program is integrated in the operating system, and an interface or human interface resource of the first contact communication program is integrated as at least a portion of an operating system user interface component.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the corresponding mobile phone number of the first contact in the mobile phone network and the corresponding identification code in the wireless data transmission network are configured integrally.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the mobile phone number corresponding to the first contact in the mobile phone network and the identification code corresponding to the first contact in the wireless data transmission network are stored integrally in the same program of the electronic device, and the communication establishing step further includes: and responding to the operation of the user on the key group, and respectively establishing communication with the first contact person through the mobile phone number and the identification code to generate a plurality of communication information.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the outputting of the plurality of communications further comprises the steps of: and integrating and outputting at least two of the voice service information, the short message service information and the data service information to a message area on the first contact person communication interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the integrating outputting step further includes: a) Outputting voice service information and/or short message service information through a message area when the key group is associated with the mobile telephone network; and b) outputting the data service message through the message area when the key set is associated with the wireless local area network or the mobile data network.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of communication information outputting steps further comprises the steps of: in response to the occurrence of the latest one of the plurality of communication information, the latest one is individually output in the message area. In other words, the latest one of the plurality of communication information is continuously updated and output on the message area on the first contact communication interface individually;

wherein the latest message includes the latest message received from the first contact and the latest message sent to the first contact.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the outputting step further comprises: in response to the occurrence of the latest one of the at least two of the voice service information and the short message service information, the latest one is output separately in the message area. In other words, the latest one of at least two of the voice service information and the short message service information is continuously updated and outputted to the message area separately.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the profile information of the first contact is configured separately outside the message area and is comparable to the message area format; the method further comprises the steps of: expanding the message area and optionally abbreviated profile information; and collectively outputting the plurality of messages to the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the profile information and the message area of the first contact are configured substantially centered above and below each other on the first contact communication interface, the plurality of communication information outputting steps further comprising:

a) Outputting at least two of the voice service information and the short message service information in a message area collectively; or alternatively

B) When the key group is related to the mobile telephone network, the voice service information and/or the short message service information which are arranged according to the occurrence sequence are collectively output through the message area; when the key group is associated with the wireless data transmission network, data service messages arranged in the occurrence sequence are collectively output through the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of communication information outputting steps further comprises:

c) Integrating voice service information and/or short message service messages to output the latest one of them alone in a message area when the key set is associated with the mobile telephone network;

D) When the key group is related to the wireless data transmission network, only the latest data service message is continuously updated and output in the message area; wherein the data traffic message comprises one or more of the following: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data.

Optionally, at least one information publishing interface is provided in the electronic device, and the method of some embodiments further comprises the steps of: at least one information distribution interface is presented on the display.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the step of switching the plurality of applications through the display further comprises: e) At least one information distribution interface is output through the display during the switching of the plurality of applications. Or f) outputting the plurality of application programs which are arranged alternately with at least one information release interface one by one through a display.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of options does not include an option corresponding to the at least one information distribution interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one information distribution interface comprises a dynamic or static media distribution interface, the interface elements of which comprise at least one of text elements, video elements, audio output elements, or a combination thereof.

Alternatively, the information distribution interface may be generated by the execution of a corresponding media playing program that is loaded on the display to form the information distribution interface to play the associated media, such as advertisements.

Optionally, in some embodiments of the invention, the first option in the menu area is a communication option for the first contact, the first option being associated with a communication program, the first option being operable to invoke the communication program to output a communication interface for the first contact via the display, in other words, in response to a user's operation of the first contact option, to run a communication application to present the communication interface for the first contact on the display, including profile information such as a avatar for the first contact, and the message area. In response to a user operation of the communication key set, establishing communication with the first contact over at least one communication network available to the electronic device to generate a plurality of communication information; and outputting the plurality of communication information through a message area on the first contact communication interface.

Optionally, the first contact communication interface of the key set further comprises an expandable button, and the keys of the first part or all of the key set are arranged in a column on the right side of the interface, and are arranged between the key column and the option area on the communication contact interface, namely, at a position below the key column and above the option area.

Optionally, the expandable buttons are located in substantially the same column as the key columns. Correspondingly, the method of these embodiments further comprises the steps of: in response to a user selection operation (e.g., clicking) on an expandable button, an expanded menu is presented, optionally including a second portion of keys and/or expressive options in the set of keys, social options (e.g., a red pack button), etc., in a single row at a location at the bottom of the display above the options area. The second part of keys pop up the communication establishment interface when activated, and pop up the corresponding expression or social interface elements for further operation of the user when activated. And contracting the expansion menu into an expandable button in response to the user completing an operation related to the selected second partial key, expression option or social option. In response to a user's click operation of the expansion button, the expansion menu is preferably presented in a single line in the lateral direction, with the expansion menu and expansion button being located at a position at the bottom of the display, above the option area. And, publishing the object (e.g., the above-described red envelope, emoticon, photograph, etc.) selected by the user through the one or more options in the message area.

Optionally, the extended menu described above may further include a menu option to initiate a voice or video call with the current contact when activated, a menu option to initiate a short message service with the current contact when activated, a menu option to initiate a payment action for the current contact when activated, a menu option to initiate a video conference with a group of contacts that the current contact and the electronic device user themselves belong to when activated.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the tab of the known contact tab is operable to output the known contact tab via a display for the electronic device, including arranging a plurality of displayed known contact communication record thumbnail sets, each known contact communication record thumbnail set including a corresponding known contact and newly occurring communication information with the known contact, respectively. The tag of the known contact tab is operable to output the known contact tab via a display for the electronic device, including arranging a plurality of displayed unknown contact communication record thumbnail sets, each unknown contact communication record thumbnail set including a corresponding unknown contact and newly occurring communication information with the unknown contact, respectively. A label of a dialprogram tab operable to output a dialing interface through a display for an electronic device, the dialing interface comprising: virtual numeric keypad, telephone number entry box, and call options. For a dial-up interface, the method of these embodiments further comprises the steps of: 1) Responding to the click operation of the user through the virtual digital keyboard, and presenting the corresponding telephone number in a telephone number input box; 2) In response to a user operation for a call option, a communication targeting a telephone number is established through the mobile telephone network.

In still another embodiment of the present application, there is also provided an electronic apparatus including: a display, a processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured for execution by the processor unit, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the operations of any of the methods of the present application.

In still another embodiment of the present application, there is also provided an electronic apparatus including: a physical key set (or physical key set), a spring probe connector, and a communication device including a display, a processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs. The physical key set is detachably coupled to the processor unit through a spring probe connector; wherein one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the operations of any of the methods of the present application.

Optionally, in the electronic device of some embodiments, the electronic device further includes a base, the spring probe connector is a pogpin connector, and the physical key group is configured on the base; the pin hole interface and the probe interface of the pogpin connector are correspondingly arranged on the mobile communication device and the base and are respectively connected with the processor unit and the entity key group. The one or more programs include an operating system and/or application manager that includes instructions for performing the operations of any of the methods of the present application.

Optionally, in the electronic device of some embodiments, the one or more programs further comprise a communication program comprising instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 18 to 34 in combination with the application management program; the communication program is integrated with or independent of the operating system; the communication program is further executable by the processor unit to: switching the electronic device between the wireless local area network and the mobile data network according to at least one of i) ambient communication network conditions, ii) connection or disconnection of the connector.

Optionally, in the electronic device of some embodiments, the virtual key set corresponds in form to the physical key set.

Optionally, in the electronic device of some embodiments, the virtual key set and the physical key set have consistency with respect to at least one of: the virtual keys of the virtual key group are configured in the current interface, are positioned in a column on the right side of the current interface, and the physical keys of the physical key group are configured in a column on the right side of the electronic device, for example, can be configured on the right side of the display, are positioned outside the display and are positioned on the same side of the electronic device as the display. Further, the key set may include: a plurality of virtual push or toggle keys arranged in a column to the right of the current interface and/or a plurality of physical push or toggle keys arranged in a column to the right of the display. The user may make inputs not only via the touch sensitive display, touch sensitive surface, but also via physical/mechanical controls, such as knobs or buttons. For this reason, the description is omitted.

The keys of the key set, when pressed, trigger the electronic device to generate a signal to operate, or activate, a Feature of the application program to implement a function of the application. The inventors have studied to find that for common applications, the number of functions that are important or commonly used by the user is typically not more than 5, e.g. 3-4. For example, an instant messaging program may include several primary communication functions: "send voice message", "listen to voice message", "on-line video/audio call", etc., while for album applications several main image processing functions may be included: "take a picture/video", "view a photograph", etc. Thus, a corresponding number of keys, 3 or 4, may be provided in the electronic device, operating the application program to run these functions, respectively. Of course, preferably, these 3 or 4 keys may be centrally disposed on the same level of interface of the application to facilitate direct user access to them without the need to open further levels of interfaces, sub-interfaces or floating layers. Keys corresponding to other auxiliary functions (e.g., expression pack and redness pack functions for the contact communication interface) can be collectively arranged in an expandable menu, which is abbreviated as an expandable button by default and displayed in an expanded manner according to the needs of the user. That is, in response to the user's operation of these expandable buttons, an expanded menu including buttons corresponding to the functions of the emoticons, the redbooks, etc. is (temporarily) presented laterally above the menu area, and in response to the user's operation of these buttons, the object (e.g., the redbook or the emotion, etc.) selected by the user through these buttons is posted to the message area. Because the partial function keys are configured in the expandable menu on the interface, the expandable menu is default contracted into the form of one expandable button and is only displayed on the user interface according to the need, the constitution of interface elements is simplified, and the occupation of other necessary or important interface elements on the user interface is increased; visual effects are improved, so that misoperation of a user or time cost for selecting among excessive interface elements is reduced, and accessibility, interactivity and interaction efficiency of the interface to the user are improved to a certain extent.

Optionally, two or more keys functionally corresponding to each other may be disposed in association with each other on the current interface or on the entity of the electronic device, for example, disposed in close proximity in space, so as to facilitate the cognition and operation of the user. For example, "send voice message" and "listen to voice message" in the instant messaging program, "send short message" and "access short message" in the mobile phone application program, "play photos" and "pause play" in the album application program. Whereas functionally relatively independent keys, or more frequently used keys, such as the "on-line video/audio call" key for instant messaging programs, may be provided separately from the other keys in the key set. In some embodiments, the "online video/audio call" key may be spaced apart a distance from the pairing (key pair) of the keys of "send voice message" and "listen to voice message".

Preferably, the key set comprises 2-5 (e.g. 3-4) operation keys, such as keys, operable on the above-mentioned main features or functions of the application. The 3-4 operation keys correspond to 3-4 main functions of the application program on the current interface. Wherein, various software capabilities of the application program on the current interface are integrated into 3-4 main functions for the user to operate the application program through the 3-4 operation keys. The design of 3 or 4 operating keys balances two factors: 1) Corresponding to the main capabilities of the software on the current interface, 2) meets the memory capabilities of the user, especially the elderly. Specifically, if the number of keys is excessive, difficulty may be brought to the user in learning the functions of the respective keys; if the number of keys is too small, such as 1, the primary resources provided by a piece of software may not be fully utilized, and the provided features or characteristics (features) of the software are wasted to some extent. The design of 3 or 4 operation keys ensures that the interactivity of the application program is maintained, so that the capability of the application program is fully utilized, and the cognition and operation of the application program by the user through the electronic equipment are relatively simplified. In the following description, it will be explained by way of example a communication application and an album application how 3 operation keys of an electronic device support a user to operate both applications to use their main software features.

Optionally, in the electronic device of some embodiments, the one or more programs further comprise an album application, and the operating system and/or application management program further comprises instructions executable by the processor unit to cause the electronic device to: responding to a sixth switching operation of a user on a current interface, a seventh switching operation of an interface switching key or a selection operation of a user on options corresponding to the album application interface in a region where a plurality of options are located, and outputting the album application interface on a display; and

in response to the album application interface being currently output to the display, the application operating section is correspondingly configured to be operable to run a plurality of properties of the album application.

Optionally, in the electronic device of some embodiments, the plurality of characteristics includes a photographing characteristic, a playing characteristic, a pause characteristic; and the key group comprises a first key, a second key and a third key, and is operable to respectively call a photographing characteristic, a playing characteristic and a pause characteristic of the album application.

Optionally, in the electronic device of some embodiments, the operating system and/or application management program further comprises instructions that when executed by the processor unit cause the electronic device to functionally reconfigure the first key, the second key, and the third key to be operable to invoke the following features provided by the first contact communication interface, respectively, in response to the first contact communication interface being currently output on the display:

Characteristics a): when the first key, the second key, and the third key are associated with a wireless data transmission network, i) transmitting a voice message over the wireless data transmission network; ii) accessing a voice message received over a wireless data transmission network; iii) Establishing an audio-video call through a wireless data transmission network; or alternatively

Characteristics B): when the first key, the second key and the third key are associated with the mobile telephone network, a) sending a short message service through the mobile telephone network; b) Accessing a short message service received through a mobile telephone network; c) Voice telephony services are established over a mobile telephone network.

In still another embodiment of the present application, there is also provided an information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display, including: apparatus for performing any one of the methods of the present application.

In yet another embodiment of the present application, there is also provided a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium including one or more programs for execution by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions, which when executed by the one or more processors, cause the electronic device to perform the operations of any of the methods of the present application

Optionally, the non-transitory computer readable storage medium according to some embodiments, the one or more programs include an operating system and/or application management program comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of the electronic device, cause the electronic device to perform the operations of any of the methods of the present application

Optionally, in a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium according to some embodiments, the application management program is integrated with or independent of the operating system, the one or more programs further comprise a communication program comprising instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors of the electronic device in combination with the application management program, cause the electronic device to perform the operations of any one of the methods of the present application.

Optionally, the communication program is at least partially integrated with or independent of the operating system in a non-transitory computer readable storage medium according to some embodiments.

In still another embodiment of the present application, there is also provided an electronic apparatus including: a display, a processor unit and a touch-sensitive surface unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect a contact; wherein the processor unit is coupled to the display and the touch-sensitive surface unit, the processing unit being programmed to perform the steps of any of the methods of the application.

Optionally, in the electronic device according to some embodiments, the one or more programs include an operating system program and/or an application management program configured to be executed by the processor unit, the operating system program and/or the application management program including instructions for performing the operations of any one of the methods in the present application.

Optionally, in the electronic device according to some embodiments, the application manager is integrated with the operating system, or the application manager is an application independent of the operating system but installable to the operating system. The one or more programs further comprise a communication program comprising instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors of the electronic device in combination with the application management program, cause the electronic device to perform the operations of any of the methods of the present application.

Optionally, in the electronic device according to some embodiments, the communication program is at least partially integrated with the operating system, or is an application-level program independent of the operating system but installable on the operating system.

In addition, in another embodiment of the present application, there is further provided a resource providing method for an electronic device, where at least one interface is configured in the electronic device and is capable of being output through a display, where the display may be a part of the electronic device, and of course, the electronic device may not include the display, in other words, the display may be a separate display unit independent of the electronic device, such as a television, and the method includes:

Presenting an interface for the first application of the at least one interface on the display;

at least one option configured in thumbnail form is provided on the display, respectively associated with the at least one interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one option is operable to output the at least one interface via a display in a one-to-one correspondence.

Optionally, the at least one option may include a first option corresponding to the first application interface. In particular, these options may also include graphical identifications, icons, etc. for contacts of the communication application interface, such as contact avatars; and icons for application programs, etc., which will not be described in detail.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one option is configured at a top/bottom of the display or at a side of the display, in other words, the at least one option is configured in a peripheral area of the first contact communication interface or other interface currently presented on the display, and the method further includes the steps of: at least one option is mobile presented in response to a user switching operation for the at least one option.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one option is arranged at least partially laterally to a bottom of the display, the moving presenting step further comprising: the at least one option is presented moving from part to part in response to a user switching operation for a lateral area, or so-called horizontal area, bar area, in which the at least one option is located. For example, all or a portion of the at least one option may be arranged in a single row or an array of two rows in a stripe-like or lateral area along the bottom of the display.

Alternatively, in some embodiments, at least one option may be presented by a bar area that is equally divided into a number of sections, each section including the same number of options, the same number being 3-6. For example, each section may include 5 options, or each section may include 4 options. The stripe-shaped region is located laterally at the bottom of the display and has a width in the longitudinal direction of 1.5cm-2.5cm, preferably 1.8cm-2.4cm, for example 2.0cm, 2.1cm, 2.2cm or 2.3cm. With this size of the bar area, a user, including elderly people, can clearly identify various options (e.g., contact head portraits) without occupying too many of the main functional areas of the display.

It should be understood that: alternatively, all of the at least one option may also be considered as a special case of part of the at least one option. If the at least one option includes only 4 options, the entire 4 options may alternatively be collectively configured into one bar area of the bottom of the display. When the user applies a switching operation such as sliding to the strip-shaped area, the positions of the 4 options on the display are changed or moved by a certain amplitude, so that a visual prompt is generated for the user: no further options are subsequently available for loading.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one option further comprises a second option; the resource providing method further comprises the steps of: in response to a user selection of a second option in the bar area, switching the first application interface to an application interface corresponding to the second option on the display, such as a communication application interface for multiple contacts in at least one interface configured in the electronic device, or a conversation interface for a single contact, such as a communication interface for the first contact, and simultaneously formally differentiating the second option in the bar area. The differentiation in this form may be, for example, highlighting the corresponding option or adding a border to the option, and may be omitted here for the sake of brevity, as compared with other options for enlarging the display, including dynamic display of flickering, and other changes in visual characteristics.

Optionally, in some embodiments, at least one interface is configured in sequence, and the resource providing method further includes: at least one interface is output through the display in a configuration order in which the at least one interface is configured in response to a plurality of switching operations by the user for a middle portion of the display. The middle part of the display may be: such as an area of the display for presenting a user interface, such as the first application interface, which is also applicable to some embodiments described below, which may not be described in detail elsewhere.

Optionally, the resource providing method of some embodiments further includes: in response to a plurality of switching operations of a user for a middle part of the display, such as a region of the display for presenting the first application interface, sequentially and correspondingly outputting at least one interface through the display according to the sequence of at least one option in the strip-shaped region, and differentially presenting the options corresponding to the current interface in the strip-shaped region in form.

Optionally, in some embodiments, if the user applies a single switching operation to the middle of the display, the interface presented adjacent to the first application interface in the at least one interface is switched on the display in response to the single switching operation of the user to the first application interface. The "middle of display" described above may include some portion of the first contact communication interface, or the operation of a portion of the display other than the menu area or the single line/row area, which is not described in detail elsewhere.

Optionally, the method of some embodiments further comprises: in response to a single switching operation of the user for the first application interface, switching from the first application interface to an interface corresponding to an option adjacent to the first option in the at least one option on the display, and presenting the adjacent options differently in form in the bar area.

Optionally, in some embodiments described above and below, the various switching operations of the first switching operation, the second switching operation, the third switching operation, the fourth switching operation, the fifth switching operation, the sixth switching operation, and so on may include a drag gesture, a slide gesture, a touch action, and so on for the display, where these predetermined interaction gestures are preferably single operations, and may also have a certain direction definition, such as a slide gesture to the left or right on the display, and so on.

Because at least one option represents at least one interface respectively in a thumbnail form, the thumbnail menu item can present more options such as contacts, applications and the like for a user in a smaller scale on the current interface, so that the user can globally know other available options through the current interface, and the user can select and position a plurality of application options configured by the electronic equipment, thereby having a navigation function. The user can also respond to the switching operation of the user to switch a plurality of contact options or application options in batches part by part, so a man-machine interface for improving the interactive operation efficiency is provided for the user, and the operability of the related electronic equipment and the accessibility of the related information are improved, so that the user can quickly browse or select the application program which the user desires to use or the contact person needing communication.

Optionally, in the resource providing method of some embodiments, the first contact communication interface includes a message area and a communication option group, where the communication option group is respectively associated with at least one communication network. And the resource providing method of this embodiment further includes: in response to a user operation on the set of communication options, a plurality of communication information with the first contact via the at least one communication network is output in a message area.

Optionally, the at least one communication network comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks; the communication option group is respectively associated with a plurality of wireless communication networks; the plurality of communication information is attributed to at least two business properties. And, the communication information outputting step further includes: i) Responding to the operation of a user on the communication option group, and establishing communication with the first contact person through the plurality of wireless communication networks to generate a plurality of communication information; ii) outputting said plurality of communications via a message area on said first contact communication interface.

It should be noted that: here, in the above embodiments, the interface layout of the contact interface with the communication function, the configuration including the interface elements such as the key set and the message area included in the contact interface for communication, and the method of the functions of each interface element and the cooperative working between the interface elements, or the resource providing method for the communication interface may be described in detail in other embodiments of the present application, and all other methods related to the communication interface and the related resource providing method may be combined with the foregoing to form a modification example, which is not described herein.

Optionally, one or more interfaces in at least one interface in the electronic device described above, where the running application is mainly deployed or configured locally on the electronic device, for example, the communication application corresponding to the contact communication interface is mainly configured locally on the electronic device. The one or more interfaces belong to a single application or to an associated plurality of applications. The at least one interface is used as a system level User Interface (UI), abbreviated as a system UI, of the electronic device and is integrated into a single application, so that one interface of the at least one interface is preferentially displayed on the display after the electronic device is started and loaded.

Optionally, the communication interface for some contacts in the at least one interface may be preferentially presented on the display after the electronic device is started, and other interfaces in the at least one interface, such as an album application interface, may also be switchably presented on the display in response to a switching operation such as a sliding gesture of a user. Wherein preferably, an application program collection interface is also included in at least one interface. These application aggregation interfaces are similar to common desktop interfaces, providing an operational portal, such as icons, shortcuts, etc., for different multiple applications in a function/function group (function group) division guide.

In the prior art, a communication device such as a mobile phone belongs to a system priority or a system desktop priority starting method in a starting loading process, and a desktop interface is also often provided with different entries such as icons aiming at a plurality of application programs in a guiding manner according to functional division.

However, the resource providing method in some embodiments of the present invention belongs to Individual application (indivisual App) prioritization, such as contact prioritization, which promotes accessibility of resources that may be of greater interest to the user, providing applications on the display that may have more interaction possibilities to the user. For example, in some embodiments, the contact interface is preferentially displayed on the display after the electronic device is started, which constitutes a navigation method or an interaction method for contacts and related information based on the interpersonal relationship of the user, and can also be understood as a resource providing method oriented to the social object of the user. The resources of the electronic equipment are configured by taking the contacts and related information as the guide, rather than taking the programs and the functional groups thereof as the guide, so that the communication functions or the social communication-based functions of the mobile communication devices such as the smart phones are enhanced to a certain extent. In the past and at present, as smartphones have replaced feature phones, diverse applications have been installed in the phones, the communication functions of the phones as a whole have been weakened, and accessibility of the communication functions and related information has also been reduced, which has also reduced operability for users who are more concerned about instant messaging with objects in interpersonal relationships or social circles.

Optionally, with further operations of the user, a plurality of application programs with different functions may also be provided to the user through a subsequent application set interface in the plurality of interfaces. Thus, in the method or the smart phone and other devices according to some embodiments of the present invention, user interaction with an individual application as a preference is constructed for a user, and meanwhile, accessibility of other application programs with multiple different functions is also maintained for the user, where the individual application configured preferentially may include an image software application for a video camera, a still camera and other video applications of a photographing fan, and a weblet, a Wechat and other software applications of an instant messaging fan, because most of the time of a social fan needs to access the weblet, the Wechat and other software applications. Of course, if the common contacts are generally limited to a few specific objects, the communication interfaces for the several common contacts may also be configured preferentially on top of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device independently one by one (one by one). The method is an interaction mode centering on a single contact person, and is more applicable to some users including multifunctional configuration, high-professional-degree configuration, high-operation-capability requirement or entertainment configuration of the inadaptation smart phone for middle-aged and elderly people.

According to the method or the device, a plurality of interfaces including a single contact interface, an application program interface or a set interface further comprising an application program can be output to a display one by one through operation modes switched in parallel, so that the interaction level of the electronic device is flattened, the efficiency of user interaction operation is improved, and a new interaction entrance, interaction experience and interaction operation path are provided for a user. Meanwhile, the technical means in the embodiments also solve the technical problem that the smart phone with the functional architecture designed into the form of an operating system plus various applications or a desktop plus applications lacks of fundamentally (basic) to guide and configure resources by individual functions and individual objects, which also results in the failure to support the user to conveniently access more interesting application programs or information through simplified interaction operation, and the technical problem is brought by thinking and technical prejudice in terms of software design which are long-term inherited by the person in the field.

In another embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a resource providing method for an electronic device, wherein the electronic device includes a communication operation interface associated with at least one communication network, the method including the steps of:

i) Presenting a communication interface for a first contact or a first group of contacts on a display, including a message area;

ii) establishing communication with the first contact or the first contact group member over at least one communication network to generate a plurality of communication information in response to user operation of the communication operation interface; and

iii) And outputting a plurality of communication information through a message area on the first contact communication interface.

The communication operation interface is configured on the machine as a man-machine interface in a software or hardware form for a user to operate to establish/trigger communication of the electronic device. In a different scenario of some other embodiments, or also referred to as a communication enabling unit, user interface element, communication operation options, etc.

Optionally, the outputting step of the method of some embodiments further comprises: and in response to the occurrence of the latest one of the plurality of communication information, outputting the latest one in the message area independently, wherein the profile information of the contact corresponding to the message content is configured at a position on the contact interface outside the message area independently, and the profile information is not displayed in the message area.

Optionally, the outputting step in some embodiments further comprises: and continuously updating and outputting the latest piece of the communication information on the first contact person communication interface or the message area of the first contact person group independently, wherein the profile information is configured at a position outside the message area on the contact person interface independently, and the profile information of the related contact person is not displayed in the message area.

Optionally, the latest message that occurs with the contact in some embodiments includes both the latest message received from the contact and the latest message sent to the contact. Specifically, a first message occurs between the first contact or the second contact at the last time and is displayed separately in the message area. Currently, when the second message occurs between the first contact and the second contact, the latest message output step in the method of some embodiments further includes: in response to the sending or receiving of the second message to or from the first contact, the last message (i.e., the first message described above) is replaced with the second message for separate display in the message area. Similarly, the first message may be a message received from or sent to the first/second contact. Of course, it should be understood that: the second message may be a reply to the first message or may be content or logically unrelated to the first message, which is also applicable to situations where the user of the electronic device communicates with multiple contacts in the group of contacts.

In the "receive→reply" scenario of some embodiments, the step of outputting the latest message individually through the message area may further include: sub-step a) in response to receiving a third message from the first contact, displaying the third message separately in the message area, sub-step B) in response to the user activating a send button in the communication operation interface, sending a reply message to the third contact and replacing the latest received message with the reply message, i.e. the third message, displaying the third message separately in the message area. In the "send- > receive" scenario in the scenario in which the members of the contact group continuously send messages, the step of outputting the latest message individually through the message area may further include: substep C) in response to a user activating a send button in the communication operations interface on the first contact group interface, sending a fourth message for a third contact in the first contact group and displaying the fourth message separately in the message area, substep D) in response to receiving a seventh message from the third contact or fourth contact, displaying the seventh message separately in the message area instead of the fourth message. In other embodiments, in the scenario that the members of the contact group continuously send messages, the step of outputting the latest message individually through the message area may further include: substep E) transmitting a fifth message for a fourth contact in the first contact group and displaying the fifth message in the message area separately in place of the current message in the message area in response to the user activating a transmit key in the communication operation interface on the first contact group interface, substep F) transmitting a sixth message for the fifth contact in the first contact group and displaying the sixth message in the message area separately in place of the fifth message in response to the user activating a transmit key in the communication operation interface on the first contact group interface.

Optionally, the step of outputting the latest message further includes a) a step of sending the latest message: in response to a user operation of the communication operation interface or the message area, a message input interface is provided, and a message input by the user through the message input interface is transmitted. The message input interface may include a soft keyboard and a message area as an input box, or the message input interface may also include hardware such as a microphone for audio collection, and optionally may also include interface elements on the contact interface for prompting of audio collection, and the like. The step of outputting the latest information further comprises the following steps: b) The latest message access step: the latest message is output audibly or textually through the message area in response to user operation of the communication operations interface or the message area, wherein the text output of the latest message may be a complete and/or enlarged output of the entire message.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one communication network includes a plurality of communication networks, the plurality of communication information corresponds to the plurality of communication networks, and has different service properties, and the communication operation interface includes a key group virtually provided on the first contact communication interface and/or physically provided on the electronic device, and is associated with the plurality of communication networks.

Optionally, in some embodiments, profile information for the first contact is configured separately outside the message area. A plurality of communication information including at least two of voice service information, short message service information and data service information; the plurality of communication networks includes a plurality of wireless communication networks including a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network; the outputting step further includes: at least two of the voice service information, the short message service information and the data service information are integrated to output the latest one of the data service information to the message area in a single continuously updated manner.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the profile information on the contact communication interface is configured substantially centrally above and below the message area, preferably the profile information is located above the message area and the size, size or breadth, of the two is substantially equivalent, e.g., the area of the profile information on the display is approximately 40% -120% of the area of the message area. Additionally, the area of the profile information may alternatively be 20% -40% of the effective display area on the display, as this ratio also applies to the display area occupied by the message area on the display. The plurality of communication information may include at least two of voice service information, short message service information, and data service information; the plurality of communication networks includes a plurality of wireless communication networks including a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network; the outputting step further includes: in response to the occurrence of a latest one of at least two of the voice service information and the short message service information, the latest one is output separately in the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the communication establishing step and the outputting step may include the following conditional sub-steps, respectively, for the key group to be communicatively associated with different communication networks:

when the key set is associated with a mobile telephone network, the communication establishing step includes: in response to a user operation of the keypad, communication is established with the first contact over the mobile telephone network to generate voice service information and/or short message service messages. Correspondingly, the outputting step further includes: only for the latest one of the voice service information and/or the short message service information, continuously updating and outputting the latest one in the message area;

when the key set is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, the communication establishing step comprises the following steps: in response to a user operation of the keypad, communication is established with the first contact over the wireless local area network or the mobile data network to generate a data traffic message. Correspondingly, the outputting step further includes: only the latest data service message is continuously updated and output in the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the profile information of the first contact is substantially centrally disposed on the first contact communication interface and is located above the message area, and the size (size) of the profile information is comparable to the message area, for example, the profile information occupies about 60% -90% of the area of the message area on the display. Optionally, the method of this embodiment may further include the steps of: expanding the message area and optionally configuring profile information abbreviated over the message area; and, the outputting step further includes: the method comprises the steps of outputting a plurality of communication information collectively in a message area, wherein the plurality of communication information comprises at least two of voice service information, short message service information and data service information.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the first contact communication interface is provided with profile information of the first contact, and further including the steps of: expanding the message area and optionally configuring profile information abbreviated over the message area; and, the outputting step further includes: when the key group is related to the mobile telephone network, the voice service information and/or the short message service information which are arranged according to the occurrence sequence are collectively output through the message area; when the key group is associated with the wireless data transmission network, data service messages arranged according to the occurrence sequence are collectively output through the message area.

Optionally, the method of some embodiments further comprises the step of: expanding the profile information and optionally reducing the message area in response to an operation on the profile information or the message area; and, the outputting step further includes: and outputting the latest one of the plurality of communication information in the message area independently, wherein the plurality of communication information comprises at least two of voice service information, short message service information and data service information.

Optionally, the method of some embodiments further comprises the step of: integrating voice service information and/or short message service messages to output the latest one of them alone in a message area when the key group is associated with the mobile phone network; when the key set is associated with the wireless data transmission network, only the latest data service message is continuously updated and output in the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the key presses are respectively associated with a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network, and the communication establishing step further comprises: and responding to the operation of the user on the key set, and respectively establishing communication with the first contact person through the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network to generate at least two of voice service information, short message service information and data service information. Wherein the data traffic message comprises one or more of the following: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data.

Optionally, for a data service message or SMS service message, etc., the latest message is output alone or multiple messages are output collectively through the message area, and in the electronic device, the audio message or video message may be output automatically in an audio manner and/or in a video manner (e.g., through a display, a message area on an interactive interface, a speaker) further in response to the audio message or video message being received by the electronic device. Thus, the user is not required to rely on manual operation to acquire the message such as the voice message. For text messages of SMS, the conversion from text to speech may be used first, and then the message content may be output in audio mode. This optional variation may also be applied to any other embodiment of the present invention, and may not be described here again.

In addition, in another embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a resource providing method for an electronic device, where the electronic device includes a communication operation interface, and is associated with at least one communication network, the method including:

i) Presenting a communication interface for a first contact or a first group of contacts on a display;

iii) And outputting a plurality of communication information through the first contact communication interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one communication network comprises a plurality of communication networks having two or more different traffic properties, the communication operation interface comprises a key set virtually provided on the first contact communication interface and/or physically provided on the electronic device, associated with the plurality of communication networks.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of communication networks comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks including a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network; the keys are respectively associated with the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network, and the communication establishing step further comprises: in response to a user operation of the key set, communication is established with the first contact through the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively, to generate a plurality of communication information.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of communications information includes: voice service information, at least two of short message service information and data service information; the above-mentioned step of establishing communication via a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network further comprises the following two sub-steps a), b):

a) When the keypad is associated with the mobile telephone network, communication is established with the first contact through the mobile telephone network to generate voice service information and/or short message service messages in response to a user operation of the keypad. b) When the key set is associated with the wireless data transmission network, in response to a user operation of the key set, communication is established with the first contact through the wireless data transmission network to generate a data service message.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the wireless data transmission network includes a wireless local area network and a mobile data network, the first contact communication interface further includes a handover option, and the method further includes the steps of: the keypad is selectively configured to be associated with a mobile telephone network, a mobile data network, or a wireless local area network based on at least one of i) user operation of a handoff option, ii) a connection status of the electronic device to the wireless local area network, or iii) a peripherally available communication network condition.

In addition, in another embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a resource providing method for an electronic device, where at least one interface is configured in the electronic device and is capable of being output through a display, where the display may be a part of the electronic device, and of course, the electronic device may not include the display, in other words, the display may be a separate display unit independent of the electronic device, such as a television, and the electronic device includes a communication operation interface associated with at least one communication network, and the method includes:

presenting a communication interface for the first contact in at least one interface on a display, including a message area;

in response to a user operation of the communication operation interface, a plurality of communication information with the first contact via the at least one communication network is output in a message area.

The message region (message region) is a region for outputting communication information on the contact communication interface, and may be explicit or implicit, but the message region corresponds to the presence message region as long as the communication information is output on the communication interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, at least one option configured in a thumbnail form is provided on the display, each associated with at least one interface.

Optionally, the at least one option is operable to output at least one interface via the display in a one-to-one correspondence. Wherein the at least one option may include a first option corresponding to a first contact communication interface. In particular, these options may be a contact's avatar, application icon, etc.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one option is configured at a top/bottom of the display, or is configured beside the display, the method further comprising the steps of: at least one option is mobile presented in response to a user switching operation for the at least one option.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one option is arranged laterally in a bar-shaped area along a bottom of the display, and the moving presenting step further includes: at least one option is presented in part by part in response to a user switching operation for the strip area. For example, all or a portion of at least one option may be configured in a single row or an array of two rows in a top/bottom bar area of the display.

It should be understood that: alternatively, all of the at least one option may also be considered as a special case of part of the at least one option. If the at least one option includes only 4 options, the entire 4 options may alternatively be collectively configured into one bar area of the bottom of the display. When the user applies a switching operation such as sliding to the bar area, the positions of the 4 options on the display are changed or moved by a certain amplitude, and a visual prompt is generated for the user in a manner of moving/scrolling the 4 options: no further options are subsequently available for loading.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one option further comprises a second option; the resource providing method further comprises the steps of: in response to a user selection of a second option in the bar area, switching the first contact communication interface to an interface corresponding to the second option on the display, and synchronously formally differentiating the second option in the bar area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, at least one interface is configured in sequence, and the resource providing method further includes: at least one interface is output through the display in a configuration order in which the at least one interface is configured in response to a plurality of switching operations by the user for a middle portion of the display. The middle part of the display may be: for example, an area of the display for presenting a user interface, such as the first contact communication interface, or an area of the display for presenting an application interface, which is applicable to some embodiments described below, may not be described in detail elsewhere.

Optionally, the resource providing method of some embodiments further includes: in response to a plurality of switching operations by a user for a middle portion of the display, e.g., an area on the display for presenting the first contact communication interface, sequentially and correspondingly outputting at least one interface through the display in an order of at least one option in the strip area, and formally differentially presenting the options corresponding to the current interface in the strip area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, if the user applies a single switching operation to the middle of the display, the interface presented adjacent to the first contact communication interface in the at least one interface is switched on the display in response to the single switching operation by the user for the first contact communication interface.

Optionally, the method of some embodiments further comprises: in response to a single switching operation of the user for the first contact communication interface, switching from the first contact communication interface to an interface corresponding to an option adjacent to the first option in the at least one option on the display, and presenting the adjacent options differently in form in the bar area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one communication network comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks; the communication operation interface comprises a key group virtually provided on the first contact communication interface and/or physically provided on the electronic device, associated with a plurality of wireless communication networks; a plurality of communications belonging to at least two business properties; the communication information outputting step further includes: in response to a user operation on the key set, establishing communication with a first contact through a plurality of wireless communication networks to generate a plurality of communication information; and integrating and outputting a plurality of communication information through a message area on the first contact communication interface.

Notably: the electronic device may include either one of 1) the virtual key set configured on the first contact communication interface and 2) the physical key set (or physical key set) configured in hardware, or both. And the virtual key set and the physical key set may be associated with at least one communication network, respectively, operable to establish a communication, a communication link, a communication channel, between the electronic device and the electronic device of the first contact via the communication networks, by means of which communication resources a user may communicate with the first contact to generate communication information. In addition, the at least one communication network may comprise a plurality of communication networks of different traffic properties, such as a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network, etc. The virtual key set on the first contact interface may be associated with a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network, respectively, in a communication function, so as to support a user to establish communication with the first contact by using the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network by operating the virtual key set. Similarly, the physical key set may be associated with a mobile phone network and a wireless data transmission network, respectively, in terms of communication functions, so as to support the user to establish communication with the first contact using the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network by operating the physical key set. I.e. the virtual key set and the physical key set may each independently enable communication establishment between the user and the first contact.

In other words, while the virtual key set and the physical key set may have some consistency and similarity in form, the two may be independent in communication function. Specifically, there is a first association (association for enabling communication) between the entity key group and the communication network, and there is a second association between the virtual key group and the communication network, where the two associations may be independent, i.e. the user may operate the virtual key group and the entity key group respectively, so as to implement independent access to the associated communication network to establish communication with the first contact. Other related embodiments of the present invention are described in detail and are not described in detail herein.

In addition, the virtual key set described above may also be referred to in some embodiments as a communication option, a communication option set, a user interface element, configured as buttons, keys, etc. of software on a contact interface. Specifically, 1, 2, 3, 4 or more buttons or the like may be included. While a physical key set may be referred to in some embodiments as a physical operator, physical keyboard, etc.

The virtual key group and the physical key group are functionally corresponding, and may include 1, 2, 3, 4 or more physical keys, etc. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that: the virtual key set and the physical key set, although having different implementation forms, belong to the same means in some embodiments of the present invention, implement the same functions and achieve the same effects. For avoiding redundancy, in the method or the electronic device according to some embodiments of the present invention, the virtual key set is mainly used as an example, however, the physical key set may also be applied to the method or the electronic device according to these embodiments.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the plurality of wireless communication networks includes a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network, the wireless data transmission network including a wireless local area network and a mobile data network; the keys are respectively associated with the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network, and the communication establishing step further comprises:

in response to a user operation of the key set, establishing communication with the first contact via the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively, to generate a plurality of communication information, the plurality of communication information including: communication information and data service information of the mobile telephone network; wherein, the communication information of the mobile telephone network comprises: voice service information and short message service information; a data traffic message comprising one or more of the following: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the integrating outputting step further includes: and integrating and outputting at least two of the voice service information, the short message service information and the data service information to a message area.

Optionally, the integrated output step in some embodiments may further include two sub-steps: i) When the key set is associated with the mobile telephone network, outputting voice service information and/or short message service information through a message area on a first contact person communication interface; ii) outputting a data service message through a message area on the first contact communication interface when the keypad is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the first contact communication interface is provided with profile information of the first contact, and the integrating outputting step further includes: in response to the occurrence of the latest one of the plurality of communication information, the latest one is individually output in the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the first contact communication interface is provided with profile information of the first contact, and the step of integrating and outputting further includes the following two sub-steps: i) When the key group is associated with the mobile telephone network, in response to occurrence of communication information of the latest one of the mobile telephone networks, individually outputting the communication information of the latest one of the mobile telephone networks in the message area; 2) When the key set is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, the data service message of the latest one is individually output in a message area in response to occurrence of the data service message of the latest one.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the resource providing method further comprises the steps of: in response to a user operation on the profile information or the message area, the message area is expanded, and optionally the profile information is abbreviated over the message area. Wherein the integrating outputting step further comprises: the plurality of communication information are collectively output to the message area in time sequence.

Optionally, the resource providing method of some embodiments further includes the steps of: in response to a user operation on the profile information or the message area, the message area is expanded, and optionally the profile information is abbreviated over the message area. Wherein the integrating outputting step further comprises: when the key group is related to the mobile telephone network, the communication information of the mobile telephone network is collectively output to a message area according to the time sequence; when the key group is associated with the wireless local area network or the mobile data network, the data service messages are collectively output to the message area according to the time sequence.

Optionally, the resource providing method of some embodiments further includes the steps of: in response to an operation on the profile information or the message area, the message area is narrowed down and the presentation profile information is expanded. Wherein the integrating outputting step further comprises: outputting a latest piece of plural pieces of communication information individually in a message area

Optionally, the resource providing method of some embodiments further includes the steps of: in response to an operation on the profile information or the message area, the message area is narrowed down and the presentation profile information is expanded. Wherein the integrating outputting step further comprises: when the key group is related to the mobile telephone network, the communication information of the latest mobile telephone network is independently output in the message area; when the key group is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, the latest data service message is output in the message area.

In some embodiments, communication resources associated with multiple communication networks of different nature are integrated on the communication interface for the first contact object, centered on the first contact object and its communication interface, in other words, different communication resources in these electronic devices are directed towards the accessibility (communicative accessibility to afirst contact) of the communication to the first contact object, integrated with or assigned to the first contact object interface. This is different from the case where a communication tool such as a different communication program is used as a center and a contact is attached to one module of the communication tool (for example, an address book, a telephone directory, or the like for the contact) as one communication object to which the communication tool is applied. This shields the user from different communication tools/programs run by the electronic device during communication with the first contact object, from different communication networks accessed, and in some embodiments also from the user's operating system, which improves accessibility/accessibility of communications to the first contact object at the electronic device, operability of communication resources between the user and the first contact object, and related user experiences.

Optionally, the one or more options provided across the interface on the display include one or more of a contact option, a contact group option, a subscription number option, an application option. Wherein the options for the application program include a program name and/or a program icon. Options for a contact include an image (e.g., icon, avatar) and/or abbreviation of the contact. Further, the contact options also include an operating address of a communication application associated with the contact, a contact address of the contact, and at least one of: name, identity, relationship with the user of the second terminal, designation of the user of the second terminal, nickname. The options for the application also include the running address of the associated application, remote or local.

Optionally, the above-mentioned communication application program of the contact integrates some functions of the instant messaging application and the communication application for the mobile phone network in the mobile phone. Corresponding mobile phone numbers in a mobile communication network or corresponding identification codes (IDs) in a wireless data transmission network, such as a WLAN, are stored or mapped in the same program (such as the communication application program), and can be used by communication application programs in electronic equipment such as mobile phones used by users, and communication information is generated by establishing communication with communication tools used by the current contact through the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network according to the unique identification numbers (or understood as instant communication addresses/instant message addresses) corresponding to the mobile phone numbers and the corresponding communication networks of the contacts in instant communication. For users of electronic devices such as mobile phones, the application software to which the communication interface belongs perceives and experiences a single communication means and communication tool. In addition, the resources of the communication information aiming at different service properties in the communication process, including the communication interfaces of the communication networks corresponding to the different service properties, are positioned at the lower layer of the software architecture, and the interaction interfaces for outputting a plurality of communication information are positioned at the upper layer of the software architecture, and can be integrated in the communication application program.

In yet another embodiment of the present invention, there is provided another resource providing method for an electronic device, wherein at least one interface is configured in the electronic device and is outputtable through a display, wherein the display may be a part of the electronic device, and of course, the electronic device may not include the display, in other words, the display may be a separate display unit independent of the electronic device, such as a television, and the method includes:

providing a set of communication options on the display, associated with at least one communication network,

in response to a user operation on the set of communication options, a plurality of communication information with the first contact via the at least one communication network is output through the message area. Wherein one or more communication options in the set of communication options may establish a communication associated with each option in response to a user operation, or may also be referred to as a communication interface element, communication operation interface. Specifically, it may be provided in the form of a key group on the communication interface.

Optionally, the resource providing method of some embodiments further includes: at least one option configured in thumbnail form is provided through the display, respectively associated with at least one interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the at least one option is operable to output the at least one interface via the display in a one-to-one correspondence, wherein the at least one option includes a first option corresponding to the first contact communication interface.

Optionally, in some embodiments, a first set of at least one option is configured in a single row at the top/bottom of the display; or in a single column disposed beside the display, the resource providing method further comprises the steps of: in response to a user switching operation for the first set of options, switching in the single row area presents a second set of options of the at least one option.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the switching operation is a sliding operation, and the switching presenting step further includes any one of the following three steps:

a) Moving the first option group along the sliding operation direction to continuously present the second option group;

b) Moving the first set of options in the direction of the sliding operation to cancel the presentation of the first set of options part by part at the edge of the display, continuing to the first set of options, moving the second set of options into the area of the single row;

c) The first set of options is moved out of the display in the direction of the sliding operation and the second set of options follows the first set of options into the area of the single row.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the communication key group includes a first key and a second key, and when the current access network of the electronic device includes a wireless local area network, the electronic device may send a data service message through the wireless local area network in response to an operation of the first key, and output the data service message received via the wireless local area network through the message area and/or the speaker in response to an operation of the second key by the user; or alternatively

When the current access network of the electronic device comprises a mobile telephone network and does not comprise a wireless local area network, responding to the operation of a first key by a user, acquiring a voice signal of the user through a microphone of the electronic device and converting the voice signal into a short message service message, sending the short message service message to a current contact person through the mobile telephone network, and responding to the operation of a second key by the user, outputting the short message service message from the current contact person received through the mobile telephone network through a message area and/or a loudspeaker.

Optionally, in other embodiments, the communication key set includes a third key and a fourth key, when the electronic device communication key set is associated with the wireless local area network/mobile data network, the electronic device sends a data service message through the wireless local area network or the mobile data network in response to an operation of the third key, and outputs the data service message received via the wireless local area network or the mobile data network through the message area and/or the speaker in response to an operation of the fourth key by the user; or alternatively

When the communication key group of the electronic device is associated with the mobile telephone network, the short message service message is sent to the current contact person via the mobile telephone network in response to the operation of the third key by the user, and the short message service message received from the current contact person via the mobile telephone network is output through the message area and/or the loudspeaker in response to the operation of the fourth key by the user.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the foregoing short message service message sending step may further include, before the step of sending the short message service message, collecting a voice signal by a microphone of the electronic device and converting the voice signal into the foregoing short message service message; and, the step of outputting the short message service message may further include: the text content of the short message service message is converted into a voice signal and the voice signal is output through a speaker.

Optionally, in some embodiments, when in the first period of time the entity/virtual key group is associated with a mobile telephone network, the communication establishing step comprises: responding to the operation of the user on the entity/virtual key group, establishing communication with the first contact person through the mobile telephone network to generate voice service information and/or short message service information; the outputting step further includes: only the latest one of the voice service information and/or the short message service information is continuously updated and output in the message area. And when in the second period, the entity/virtual key group is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, the communication establishing step comprises: responding to the operation of the user on the entity/virtual key set, and establishing communication with the first contact person through a wireless local area network or a mobile data network to generate a data service message; the outputting step further includes: only the latest data service message is continuously updated and output in the message area.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the contact communication interface is loaded on the display after the electronic device is started, preferentially over other programs, as a first User Interface (UI) for the normal operating state of the electronic device.

It should be noted that: other programs described above may include, but are not limited to, at least one of the following: application programs other than the program to which the contact communication interface belongs, and operating system programs. Alternatively, a conventional operating system such as android may be customized to integrate a contact Interface-related program into the operating system of the electronic device to form a system-level single program, and use the contact Interface-related program component as an operating system User Interface (UI). Alternatively, the contact interface related program may be a single application program independent of the operating system, which is automatically executed during the startup phase of the electronic device, and is preferably loaded on the display relative to other application programs. Thus, after the electronic device is started and the user interface of the operating system is presented, a single program of the contact interface is automatically loaded, and the display is occupied in an exclusive mode.

The selective configuration of keys for multiple communication functions on the same contact interface means that the multiple keys may be associated with different service-specific communication networks, respectively, during the same time period. For example, the key set on the first contact interface includes four keys arranged in a column on the right side of the interface, wherein a first key and a second key of the four keys are respectively associated with a wireless data transmission network (WLAN or mobile data network), wherein the first key can collect user audio/video signals through a microphone and/or a camera and send the audio messages or video messages through the wireless data transmission network in response to a user click operation, and the second key can be operated by a user to output audio/video messages received through the wireless data transmission network through a speaker and/or a display. The third key and the fourth key of the four keys are respectively associated with the mobile telephone network, wherein the third key can be used for establishing voice telephone service through the mobile telephone network in response to a user click operation, and the fourth key can be used for allowing a user to input text content through a dialog box and establishing SMS service for the text content through the mobile telephone network in response to the user click operation. The selective configuration of the key sets on the contact interface is also applicable to other related embodiments, and is not described in detail herein. Of course, the selective configuration of the key set on the contact interface may further include a method or electronic device for performing "time-sharing multiplexing" on the key set on the contact interface in response to occurrence of different events (such as connection or disconnection between the host and the base of the communication device) or network switching operation of the user in the related embodiments, where the same key on the contact interface is associated with communication networks with different service properties respectively in different periods of time, which will not be described herein.

In a further embodiment of the invention, there is also provided another resource providing method for an electronic device, wherein the electronic device comprises a communication operation interface and at least one interface, the communication operation interface being associated with at least one communication network, the at least one interface being outputtable via a display, wherein the display may be part of the above-mentioned electronic device, of course the electronic device may not comprise the display, in other words the display may be a separate display unit, such as a television, independent of the electronic device, the method comprising:

Outputting a communication interface for a current contact in at least one interface through a display, the current contact communication interface including a message area;

profile information for the current contact is provided on the communication interface,

in response to a user operation of the communication operation interface, a plurality of communication information with the current contact via the at least one communication network is output in a message area.

Wherein the current contact is: the relevant information for the contact is currently loaded on a communication interface of a display for a contact, such as a first contact, with which the user is in communication interaction. Of course, along with the switching operation of the user on the communication interface, the current contact may also be a plurality of different contacts such as the second contact, the third contact, and the like. Correspondingly, the communication interface for the current contact may be a plurality of different communication interfaces such as a communication interface for the second contact and a communication interface for the third contact, and the communication interfaces may belong to at least one interface.

In yet another embodiment of the application, an electronic device includes a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface, a processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs; one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, and the one or more programs include instructions for performing the operations of any of the methods of the present application.

In some embodiments according to the application, there is also provided a computer-readable storage medium having instructions stored therein, which when executed by an electronic device having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform the operations of any of a plurality of methods in the application.

In some embodiments according to the present application, there is also provided a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium including one or more programs for execution by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions that when executed by the one or more processors cause the electronic device to perform any of a plurality of methods of the present application.

In some embodiments according to the application, there is also provided a computer program product comprising instructions which, when run on an electronic device, cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of the application.

In some embodiments according to the present application, there is also provided an electronic device including: a display, a processor unit and a touch-sensitive surface unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect a contact; wherein the processor unit is coupled to the display and the touch-sensitive surface unit, the processor unit being programmed to perform any one of the methods of the application.

In some embodiments according to the present application, there is also provided an electronic device including: a processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs comprising instructions that when executed by the one or more processors cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of the application.

Meanwhile, it should be noted that: although the method, electronic device, or non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of some embodiments are described as an electronic device that includes a display and/or a keyboard, in these embodiments, the electronic device may not include a display or a keyboard, and the processor unit is configured to perform the operations or instructions of any of the methods of the present application to output an associated user interface via a display that is separate from the electronic device, or the one or more programs include instructions that when executed by the one or more processors cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of the present application.

In some embodiments according to the present application, there is also provided a system comprising:

one or more processors; and a memory having stored thereon computer instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of the present application.

one or more processors; and a memory having stored thereon computer instructions that when executed by the one or more processors implement any of the methods of the present application.

In some embodiments of the resource providing method, a plurality of communication operation interfaces/user interface elements, such as a plurality of virtual keys, are provided on the first contact communication interface collectively, and the keys are respectively associated with different multiple communication networks, such as a mobile phone network, a mobile data network/WLAN, etc., so that different communication paths, different communication tools and different communication tools are integrated on the same user interface, which is centered on contacts, and simplified as guiding of interactive operation in the process of establishing communication between users and the contacts, so as to perform integrated configuration on communication resources, and make significant progress in operability and accessibility of communication resources or communication information of electronic devices or communication devices. The improvement in the embodiments of the present application reconstructs the functional architecture of the technical elements including the interactive interface elements in the mobile communication device, mutually coordinates the technical elements, redefines the functions of some technical features, has a certain development in the aspect of communication interaction, and has outstanding substantial characteristics compared with the mobile phones with functions as guiding in the prior art. The method or apparatus of these embodiments overcomes, to some extent, the thinking and technical bias of those skilled in the art of mobile communication devices, and in particular smart phones, in resource allocation and solution design, which is inherited by desktop and in electronic devices, and in smart phones, by a "platform/operating system + functionality" based logic architecture, and corresponding software resource provision that is guided by the division of the functionality or group of functions of the application.

In some embodiments of the resource providing methods, the association relationship between the key set and the communication networks with different service properties is selectively defined by dynamically configuring the communication operation interface such as the key set provided on the first contact interface. Such association is dynamically variable and may be reconfigured automatically or according to a user manual switching operation. This substantially masks the presence of multiple communication networks of different traffic properties between the user and the contact. In this way, the key groups can establish communication of different service properties, respectively, in response to an operation of the user. Such as voice telephony service, SMS, data service, etc., may be provided to the user through a single interactive interface. For users, the operation entrance of switching and complicated operation among communication software with different functions to obtain different communication functions is not needed, only a single interaction interface is needed to be used in the same software interface, and all available communication resources of the electronic equipment can be conveniently used through simple one or two operations of a key group (or called communication options, a communication option group and the like) and a mode switching option, the accessibility of the communication resources to users is improved, and the operability of the electronic equipment connected to the communication network is improved.

In addition, not only the instant messaging and mobile phone communication functions are integrated into a single program, but also the information such as the corresponding mobile phone number and the identification code of the instant messaging application of the same contact in the communication networks with different service properties can be integrated into the single program. Therefore, only a single address book is required to be established in the electronic equipment, and information such as the address book, the communication record and the like of the same contact person are not required to be stored in software with different communication functions in a redundant mode. Nor does the user have to access these scattered and redundant information separately. In addition, the key set is directly associated with the mobile phone number and the identification code in terms of the communication function, so that the user does not need to input the mobile phone number and log in according to the identification code, and communication of corresponding service properties can be established through one-key operation in the key set. The method has the advantages that the existence of contact ways such as mobile phone numbers, identification codes and the like is shielded for the user, the contact is used as a center, or the communication resources and man-machine interaction configuration method which take the interaction experience of the user as a guide can also be considered, so that the interaction logic of the communication between the user and the contact is simplified, the point touch is available, and the logic distance between the user and the available communication network resources is shortened.

The keypad maintains consistency in form throughout the selective and, in particular, automatic, dynamic association with different communication networks, which allows the interface elements presented to the user to be consistent despite the electronic device having a plurality of different available communication networks, which further masks the presence of multiple communication networks with the contacts. In some embodiments, when the SMS service is communicated with the contact person, the text content and the voice signal of the short message service message are mutually converted through the microphone and the loudspeaker of the electronic device, and the interaction between the SMS service message and the user is the same as the receiving and sending of the voice message of the data service, so that the user cannot perceive the change of the currently used communication network and the difference of corresponding service properties, the electronic device provides normalized interaction process and interaction experience to the outside, and the operability of software and accessibility of related information are improved.

In some embodiments of the resource providing methods described above, one or more of voice service information, short message service information, and data service information are integrated such that only a latest one of the pieces of information is output through the display, and in response to occurrence of the latest one of the pieces of communication information, the latest one that has just occurred is output continuously updated in the message area. This focuses more on the round (round) of message reception and transmission during communication interactions, with information presentation one at a time. The unique existence of the single message or the single message can also have larger fonts, so that the user can conveniently identify and acquire the content of the message, and the accessibility of communication application and related information is improved, and especially the latest communication information access efficiency is improved. Furthermore, the updated output is only for the latest messages, so that the latest occurring messages, which are often more concerned, can be directly accessed without identifying among a plurality of messages. This promotes the operability of the latest occurring communication information in the process of being accessed by the user, and further promotes the availability (availability) of the latest occurring communication information to the user.

Therefore, if the message area is used for displaying only a single message, the area occupied by the message area on the contact interface can be relatively reduced, and the recognizability of the messages in the message area can be increased at the same time. This balances well a pair of contradictory factors: in order to improve the recognizability of the message content, the message area and the font size of the message need to be enlarged, in turn, the larger message area accommodates too many or some messy message records, and meanwhile, the display space of the individual (information) message is extruded, so that the recognizability of the individual (information) message is reduced. Thus, the technical means in some embodiments of the present invention solve the technical problem of providing interface resources that has been desired to be solved but has not been achieved successfully, and the technical problem is brought about, to some extent, by technical prejudices of those skilled in the art.

In addition, profile information such as icons, avatars, and the like of contacts is separately disposed outside the message area, for example, above the message area, and is not provided inside the message area. The occupation of the effective area in the message area is further reduced, and the identifiable degree of the message content in the message area is improved.

Moreover, by configuring the display of profile information on the contact interface in a larger area, for example, the size of the profile information may be comparable to the size of the message area, and such a relatively large area of the message area allows the current contact identity to be easily identified by the user, or otherwise, improves the recognizability of the sender or recipient of the current message.

In addition, this applies not only to a single contact interface, but also to a contact group interface in combination with other means, see description of other related embodiments. Moreover, as the number of messages in the message area of the contact group is more and more disordered, the message area is only used for displaying a single message, and the profile information of the contact group is configured outside the message area, the recognition degree of the message content in the message area of the contact group can be further improved while the whole contact group interface is simplified.

In addition, if two or three of the voice service information and the short message service information are integrated and the latest one of the data service information is output through the contact interface, the user is prevented from accessing different communication applications respectively so as to acquire communication information with different service properties, and the accessibility of the communication information in the electronic equipment and the operability (operability) of the electronic equipment are further improved.

In some embodiments of the Interface resource providing method described above, during the switching process of the User Interface of the electronic device, by configuring a plurality of application interfaces including the communication application Interface into a mode capable of being switched in parallel through the display, it is preferable that a conventional operating system such as android may be customized so as to integrate components related to the communication application Interface into the operating system of the electronic device to form a single program at a system level, and use the contact Interface, or the communication application Interface, and the related components as an operating system User Interface (UI), so that the communication application component runs on the display of the electronic device in an exclusive manner. Correspondingly, by automatically running the single program in the starting stage of the electronic equipment, a plurality of interfaces such as contact person communication interfaces configured in the electronic equipment are presented to a user at the first time after the starting is completed, are positioned at the top layer of the software interaction level of the electronic equipment, and can switchably occupy the display resources of the electronic equipment. These communication interfaces with contacts are loaded directly at the top level in the interaction hierarchy of the software system within the electronic device after the electronic device is booted, similar to the desktop of a common operating system, further increasing the accessibility of the associated communication resources and communication information. Moreover, interface elements or communication key sets configured on the multiple application interfaces and capable of being operated by a user can be respectively adapted to the functions of respective application programs on each of the multiple interfaces, and consistency in operation, layout, appearance and the like of multiple interfaces where multiple application programs with different functions are located can be maintained to a certain extent, so that consistency of user experience is followed to a certain extent, and operability of the application program with the communication function through the user interface is enhanced.

Drawings

In order to more clearly illustrate the embodiments of the present invention or the technical solutions of the prior art, the following description will briefly explain the drawings used in the embodiments or the description of the prior art, and it is obvious that the drawings in the following description are some embodiments of the present invention, and other drawings can be obtained according to these drawings without inventive effort for a person skilled in the art.

FIG. 1a is a schematic diagram of a physical keyboard according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 1b is a schematic diagram of an operation process corresponding to the physical keyboard provided in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 a;

FIG. 2a is a schematic diagram of another physical keyboard according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 2b is a schematic diagram of an operation procedure corresponding to the physical keyboard provided in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 a;

fig. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of another electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of still another electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of still another electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a system architecture for establishing communication with contacts via a mobile terminal in the prior art;

FIG. 8 is a flow chart of a resource providing method according to an embodiment of the invention;

FIG. 9A is a block diagram showing a program of a portion stored in a resource providing apparatus according to another embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 9B is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a structure of an electronic device and a user interface thereof according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a user interface in a resource provisioning method according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 12 is a diagram of a user interface displaying the latest message or messages in a resource provisioning method according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a user interface of a provide button in a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 14 is a flow chart of a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a user interface in a resource provisioning method according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 16 is a flow chart of an interface element providing method according to another embodiment of the invention;

FIG. 17 is a schematic layout of physical operations and virtual user interface elements of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the invention;

FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of an operation of an electronic device in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of another terminal electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 20 is a schematic view of a user interface in a terminal electronic device according to another embodiment of the invention;

FIG. 21 is a flow diagram of a resource provisioning method for an electronic device, according to an embodiment of the invention;

FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of correspondence between at least one interface configured in an electronic device and at least one option presented on a display, according to an embodiment of the invention;

fig. 23A, 23B are schematic diagrams of switching between two interfaces configured in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention;

24A-24I are schematic diagrams of some menu items and their associated applications or interfaces configured in an electronic device, according to embodiments of the invention;

fig. 25A to 25B are schematic diagrams of network instant messaging and mobile phone network communication modes according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIGS. 26A-26C are schematic diagrams of a first contact communication interface providing a mutually switchable "Single card display mode" and "communication record display mode" in a method in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention

Fig. 27 is a schematic diagram of a front structure of a base and a stand-alone terminal communication device not combined with a first mobile terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 28 is a schematic front view of a base and a terminal communication device combined with a first mobile terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 29 is a schematic view showing a back structure of a terminal communication device in which a base and a first mobile terminal are combined according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIGS. 30A-30E are schematic views of an album application interface provided according to an embodiment of the present invention; the resource providing method of the related embodiments is described below with reference to the set of drawings;

FIGS. 31A-31C are diagrams of application interfaces providing calendar, time and weather forecast according to embodiments of the present invention;

FIG. 32a is a schematic diagram of a physical keyboard according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 32b is a schematic illustration of a specific construction of an alternative implementation of the toggle key shown in FIG. 32 a;

FIG. 32c is a schematic diagram of an operation corresponding to the toggle key provided in the embodiment shown in FIG. 32 a;

FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram of a physical keyboard according to an embodiment of the present invention;

fig. 34 is a schematic structural diagram of a direction key for selecting a contact according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 35 is a flow chart of a resource provisioning method according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 36 shows a flow diagram of a resource provisioning method according to an embodiment of the invention;

FIG. 37 shows a schematic diagram of simultaneous presentation of multiple interactive interfaces on a foldable display of an electronic device, according to one embodiment of the invention.

Detailed Description

For the purpose of making the objects, technical solutions and advantages of the embodiments of the present invention more apparent, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention will be clearly and completely described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention, and it is apparent that the described embodiments are some embodiments of the present invention, but not all embodiments of the present invention. All other embodiments, which can be made by those skilled in the art based on the embodiments of the invention without making any inventive effort, are intended to be within the scope of the invention.

The terminology used in the embodiments of the invention is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting of the invention. As used in this application and the appended claims, the singular forms "a," "an," and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise, the "plurality" generally includes at least two.

It should be understood that the term "and/or" as used herein is merely one relationship describing the association of the associated objects, meaning that there may be three relationships, e.g., a and/or B, may represent: a exists alone, A and B exist together, and B exists alone. In addition, the character "/" herein generally indicates that the front and rear associated objects are an "or" relationship.

The words "if", as used herein, may be interpreted as "at … …" or "at … …" or "in response to a determination" or "in response to a detection", depending on the context. Similarly, "when … …" or "when … …" in some embodiments may also be interpreted as conditional assumptions of "if", "like", etc., depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase "if determined" or "if detected (stated condition or event)" may be interpreted as "when determined" or "in response to determination" or "when detected (stated condition or event)" or "in response to detection (stated condition or event), depending on the context.

It should also be noted that the terms "comprises," "comprising," or any other variation thereof, are intended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion, such that a product or system that comprises a list of elements does not include only those elements but may include other elements not expressly listed or inherent to such product or system. Without further limitation, an element defined by the phrase "comprising one … …" does not exclude the presence of additional identical elements in a commodity or system comprising such elements.

Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communication device (such as a mobile phone) that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Exemplary embodiments of the portable multifunction device include, but are not limited to, other portable electronic devices such as laptop or tablet computers having a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch screen display and/or a touch pad). It should also be appreciated that in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communication device or means of communication, but rather a desktop computer having a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch screen display and/or a touch pad).

In some embodiments discussed below, an electronic device including a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. However, it should be understood that the computing device may include one or more other physical user interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, mouse, and/or joystick.

In addition to communication applications, such as telephony applications, video conferencing applications, or instant messaging applications, devices may also support various applications, such as one or more of the following: a notes making application, a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a health management application, a gaming application, an email application, an exercise support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video recorder application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application.

In addition, the sequence of steps in the method embodiments described below is only an example and is not strictly limited.

Several titles of the present application, such as "menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and main interface configuration", and,"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces"),"Integrated interaction interface", "some embodiments of the first resource providing method", "some embodiments of the second resource providing method", "high operability electronic device", "button and host separable design", "button/button layout and its morphology and functionality", "cross-interface graphic element providing method and device", "single card display", "integrated storage of multiple communication network information for contacts in a single program", "tapeThe split electronic device with the base, the switching between the internet mode and the mobile phone mode, the integrated communication based on multiple networks, and the like respectively introduce relatively independent aspects of some embodiments of the present application or relatively independent modules, and these modules may form further modified examples by any combination, and only some modified examples of these modified examples are schematically described in the present application, but the more diversified combinations between the above modules or between the modules and other embodiments of the present application are not hindered. For example, all embodiments under the heading "integrate interactive interface", "some embodiments of the first resource providing method", and the like, and variations of the modules and modules involved therein, are correspondingly applicable to other embodiments in the present application. The combination possibility between these embodiments and between the modules of the embodiments will not be described in detail elsewhere.

Interface and main interface configuration

The inventor finds that the electronic devices such as mobile phones and the like in the prior art and the software installed in the communication device are diversified, and information such as contact information in instant messaging software installed in the mobile phones, contact group information, contact information stored in a dialing application built in the system and the like are respectively and independently stored, or communication information generated by short message service, call records generated by the dialing application and communication information of data service types generated by the instant messaging software are respectively stored in different application programs. The information stored in the different applications is redundant in the mobile phone, and the user often needs to access the different software applications classified by the functionalities through different interaction portals, so that various interaction portal interface elements, front-end and back-end functions (functionality), utility (functionality) and other software resources, communication network capabilities (capability) and other communication resources and related information are required to be integrated, thereby improving accessibility (accessibility) to the communication information and application information in the mobile phone, and accessibility (accessibility) to applications and communication contacts in the electronic device, such as contacts in independent contacts or contact groups, and other application programs and their related information accessibility (accessibility) of different functional categories, and meanwhile, hierarchical interaction operations of the mobile phone and other electronic devices or communication devices loaded with diversified application software are required to be simplified, and operability (usability) of the electronic device or communication device is also required to be improved. The prior art lacks a prejudgment and corresponding solving means for the technical problems or potential requirements.

Moreover, in the interaction of the electronic devices including the above-mentioned integrated provision of redundant information for a single contact to the electronic device such as a mobile phone, the user may lack high operability and accessibility, so as to facilitate the user to access the communication information between the single contact or establish the communication with the single contact through the single contact interface.

In one embodiment of the invention a resource providing method for an electronic device is proposed, wherein the electronic device comprises a communication operation interface associated with at least one communication network, and further comprises at least one interface, which is outputtable via a display. The resource providing method according to this embodiment includes two steps: step 1), presenting a communication interface aiming at a first contact group in at least one interface on a display, wherein the first contact group communication interface comprises a message area; step 2) in response to the user's operation of the communication operation interface, outputting a plurality of communication information with the first contact group via at least one communication network through the message area.

Alternatively, the first contact group in the above embodiment may include only a single contact, or may include two or more contacts. And the former case corresponds to communication interaction between the user of the electronic device and the first contact. In this regard, it can be understood with reference to fig. 24C and 26C and related embodiments, and fig. 24B and 26A and related embodiments, described below.

Generally, in the includeIntegrated interaction interface, single-card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks "In the methods of some embodiments of the present invention, including title related embodiments, an electronic device is usedFor example, a related resource providing method, a configuration method of a communication interface of the first contact, or an electronic device is described. But it will be appreciated that: the method or the device for the embodiment between the user and the first contact person are also applicable to the communication interaction between the user and the first contact person group, the resource providing method related to the communication interaction, the configuration method of the communication interface of the first contact person group or the electronic device. Vice versa, the method or device for embodiments between the user and the first contact group is also applicable to the communication interaction between the user and the first contact, as well as the resource providing method, the configuration method of the first contact communication interface or the electronic device involved in the communication interaction.

Alternatively, in general, includeIntegrated interaction interface, single-card display and integrated communication based on multiple networks " In the method of some embodiments of the present invention including the title related embodiments, the communication operation interface configured in the electronic device, or may also be referred to as a communication interface element, may be implemented in hardware or in software, in the method according to some embodiments of the present invention, the communication operation interface may be a key set in a software form that is virtually provided on the first contact communication interface, or a key set that is provided in a physical form on the electronic device, where functions of the two correspond, and may be configured in software and hardware of the electronic device separately, or may be configured on the electronic device simultaneously, so that a user may perform communication interaction with the electronic device in a manner of arbitrarily selecting hardware or software. Specifically, the virtual key set of the former is generally a virtual key, a button, on a communication interface, and the physical key set of the latter can be arranged on the electronic device casing in a hardware manner, and both man-machine interfaces can be operated by a user to establish communication. The at least one communication may correspond to a communication of a same service property, such as a communication of a data service, or may correspond to a plurality of communication of different service properties.

The resource providing method according to the embodiment of the present invention may be run in some electronic devices or communication apparatuses or used in combination with application programs therein, and in some embodiments, a mobile phone, a smart mobile device, etc. will be described as an example.

Mobile devices, especially smart mobile devices, employ an operating system, such as IOS or android, whose architecture mostly originates from a computer operating system, i.e., a logic architecture based on a "platform+program", and although this architecture is more similar to the technical nature of a computer, different independent application design frameworks are used, for example, to configure different independent application design frameworks differently in functional groups, and each application corresponds to a different level of interaction, and for users including but not limited to middle-aged and elderly people, the awareness and acceptance of the configuration logic of such virtual abstract application programs is sometimes low.

The resource providing method according to the embodiment of the invention uses the user and the contact person as centers and uses the user interaction as the guiding to provide the resource allocation of the interface in an integrated way. In some embodiments described below, a simplified User Interface (UI) and related functional components are constructed, in other words, in comparison with the prior art, the interactive operations and corresponding functions of the electronic device such as a mobile phone and the communication device are redefined, the interactive operations are guided by the "User and the contacts in the interpersonal relationship" and the communication medium based on the wireless data transmission network and the internet, so that the interactive operation hierarchy is simplified, and the electronic device generates high operability and usability for the User due to the operation of the resource providing method, so that the User also obtains accessibility (accessibility) for related information and resources.

Fig. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a resource providing method for an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention, and fig. 22 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence between at least one interface configured in the electronic device and at least one option presented on a display according to an embodiment of the present invention. The following pairs of figures 21 and 22 include"Single card display", "Multi-network based Integrated communication of (C) "The method of some embodiments of the present invention, including title related embodiments, is illustrated and the resource provisioning method may include three steps: step 2501, step 2502, and step 2503.

In step 2501, a communication interface 26-Contact for a first Contact in at least one interface 2604 is presented on a display, wherein the first Contact communication interface includes a message region (not shown).

In step 2502, a plurality of communication information with a first contact via at least one communication network is output through a message area in response to a user operation of a communication operation interface (not shown in the figure). The plurality of communication information may include audio messages, or video messages, which may be marked in a message area as a communication record and output externally through the message area for viewing or access by a user, or may be output further to a speaker to be output externally in audio form in response to an access operation of the user to the audio message through the message area.

In step 2503, at least one option 2603 is provided through the display, the at least one option 2603 being configured in a abbreviated form and being associated with at least one interface 2604, respectively.

Optionally includeSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In the methods of some embodiments of the present invention, including title related embodiments, the association between at least one option 2603 and at least one interface 2604 may be embodied as: the at least one option 2603 corresponds to the at least one interface 2604 one by one, and the at least one option 2603 may output a corresponding interface among the at least one interface 2604 through the display in response to a user operation, respectively. Wherein the correspondence of at least one option 2603 and at least one interface 2604 may refer to an association as indicated by an arrow in fig. 22, and one or more interfaces 2604 may be substantially independent of each other.

In addition, since at least one option represents at least one interface in a thumbnail form respectively, the thumbnail menu item can present more options such as contacts, applications and the like for the user in a smaller scale on the current interface, so that the user can also globally know other available options such as communication contacts, applications and the like through the current interface, and the user can select and position a plurality of application options configured by the electronic equipment, thereby having a navigation function. Of course, alternatively, the program in the electronic device may be executed by the processor unit to: in response to a real-time response event occurring at the electronic device, the presentation of the at least one option is cancelled. When the real-time response event occurs, the navigation display is not required to be performed by a plurality of options at the bottom of the display, and a larger screen display space can be provided for the real-time response event by canceling the display of the plurality of options. And when the online video or audio call ends, the provision of the above-described navigation options around the display may resume. Generally, the real-time response event includes an event that does not allow the user to perform delay response such as an online telephone call, and the short message does not belong to the real-time response event because the processing can be delayed.

Of course, it is understood that other interfaces may be configured in the electronic device in addition to the at least one interface 2604, which other interfaces have no corresponding options in the at least one option 2603, and vice versa. But this does not prevent the association and further one-to-one correspondence between at least one interface 2604 and at least one option 2603.

Here, it should be noted that the relevant resources of the at least one interface 2604 are configured in the electronic device, or in a remote server, the at least one option 2603 may be regarded as an icon similar to a shortcut, presented on the display for selection by the user, while the at least one option 2603 points to or otherwise is associated with the respective relevant resource. Thus, when the user selects the at least one option 2603 on the display, the electronic device invokes or runs the associated resource associated with the at least one option 2603, thereby outputting at least one interface 2604 corresponding to the at least one option 2603 through the display. Wherein the at least one option 2603 corresponds to a related resource or may also be referred to as at least one object (not shown). The at least one object is optionally an executable program resource located in a background or remote server of the electronic device, for example, a first option in the at least one option 2603 may include addressing information such as a local storage path or network address of the associated resource. When a first option, e.g., a first contact icon, in the at least one option 2603 is selected by the user, a first object, e.g., first contact related information or an (expanded) executable resource with an address, in the at least one object is loaded accordingly, such that a first interface, e.g., a first contact communication interface, in the at least one interface 2604 is output via the display. When the first option is a first contact icon and the corresponding first object is a communication program, the first option may further include a communication manner of the first contact, or the first option is associated with a communication manner of the first contact, for example, a phone number or a unique identification code (ID) for instant messaging, which is also applicable to other embodiments. Of course, alternatively, the number arrangement of the telephone number, if unique, may also be used as an identification code, a login number for instant messaging, both of which are identical in form but are used by the electronic device to establish communications via different communication networks. The at least one interface 2604 may be triggered by a user selection operation of the at least one option 2603 or a user switching operation of a user interface such as a communication interface, an application interface, etc., through an output of the display.

In summary, optionally, the at least one option configured in the electronic device includes one or more of a contact option, a contact group option, a subscription number option, and an application option. Wherein the options for the application program include a program name and/or a program icon. Options for a contact include an image of the contact and/or an acronym. Further, the contact options also include an operating address of a communication application associated with the contact, a contact address of the contact, and at least one of: name, identity, relationship with the user of the second terminal, designation of the user of the second terminal, nickname. The options for the application also include the running address of the associated application, remote or local.

At least one of the options 2603 has a ranking order on the display that is formed by the user adding or ordering the at least one of the options 2603 by interaction with the electronic device or by the backdoor program logging on to the server or another electronic device remotely. Whether or not at least one option 2603 is provided to the user through, for example, the bottom region of the display, at least one object may be independently set in its output order through the display. For example, after outputting a first interface corresponding to a first object, such as interface 26-Contact, through the display, the other interfaces may be sequentially output in the predetermined order described above in response to a user's switching operation through repetition of an interface output area in the middle of the display, such as sliding in a single direction of Arrow 26-Arrow in the figure. At least one interface 2604 is in one-to-one correspondence with at least one object stored locally or remotely. Optionally, the at least one object may include at least one contact information, and the at least one interface may also include at least one contact interface corresponding to the at least one contact information. Here, the relation between the configuration order of the at least one option on the display, the possible configuration order of the at least one object and the at least one interface is also applicable in the methods or apparatuses of some embodiments described below, and may not be described here again.

At least one resource from at least one object configured in the electronic device, such as interface 26-Contact, interface 26-Album, interface 26-Group, etc., may be output through display 2601 of electronic device 2600, with at least one object (not shown) being represented in a visual manner on display 2601. And the at least one object may include, but is not limited to: contact information for communication, contact group information, various application programs, for example, an applet built in the system such as an album, or access portal information or link information for a third party independent program, and the like. These one or more options may be output via the display 2601 in the form of respective corresponding interfaces, such as a first Contact communication interface 26-Contact, album application interface 26-Album, contact Group communication interface 26-Group, and the like.

Optionally includeSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "Methods or electronic devices of some embodiments of the invention, including title related embodimentsThe method can further comprise the steps of: in response to a user switching operation for at least one option 2603, at least one option 2603 is presented on the display 2601 on a portion-by-portion (portion by portion) basis. It is to be appreciated that the switching operation for the at least one option 2603 can include a swipe gesture or the like for an area in which the at least one option 2603 is located.

Optionally includeSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the present invention, including title related embodiments, in a method or electronic device, as shown in fig. 22, at least one option 2603 is configured in a single row (single row) at the top/bottom of the display, or in a single column beside the display, where the horizontal stripe-like area occupied by the single row of options on the display may be referred to as a menu area, or a single row area 2602. Taking at least one option 2603 arranged in a single row as shown in fig. 22, the single row of options is arranged laterally at the bottom of the display, the method of this embodiment further comprises the steps of: in response to a user's switching operation for the single-line region 2602, at least one option 2603 is presented by uniformly moving the single-line region 2602, part by part.

Optionally includeSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the present invention, including title related embodiments, the at least one option 2603 may be divided substantially equally into a plurality of groups, the first group of options being first arranged in a single row at the bottom of the display, the plurality of groups of options being sequentially moved in the direction of the user's sliding or like operation in response to the user's switching operation to the single row region 2602, and being presented to the user sequentially through the single row region 2602. As shown in fig. 22, the first set of options includes a first option 26a, a second option 26b, a third option 26c, and a fourth option 26d, where the first option 26a corresponds to the communication interface 26-Contact of the first Contact, the second option 26b corresponds to the Album application interface 26-Album, the third option 26c, and the fourth option 26d also correspond to two interfaces (not shown) in the at least one interface 2604, respectively, and the fifth option 26e corresponds to the Group communication interface 26-Group. The first set of options is configured in a single row region 2602 at the bottom of the display; or alternatively Is arranged in a single column (not shown) beside the display, and in response to a user switching operation for a first set of options, switches and presents a second set of options in the area of the single row, the second set of options including a fifth option 26e and three subsequent options (not shown). The switching operation here may be a sliding operation to the left or right, and will not be described in detail. In particular, the step of presenting the first and second sets of options of the at least one option by single line area switching may comprise: the first option 26a, the second option 26b, the third option 26c, and the fourth option 26d are collectively moved in the direction of the sliding operation of the user indicated by the directional Arrow 26-Arrow in fig. 22, so that the second group of options, that is, the fifth option 26e and the three options subsequent thereto, are successively presented. From another aspect, the step of presenting the first and second sets of options in the at least one option by single line area switching may further comprise: the first option 26a, the second option 26b, the third option 26c, the fourth option 26d are moved in the direction of the sliding operation shown by Arrow 26-arow to cancel the presentation of the first option 26a, the second option 26b, the third option 26c, the fourth option 26d one by one at the display edge, and then the first set of options is followed by moving the second set of options, beginning with the fifth option 26e, part by part into the single row region 2602. From yet another aspect, the step of presenting the first and second sets of options in the at least one option by single line area switching further comprises: the first option 26a, the second option 26b, the third option 26c, and the fourth option 26d are moved out of the display area of the display in sequence and the second set of options, followed by the fifth option 26e, is moved into the single row region 2602 in the direction of the sliding operation shown by Arrow 26-Arrow.

Of course, the option 26d is the last one in the first group of options, if the current interface is the interface corresponding to the option 26d and the option 26d is presented differently in form as the current option, in this case, the electronic device may also switch to present the second group of options in the at least one option in the single-row area in response to a switch operation of the user for the left-sliding of the communication interface or the application interface corresponding to the option 26d, and perform the differentiation in form with the first option 26e of the second group of options as the current option, and load the communication interface or the application interface corresponding to the option 26e in the interface.

Notably: comprisingSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the present invention, including title related embodiments, the plurality of options may be arranged in a single row and moved and presented on the display Portion by Portion (Portion by Portion), wherein the speed of the movement process may correspond to the speed of the user's operation gesture and the unit of movement is a Portion (Portion) or group of the plurality of options, which allows the user to clearly distinguish the next and last group of browsed options and to browse all options regularly. Meanwhile, the above-mentioned set of options or a part of options may include 1 to 10 options, alternatively 3 to 6 for a general mobile phone, such as 4 in the above-mentioned embodiment. Whereas for a mobile terminal equipped with a larger display, such as a tablet, each set or portion of options may include a greater number of options. Of course, the number of options included per section or per group is preferably the same.

Alternatively, the region 2602 of a single row may be a region where multiple options are located that are configured as a single row at the top or bottom of the display. Alternatively, a single row region 2602 may also be understood as a region within the outline (outlining) of the pixel or location covered by the plurality of options on the display that does not substantially vary with the plurality of options, such as a lateral stripe region at the bottom of the display that is approximately 0.5 cm-3.5 cm, preferably 1.5cm-2cm, wide in the longitudinal direction (as indicated by the arrow in fig. 22). The single row region 2602 is located laterally at the bottom of the display, does not occupy the main display area or interaction area of the display, and also facilitates the user's hand-held operation without impeding the user's main interaction behavior. Through the single row region 2602, a user can apply operations including a sliding or other switching operation to one or more options located at the bottom of the display, the user's switching operation for the main display region or interaction region of the display being different from the effect of the switching operation for the single row region, see in detail"Pu Zhi (common)Menu interface suitable for switching of various application interfaces,Description of related embodiments under the heading "interface and Main interface configuration". The "main display area" or "main interaction area" of the display may include a portion of the first contact communication interface, or a portion of the display other than the menu area or the single line/single line area, which will not be described in detail.

Alternatively, the single line region 2602 may also be explicitly (or implicitly) as one menu region, and correspondingly, the at least one option 26a, 26b, 26c, 26d may also be defined as four menu items, accommodated in the menu region. Furthermore, it should be understood that the menu area provided on the display herein and some of the methods or apparatus of some embodiments described below are configured such that the interface elements on the display are virtual rather than physical, and are not described in detail below. The electronic device may move to present a plurality of options of the menu area in response to the operation gestures of the user such as sliding the menu area, as a modification, the electronic device may also move to present a plurality of options of the menu area in response to the operation of the user with respect to the directional key provided on the entity on the electronic device, and a specific modification may be seen in the present applicationWith Detachable electronic device of base "And the description of the embodiments under the heading. And will not be described in detail herein.

It will be appreciated that: the movement is relative, although from a sensory perspective a set of serialized (a series of) options 26a, 26b, 26c, 26d are presented in response to a user's switching operation moving in the direction of the switching operation, and conversely can also be considered as a slidable window of the menu area moving in the opposite direction to the switching operation relative to the string of options to present the string of options in portions. Correspondingly, in another aspect of the above embodiment, the menu area or the single line area 2602 laterally configured at the bottom of the display may be regarded as a sliding window with respect to the plurality of options, the first part of the plurality of options, i.e. the first four options 26a, 26b, 26c, 26d, are first queued in the sliding window, and then the electronic device may slide the first four options 26a, 26b, 26c, 26d and the subsequent other options, which are first options 26e, through the sliding window in response to the user's switching operation to the sliding window. Of course, the options 26e and their subsequent options are also presented in a queue, portion by portion, through a sliding window, and these options 26a, 26b, 26c, 26d, 26e form a certain ranking order after being queued to the menu area or single row area 2602 at the bottom of the display.

Alternatively, the user may switch the sliding window to a single row region 2603, where the sliding window is 3-6 options, such as 4 contact options or 5 application options, each with the same size as the step size of the sliding.

IncludedSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "The thumbnail menu items in the method of some embodiments of the present invention, including title related embodiments, are configured at the bottom of the display, and the communication interface or application interface is configured in the middle area of the display and has a correspondence. The communication application interface, the first application interface, may generally be located in the middle of the display, occupy a larger area, and for providing a main area for the user to recognize and operate, by sliding the communication interface, one content may be switched at a time, and the focus option, i.e. the current option, in at least one option in the menu area may be changed simultaneously, corresponding to the currently displayed interface in the middle of the display.

The bottom or lower part of the screen is a menu area, by sliding the menu area on the screen, one page of options in the menu, for example, 5 menu items, can be switched left and right, in response to a clicking operation by the user, the option clicked by the user can be determined as a new focus option in the menu area or the single line area 2602, and a corresponding communication interface or application interface is loaded in the middle of the display. The abbreviated menu item can present more options such as contacts, applications and the like to the user in a small scale, has a navigation effect, and can also switch a plurality of contact options and application options in batches by taking groups as a unit in response to one-time sliding operation of the user, so that the user can quickly browse or select contacts and the like which are expected to communicate.

IncludedSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the method or electronic device of the present invention, including title related embodiments, the at least one option 2603 further comprises a second option 26b. In the method: in response to a user selection of the second option 26b in the single row region 2602, the first Contact communication interface 26-Contact corresponding to the first option 26a is switched to the interface 26-Album corresponding to the second option on the display and the focus display is shifted from the first option 26a to the second option 26b in synchronization, i.e., the second option is formally differentiated in the single row region.

Of course, the above focus option and the current interface switching are also applicable to the option selection of the cross-Group, for example, the user switches the first Group of options to the second Group of options including 26e through the sliding operation in the single-row region 2602, and at this time, the first Contact communication interface 26-Contact displayed in the interface 2601 may still be the first Contact communication interface 26-Contact corresponding to the option 26a in the first Group of options, where the electronic device may switch the first Contact communication interface to the Contact Group interface 26-Group corresponding to the option 26e on the display in response to the clicking operation of the fifth option 26e by the user. And, synchronously, presenting the option 26e in a single line area in a formal differentiation way as a focus option or a current option, namely, an option corresponding to an interface currently displayed on a display.

Fig. 23A and 23B are schematic diagrams of switching between two interfaces configured in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in fig. 23A, according to the personal relationship of the current contact with the user, the nickname of the current contact is "son", and 5 options are provided in a single line in thumbnail form in the menu area laterally configured at the bottom of the display, wherein the first option 2703-1 corresponding to "son" is highlighted, for example, highlighting the outline of the thumbnail of the option. The current contact communication interface 2701 also has profile information for "son" loaded thereon. A virtual communication button 2702 associated with one or more communication networks is also provided on the current contact communication interface 2701 for operation by a user to establish communication over the one or more communication networks to generate communication information, and a message area 2704 is also provided on the current contact communication interface 2701 for outputting communication information between the user and the "son".

IncludedSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the method or electronic device of the present invention, including the title related embodiments, the plurality of objects have a plurality of interfaces corresponding to each other, for example, a first contact object and a corresponding first contact communication interface, an album application object and a corresponding album application interface, and so on. These interfaces can typically take up a large area through the middle output of the display, forming a primary area for user recognition and operation. The objects are relatively independent, and are output on the display through the corresponding interfaces for the user to access, and according to the operation of the user on the interfaces, the deep functions of the corresponding objects are called and further operation and skip rotor interfaces are presented on the display. The interfaces corresponding to the objects can be basically independent of each other and can be switchably output on the display for the user to access. The switching between these interfaces, in some of the embodiments described above, is performed by the user by manipulating a menu area of the navigational effort. In some embodiments, the method described below will support the user to apply the switching operation directly to the communication interface, the application interface, and so on to perform the switching between the multiple interfaces.

IncludedSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In the method of some embodiments of the present invention including the title related embodiments, the electronic device may switch the current contact communication interface to an interface corresponding to an adjacent object of the current contact in the at least one object in response to a single switching operation of the communication interface of the current contact by the user, for example, a sliding gesture operation to the left or the right. Wherein an output order in which the at least one object is output in the form of an interface through the display in response to a predetermined gesture of the user has been predefined. If the display is also provided with a menu area, the electronic device can be basically synchronous when the current contact communication interface is switchedAnd carrying out formal differentiated setting on the options corresponding to the latest switched current contact in the menu area. Preferably, the current options in the menu area may be formally differentiated so that the user may more easily recognize from the menu area.

IncludedSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the present invention methods, including title-related embodiments, the electronic device may switch on the display a second contact communication interface presented in a single row area 2703 corresponding to a second option 2703-2 adjacent to the first option 2703-1 in response to a single switch operation by the user on the first contact communication interface 2701, such as a sliding operation to the left as shown by an arrow in fig. 22, as shown in fig. 23B, the nickname of the second contact, referred to as a "daughter", having loaded thereon a daughter profile, may include a nickname, avatar, photograph, telephone number, etc. of the "daughter", according to the relationship of the second contact to the user. Correspondingly, message area 2704 is also used to display communications with the "daughter". Corresponding to the switch of the current contact communication interface, out of the 5 options within the single row area 2703, the focus presentation or the like in terms of differentiation means is transferred from the second option 2703-2 to the second option 2703-2 corresponding to "daughter".

Alternatively, if the second option 2703-2 corresponding to "daughter" is the last active option in the single row area 2703, configuration options are also provided in the single row area 2703, such as may be located after the second option 2703-2 (not labeled in the figure). The electronic device may respond to the user's operation of the configuration option to identify an icon or the like of a new application program, which may be a communication application interface or an album application for a third contact, to be added to a blank position (not labeled in the figure) in the single line area 2703. When the user selects the newly added option in the single row area 2703, the user interface of the newly added application in the active state can be output through the display for access by the user. Of course, these options and the applications associated with these options may be managed or scheduled by an application manager, which may be launched by the user from the desktop of the electronic device (not shown), such that the user is provided with their user interface via the application manager, the UI of which may include a single row of interface elements, e.g., a field 2703, for accommodating thumbnail options. The user may then launch the associated application or application interface by manipulating these options. The application manager may be configured in the electronic device as a separate application independent of the operating system.

Here, it should be noted that: in some embodiments, the user of the electronic device configured with the plurality of applications or the plurality of contact information may be an elderly person. Thus, the installation portal for these applications may optionally be deployed at a remote second terminal, which is operated by a professional user of the other electronic device (e.g., young persons who are children of the elderly person described above), and installed, uninstalled, or otherwise maintained for multiple applications in the electronic device of embodiments of the present invention remotely via a communication link between the electronic device and the second electronic device (optionally via a server). Of course, after installing/deleting an application in the electronic device, or adding contact information, the professional user may also make corresponding settings for adding, deleting, etc. menu items presented on the display of the electronic device used by the elderly person by operating the corresponding interface and portal on the second electronic device, in which case the option area in the embodiment does not have to provide configuration options for adding menu items. Of course, other information in the electronic device may be edited and customized remotely in addition to the remote configuration of the menu items. The method further shields the existence of an Operating System (OS) of the electronic equipment for the user of the electronic equipment, reduces the cognitive difficulty of the electronic equipment, and improves the accessibility of application programs and information in the electronic equipment.

It should be understood that: whether or not the single line region 2703 field and the plurality of options therein are configured as a navigation menu in fig. 23, a plurality of objects (not shown in the figure) in the electronic device can be independently configured in a predetermined order to be output through the display, based on which the electronic device can output a plurality of interfaces corresponding one-to-one to the plurality of objects one by one for user interaction in accordance with a predetermined order in response to a single interface switching operation from the user to the communication interface of "son", in other words, switch the next loading object to an adjacent object of the communication object called "son", i.e., the communication object of "daughter", among the plurality of objects configured in advance, and present the communication interface corresponding to the object of "daughter" on the display, as shown in fig. 23B. In summary, the plurality of application interfaces or the plurality of objects associated therewith provided in the electronic device may be configured in a predetermined order. The electronic device outputs multiple interfaces one by one through the display in a "predetermined order" by a user applying a continuous switching operation to the communication interface or application interface on the display, such as repeating the above-described left swipe gesture to the display. The above-described predetermined order may be an output order in which a plurality of interfaces are previously assigned in the electronic device if a menu area or a single-line area and a plurality of options therein are not provided on the display; if the display is provided with a single row of regions and a plurality of options therein as a navigation menu, the predetermined order described above may be the order in which the plurality of options are arranged in a single row of queues. For example, as shown in fig. 22, the current interface is an interface 26-Contact corresponding to the option 26a, and when the user performs a repeated switching operation, such as a sliding switching gesture to the left, on the middle portion of the display 2601, the electronic device 2600 sequentially displays, via the display 2601, the interface 26-Album corresponding to the option 26b, the interface (not shown in the figure) corresponding to the option 26c, the interface (not shown in the figure) corresponding to the option 26d, and the interface 26-Group corresponding to the option 26 e.

Preferably, after each interface switch occurs on the display, the corresponding options of the currently loaded communication interface or application program interface in the single-row area are presented differently in form, so that the user can conveniently recognize the current options.

Optionally includeSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "Title related embodiments of the inventionIn the method or the electronic device, the plurality of objects corresponding to the plurality of options one to one may include, but are not limited to: communication information/parameters for one or more contacts and related communication applications, album applications, daily information applications, etc., and the plurality of interfaces are interactive interfaces for the corresponding applications.

As above, the multiple options within the single row area 2703, like a shortcut, may also be edited by way of a foreground interface or a backlog to the composition of the options, or the order of the arranged options. In other words, the method of the above or the following embodiments may further include the steps of: in response to the user's option add operation, a first contact is added in the electronic device and the identity of the first contact is presented in a single row area 2703 as a navigation menu.

This customization of the content of menu region or single line region 2703 allows for extensibility of the content therein, thereby enhancing the region navigation effect. As contact options, parameters for the first contact may be included, such as a unique identification number of the first contact on the electronic device or a software system running therein, or may further include a unique identification number (ID) used, for example, by telephone number, instant messaging. At the same time, the first contact option in the menu area is associated with a communication program provided locally or remotely by the electronic device, and the first contact option can be located at the top layer of interaction of the whole software system of the electronic device for direct operation of a user, similar to a shortcut, so that in response to the operation of the first contact option by the user in the menu area, the corresponding communication application program configured in the electronic device is called through the shortcut, and meanwhile, some parameters for identifying the identity of the contact are transferred to the related communication application program, and the communication application program is started and operates related communication functions for the first contact corresponding to the transferred parameters, so that related information of the first contact, including profile information, communication information between the user and the first contact and the like, is displayed through a communication interface on a display. The above-mentioned parameters for identifying the identity of the contact include, but are not limited to, the items mentioned under the heading "integrally storing a plurality of communication network information for the contact in a single program", and of course, other parameters or information representing the contact may be set in addition to the information/parameters such as the phone number of the contact suitable for the mobile phone network, the Identity (ID) suitable for the instant messaging software, etc. mentioned by the heading, one of these parameters/information is for enabling the communication application program to load the communication interface of the corresponding contact according to these parameters/information, so that the user can establish communication with the contact through this communication interface, and the specific form of this parameter/information does not constitute a limitation of the present invention.

Optionally includeSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the method or electronic device of the present invention, including title related embodiments, at least one interface 2604 or at least one option 2602 belongs to a single program, or at least one interface 2604, while partially deployed in a remote server, is ultimately provided by a single program in the electronic device through program invocation. A conventional operating system such as android may be customized to integrate a portion of the program related to the communication interface into the operating system of the electronic device to form a system-level single program, and a program component to which the communication application interface belongs is used as an operating system User Interface (UI), where multiple interfaces in the single program may be presented to the user at a first time after the startup is completed. The single program can be run in the starting stage of the electronic device, so that at least one interface 2604 including the first contact communication interface, the album application interface and the like is automatically loaded on the top layer of the interaction hierarchy of the whole software system of the electronic device in a switchable manner for a user to directly operate after the electronic device is started, accessibility of communication resources is improved, and interaction complexity of the user in the interaction process of acquiring related communication resources and application resources is reduced. As shown in fig. 22, the plurality of interfaces 2604 are automatically loaded on the interactive top layer of the electronic device after the electronic device is started, for the user to directly operate the electronic device after the electronic device is started, and through a horizontal sliding or other switching operation, the user can perform operations on the interfaces 26-Contact, 26-Album, and the interface 26 Switch between groups in parallel and access these different applications. This provides a new way for the user to access the application and gives the user a new interactive experience.

Optionally, one or more of the head (head) options in the queue of at least one option may each be set as a Contact option, and correspondingly, the first interface 26-Contact in the at least one interface 2604 not only appears in the top-level interaction of the electronic device, but also is loaded in the electronic device as a Contact communication interface as the first interface after the electronic device is powered on to function properly. The accessibility of the communication resources is further improved, and the interaction complexity of the user in the interaction process of acquiring the related communication resources and application resources is reduced.

IncludedSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "Title related embodiments in some embodiments of the present invention, methods or electronic devices, also support user communication to a group of contacts. Fig. 24A and 24B are schematic diagrams of two mutually switchable interfaces configured in an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention. The plurality of options contained in the single row area 2803 in this embodiment includes an option 2803-4 for a first contact group, an option 2803-2 for a second contact. Correspondingly, the electronic device 2600 may also switch to present a communication interface (not shown) for the second contact or a communication interface for the first contact group on the display in response to a user selection of the option 2803-2 of the second contact or the option 2803-4 of the first contact group, respectively, as shown in fig. 24B or 24C. The communication interface of the second contact and the communication interface of the first contact group correspond in form and function to the first contact communication interface, e.g., each having profile information 2805a, 2805b, the second contact or contact group, and a message area 2806 is also provided on the interfaces for outputting communication information with members of the second contact or contact group. It should be noted that: comprises' Single card displayCommunication interface, application interface for single contact set forth in method or apparatus according to embodiments of the present invention, including "under heading embodimentThe method or step of providing interface resources can be applied to the contact group, and a special case of the contact group is that the contact group only comprises two members, namely a user of the electronic device and the contact.

In fig. 24C, a plurality of pieces of information between the user and the contact group member are output in the message area 2806, so that the association relationship between the output interface elements is more clear, the association relationship between the profile information of the first member of the contact group, such as the avatar, and the communication information from the first member in the message area 2806 may be significantly presented on the communication interface, for example, as shown in fig. 24C, the avatar of the second member of the contact group may be highlighted with blue, and correspondingly, the communication record of the second member in the message area 2806, such as the last 2 nd, 3 rd and the latest communication record in the figure, may also be highlighted with blue, so that the expression of the association between the two on the user is enhanced, and the user is facilitated to recognize the group member and the corresponding message. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 24B, a message area 2804 is provided for outputting only the latest one of all communication records in the group, see in detail " Single card display"resource providing method, interface configuration method of under-heading embodiment". Assuming that the most recent communication record is from the group member corresponding to the top-left avatar in profile information 2805b, the avatar 280c of that member in the contact group is displayed nearby around the message area 2804 to prompt the user for the sender of the most recent communication record. Alternatively, in fig. 24B, as a modification of the relationship between the profile information of the first member and the communication information of the first member, the profile information of the first member of the contact group, for example, the avatar 280c, may be displayed in an enlarged manner or in a dynamic manner such as a flash manner with respect to the avatars of other members in the contact group in the area where the profile information 2805B is located in response to the occurrence of the latest communication record with the first user (not shown in the figure). Relative to the first member, the heads of other members in the contact groupThe image is displayed in a circle or a bar where the profile information 2805b is located, in a abbreviated or static manner, whereby the user can be prompted: the sender or receiver of the communication record presented in the message area 2804 is the first member. Alternatively, only the most recent communication with all of the communications with the contact group, the most recent communication record from the first member of the contact group, may be presented in message area 2804.

As another modification of the dynamic proximity display contact and its corresponding communication record, it is assumed that the latest message in the message area 2806 is always located at the top in the message area 2806, that is, at a position closest to the profile information 2805a, and accordingly, in the electronic device, the head portraits in the profile information 2805a may be dynamically arranged, and the sender of the latest communication record 2806-1 is always arranged at the position 2805a-1 of the first head portraits in the profile information 2805a, that is, at the leftmost position of the head portraits on the screen, and the distance between this position and the latest communication record 2806-1 is relatively small, so that it is convenient for the user to visually associate the latest communication record 2806-1 with the head portraits or identity information of its corresponding sender. Of course, it should be understood that, alternatively, the latest message may be always located at the bottom of the message area 2806, the head portrait queue of profile information may be set at the bottom of the communication interface, and the head portrait of the sender of the latest communication record is dynamically configured so as to be always arranged at the first position of the head portrait queue to be close to the presentation position of the latest communication record in the message area.

Optionally includeSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the method or electronic device of the present invention, including title related embodiments, the single-row menu area 2803 also includes options for a first application of an individual (input) or for a collection of applications (not shown); the electronic device can respond to the selection of the options of the first application by the user and correspondingly switch to the first application interface on the display, as shown in fig. 24D and 24E, which are respectively daily information such as time/weather and the likeAnd a photo/album application interface. The electronic device can correspondingly switch to the application set interface on the display in response to a selection of an option of the application set by the user, collectively presenting entries of a plurality of different application programs.

Specifically, with the first application interface on the display in fig. 24D, the electronic device may visually output calendar information and weather information through the first application interface middle area 2904 in response to the user's operation for the first virtual key at the lower portion and the second virtual key at the middle portion of the first application interface right virtual key group 2902, respectively. And, the electronic device may also output time information in an audio manner or in a visual manner through the first application interface middle area 2904 in response to a user's operation on a third virtual key on top of the virtual key group 2902 on the first application interface.

Specifically, the camera of the electronic device may also be enabled for the user to take a photograph or video through the second application interface for photographing/album on the display in fig. 24E in response to the user operating the third virtual key on the upper portion of the virtual key group 2902 on the second application interface. And playing the related photos or videos through the middle area 2904 of the first application interface and stopping playing the photos or videos respectively in response to the operation of the user on the first virtual key at the lower part and the second virtual key at the middle part of the key group 2902 on the first application interface. Optionally include"Single card display", "Multi-based Integrated communication of network "In some embodiments of the method or electronic device of the present invention, including the title related embodiments, a distance between the third virtual key and the first virtual key is greater than a distance between the first virtual key and the second virtual key. The first virtual key and the second virtual key are adjacently arranged. The key layout corresponds to a virtual or physical key group included in a communication operation interface in the communication interface in some other embodiments, so as to facilitate consistency of user experience in interactive operation of different interfaces in the method and the electronic device in the related embodiments.

FIGS. 30A-30E are schematic views of an album application interface provided according to an embodiment of the present invention; the resource providing method of the related embodiments is described below with reference to the set of drawings.

The interface shown in fig. 30A may be used as an album function main interface, in which a sliding function bar 3603 including a plurality of contacts is provided, and a plurality of operable options, such as a virtual key group 3602, are provided for a user to trigger to perform an operation related to an album; when the interface shown in fig. 30A triggers a play operation option, for example, the key at the lowest part of the virtual key set 3602, the interface is switched to the album photo play interface shown in fig. 30B, and a plurality of operation options, for example, the virtual key set 3602, are still maintained in the interface for the user to trigger an operation related to the album, and a return option is provided for the user to trigger a return to album function homepage interface; the interface shown in FIG. 30B or FIG. 30A triggers an album selection option to enter the interface shown in FIG. 30C for selecting an album to be played, wherein a plurality of albums are arranged in the interface for the user to select and play, and a return option is provided for the user to trigger to return to the album function homepage interface or the album photo playing interface; triggering a photographing option to enter a photographing interface shown in fig. 30D at the interface shown in fig. 30B or 30A, wherein the interface has the options of confirming photographing and switching cameras, and has a return option for triggering a user to return to a homepage interface of an album function or a playing interface of an album photo; fig. 30E shows an interface that is a photo saving interface after the interface shown in fig. 30D triggers the confirmation of the shooting option, where the interface has a saving option for the user to trigger saving the shot photo, and a return option for the user to trigger returning to the shooting interface for shooting again. Wherein, the white boxes in the above views represent single or group contact head portraits, function bar mark pictures, photos, album thumbnails, photo shooting pictures and the like.

IncludedSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In the method or the electronic device according to some embodiments of the present invention including the title related embodiments, the album application function may be provided in the first application interface. Correspondingly, the three keys included in the virtual key group 3602 may also be functionally redefined for the functional attributes of the photographing interface in the photographing application.

Optionally includeSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the present invention, including title related embodiments, the electronic device may enable a camera of the electronic device for a user to take a photograph or video in response to a user's operation on a third virtual key located uppermost in the virtual key group 3602 on the first application interface 3604. In response to the operation of the user on the first virtual key located at the lower part in the virtual key group 3602 on the first application interface 3604, playing the photo/video through the first application interface 3604, and in response to the operation of the user on the second virtual key located at the middle part in the virtual key group 3602 on the first application interface 3604, stopping playing the photo and the video on the first application interface 3604. Preferably, the photo album application provided by the first application interface 3604 is used for automatically playing photos/videos in a slide show mode, and the shooting resources of the electronic device can be re-started for shooting and shooting by the user at any time in response to the operation of the user on the third virtual key located at the uppermost part of the virtual key group 3602 on the first application interface 3604.

Specifically, the above-described virtual key group 3602 function configuration and interaction manner of the triple-key mode may be further described as follows:

photographing: in the slide state, the camera may be exhaled in response to the user's operation of the third virtual key for the uppermost part of the virtual key group 3602, and the photographing view state is entered as shown in fig. 30D. After exhaling the camera, this third virtual key at the uppermost part of the virtual key set 3602 may be functionally redefined as a photographing shutter button. In response to the user operating the "back" button on the lower portion of the first application interface shown in fig. 30D, the slide show of the photo/video shown in fig. 30B may be re-presented on the display, and after the third virtual button redefined as the shutter is pressed to take a photograph, the third virtual button may be further functionally redefined as a "save picture", where the captured picture may be saved or discarded and returned to the view finding interface for taking a photograph of fig. 30D, respectively, in response to the user operating the third virtual button labeled "save" or the button labeled "back" on the lower portion of the first application interface shown in fig. 30E.

Pause: the slide show of the photo/video is paused. In response to the user's operation on the second virtual key located in the middle of the virtual key group 3602 on the first application interface 3604, the playing of the photo and the video is paused on the first application interface 3604.

And (3) playing: the slide is automatically started and the photos in the picture folder are specified in a loop. In response to a user operation on a first virtual key located at a lower portion in the virtual key group 3602 on the first application interface 3604, a photo/video is played through the first application interface 3604

In addition to the triple keys in the virtual key set 3602, buttons 3605 are provided on the first application interface 3604, located between the middle and upper buttons of the virtual key set 3602, in substantially the same column (column) as the triple keys of the virtual key set 3602. In response to clicking or the like on the button 3605, a folder option may be provided at the first application interface 3604, as shown in FIG. 30C. The folder option is used for a user to select related photos or photo folders aimed at by the playing interface of the photo/video in fig. 30B, so as to support multiple selections of the photos or photo folders, and the photo folders can be created and managed according to parameters such as shooting dates.

FIGS. 31A-31C are diagrams of application interfaces providing calendar, time and weather forecast according to embodiments of the present invention; the resource providing method of the related embodiments is described below with reference to the set of drawings.

The interface shown in fig. 31A may be used as a time function main interface, in which the interface has a sliding function bar 3703 including a plurality of contacts, and a plurality of operable virtual key groups 3702 including time for a user to trigger related operations, and the user triggers a time reporting option located on top of three keys of the virtual key groups 3702 to voice report the current time; the weather viewing option in the middle of the virtual key set 3702 triggered by the interface shown in fig. 31A enters the interface showing the local current weather condition shown in fig. 31B, and the voice broadcast option key can be configured around the current weather condition information in the interface, so that the user can trigger to perform voice broadcast on the local current weather condition. The interface shown in fig. 31A or 31B triggers a calendar option, such as the bottom-most key of the virtual key group 3702, to switch to the interface shown in fig. 31C that presents a calendar. Wherein, the white boxes in the above views represent single or group contact head portraits, function bar mark pictures, clock pictures and the like.

In some of the resource providing methods according to the embodiments of the present invention, the first application interface may provide applications of life information, daily information, such as weather forecast, calendar, time, and the like.

In response to the user's operation on the first virtual key of the lower part of the virtual key group 3702 on the first application interface 3704, calendar information 3701 is visually output through the first application interface 3704. The weather information may also be visually output through the first application interface 3704 in response to a user's operation on a second virtual key in the middle of the virtual key group 3702 on the first application interface 3704.

Alternatively, the time information is output in an audio broadcast manner or is visually output through the first application interface 3704 in response to the user's operation of the third virtual key on the upper portion of the first application interface 3704. Furthermore, the time information may also reside in the upper half of the first application interface 3704 in a visual manner, as shown in fig. 31A and 31B, and further output the time information to the user in an audio broadcasting manner in response to the operation of the third virtual key on the upper portion of the first application interface 3704 by the user.

Furthermore, before detecting the operation of the user on the first application interface 3704, the prompt information of the functions corresponding to the three keys of the virtual key group 3702 may be presented in the middle of the first application interface 3704, and of course, calendar information in the resource providing method of the foregoing embodiment may also be displayed in the middle of the first application interface 3704 in response to the operation of the user on the virtual key group 3702, where the calendar information may occupy a majority of the area of the middle of the first application interface 3704, and meanwhile, the position and coverage area of the time information on the first application interface 3704 may be dynamically adjusted, for example, adjusted to be smaller, as shown in fig. 31C.

The application programs such as photo album, weather and the like correspond to independent application options in a plurality of options in a menu area, are abbreviated as independent items, and are independent application interfaces in a plurality of interfaces. In addition to the individual items, the plurality of options of the menu area may also include an application collection option, simply collection item.

The independent items, namely contacts, groups, and applets built in the system, such as photo albums, and third party programs, such as you tube, and YouTube, and the user enters the independent items to enter the corresponding independent programs.

The collection items, a program associated with the collection items (collection item program) can output a collection item interface through a display after being executed, the interface comprises a collection of all types of independent items, the number of the independent items in the collection is generally 2 items or more than 2 items, at most, the number of the independent items in the collection is generally not more than the area range of a whole page of a mobile phone screen, and after a user enters the collection items, a list of the independent items in the electronic device is unfolded in a 3x4 or 3x3 array grid mode, and the like, as shown in fig. 24F. In connection with FIG. 22, the aggregate item interface (in other embodiments or also referred to as an identity aggregate program interface, an icon aggregate interface, etc.) shown in FIG. 24 may be preferentially output through the operating system UI after the electronic device is booted, instead of the 26-Contact interface, in the multiple interfaces shown in FIG. 22 that are configured at the top level of the electronic device operating system UI. Of course, the aggregate item interface may also be configured at a subsequent interface location, such as in lieu of 26-Group, associated with option 26e, such that, after startup, the electronic device preferentially outputs the 26-Contact interface via the display, with the current interface being continually updated in response to a user's continued left-sliding operation with respect to the current interface. After the user completes the 4 th left swipe, the aggregate item interface is output on the display as the latest current interface. As described above, the aggregate item program loads the generated aggregate item interface on the display, similar to a home screen user interface of a conventional cell phone, which includes a plurality of application launch icons corresponding to a plurality of applications.

Optionally, in the method or electronic device according to the embodiment of the present invention described above or described below, the single-row menu area 2803 further includes options for unknown contacts (not shown in the figure); the electronic device can switch to present a communication interface for the unknown contact on the display in response to a user selection of an unknown contact option, as shown in fig. 24G, the unknown contact communication interface including a plurality of communication information sets 288 displayed in an array, the plurality of communication information sets 288 including 5 communication sets, each of which corresponds to one or more unknown contacts, respectively. For example, the communication set 288-1 may be generated by communicating with a first unknown contact over a communication network, including one or more communication records with the first unknown contact. If the user applies a click or the like to the communication collection 288-1, the communication interface shown in FIG. 24I is switched on the display and a plurality of communication records between the user and the first unknown contact are output in the message area 284.

Optionally includeSingle card display, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In the method or the electronic device according to some embodiments of the present invention including the title related embodiments, the plurality of options further includes an option for a third set of hinges, and correspondingly, the plurality of resources available to the electronic device also includes the third set of hinges, where the third set of pages are mainly presented in a collective classification for the communication related options, and the communication related options include a communication portal and/or a dialing application portal for the contact. Wherein the contact communication portal includes a communication portal for known contacts and a communication portal for unknown contacts. Specifically, the third set of pages includes a known contact tab, an unknown contact tab, a tag of the known contact tab, a tag of the unknown contact tab, the tags of the known contact tab and the unknown contact tab being juxtaposed on top of the third set of hinges.

Optionally, the third hinge assembly may further include a label for a dialprogram tab, and the label for the dialprogram tab may be disposed on top of the third hinge assembly in parallel.

Optionally, the third hinge assembly may further include a living number tab, and the tag of the living number tab may be disposed on top of the third hinge assembly in parallel with the "contacts" and "strangers" tags.

By integrating such tabs for multiple contacts or multiple contacts on the same hinge, the third hinge is configured as a total portal for all contacts to avoid having individual contacts (e.g., third contacts) individually provided in the options area/menu area, in which case the electronic device user cannot directly access the communication resources for the third contact through multiple options in the options area at the bottom of the display. Here, the sum of the options provided by the known contact tab and the unknown contact tab, covering the majority of the options of contacts that the user of the electronic device may access, may be used as a supplement to one or more contact options separately presented in the options area (where there may be high frequency communication needs), including the options of other contacts than the plurality of contact options separately presented in the options area configured by the electronic device.

Optionally, in an embodiment, the "contacts" tab of the known contact tab is operable to output the known contact tab via a display of the electronic device, including a plurality of known contact communication record thumbnail sets displayed in order of predefined priority or in order of time of occurrence of a latest message, etc., each known contact communication record thumbnail set including a corresponding known contact icon/header and latest occurring communication information with the known contact, respectively. The "stranger" tab of the unknown contact tab is operable to provide, via the display, the unknown contact tab including a plurality of thumbnail sets of unknown contact communication records arranged for display, each thumbnail set of unknown contact communication records including a corresponding icon of the unknown contact (e.g., the last four digits of the phone number of the unknown contact and the background color uniquely corresponding to the four digits) and the most recently occurring communication information with the unknown contact, respectively. Similarly, the tab of the life number tab is operable to provide the life number tab through a display, the life number tab listing one or more commonly used contacts, typically contacts that are not related, including, for example: police, 120 emergency services, etc.

Optionally, the third set of tabs includes a dialer tab in addition to the known contact tab and the unknown contact tab. Optionally, the tag of the dialer tab is juxtaposed with a "contact" tag and a "stranger" tag on top of a third set of hinge interfaces, operable to output a dialing interface through the third set of pages, the dialing interface comprising: virtual numeric keypad, telephone number entry box, and call options. For a dial interface.

Optionally, when one of a plurality of thumbnail sets of known contact communication records on a known contact tab (e.g., a communication record for a contact corresponding to a second item at the top in the set list) is selected (e.g., clicked) by a user, the user interface switches to a communication interface, such as a communication interface, corresponding to the contact.

Alternatively, the dialer tab, otherwise known as a dialer interface, may not be integrated into the third hinge set, but rather be configured as a separate user interface. The corresponding dialer options may be configured at specific locations in an option area at the bottom of the display, e.g., at the end of the option area. At the electronic device, the dialer option is operable by a user to output a dialing interface through the display, the dialing interface comprising: virtual numeric keypad, telephone number entry box, and call options. Additionally, if the dialer is configured as a separate user interface, optionally, a dialer interface entry option may be configured around the known contact tab and the unknown contact tab, which may be operated by the user to go to the separately configured dialer interface for the user to make a dialer call, etc.

Optionally, corresponding to the dialing interface described above, the method of some embodiments further includes the steps of: 1) Responding to the click operation of the user through the virtual digital keyboard, and presenting the corresponding telephone number in a telephone number input box; 2) In response to a user operation for a call option, a telephone number targeting communication is established over the mobile telephone network.

A first option of the plurality of options is an option for a first contact (e.g., a daughter of a user of the electronic device) that is associated with a communication program that is operable to invoke the communication program to output a communication interface for the first contact via the display, in other words, in response to a user's operation of the first contact option, to run a communication application to present the communication interface for the first contact on the display, including profile information such as a avatar for the first contact, and a message area. In response to a user operation of the communication key set, establishing communication with the first contact over at least one communication network available to the electronic device to generate a plurality of communication information; and outputting the plurality of communication information through a message area on the first contact communication interface.

Optionally, the first contact communication interface further comprises an expandable button, all keys in the key group or a first part of keys are arranged in a column in the middle of the right side of the interface. The expandable button may be located between a key row formed by the first partial keys on the communication contact interface and the option area, i.e. below the key row and above the option area. In addition, after the expandable button in the first contact communication interface is operated by the user, the first contact communication interface is converted into the first contact communication interface with the expanded menu.

Optionally, in some embodiments, the expansion button is located in substantially the same column as the key column. Correspondingly, the method of these embodiments further comprises the steps of: in response to a user's selection operation (e.g., clicking) on the expandable button, an expanded menu is presented, optionally including at least one of a second portion key in the key set, an expressive option, an album/photo option, a social option (e.g., a redpack button), etc., and objects (e.g., redpacks, emoticons, photos, etc., as described above) selected by the user through the one or more options are each posted in the message area, which may be located, for example, at two locations to the left of the four menu locations of the expanded menu. In response to a user's click operation of the expansion button, the expansion menu is preferably presented in a single line in the lateral direction, with the expansion menu and expansion button being located at a position at the bottom of the display above the option area. The second part of keys of the key set included in the expanded menu, when activated, pops up the communication setup interface, an SMS message collection box on the SMS interface and a "send short message" button for sending the collected short message, as well as an online call interface. When the expression options and the social options are activated, corresponding expression bars or social interface elements are popped up for further operation of the user. And in response to related operations such as clicking and the like of the user on the second part of keys, the expression options or the social options, contracting the expansion menu into an expandable button.

Optionally, the extended menu described above may also include a menu option to initiate a voice or video call with the current contact when activated, a menu option to initiate a short message service with the current contact when activated. In other words, the menu option may allow the user to input text content through a dialog box and establish an SMS service for the text content through a mobile phone network in response to a user click operation. And the expanded menu may further include a menu option that, when activated, initiates a payment action for the current contact, a menu option that, when activated, initiates a video conference for a group of contacts that are co-owned with the current contact and the user of the electronic device. Here, the second partial key is configured in the expanded menu, while the expanded menu is contracted into an expandable button, which causes the keys of the second partial key or other social functions to be presented on the user interface only as needed, and after the user completes the corresponding operations through the keys, the keys can be hidden along with contraction of the expanded menu. The occupation of the display area on the user interface is reduced, the overall display effect of the elements on the user interface is improved, the complexity of the presentation of the interface elements is reduced, meanwhile, the communication inlets which can be accessed as many as possible through the user interface are maintained, and the accessibility of the user interface is improved to a certain extent. Of course, the first partial key included in the key row on the right side of the user interface may be displayed resident without being hidden, or may be provided at a constant location on the display across different contact interfaces, and even different application interfaces, for the user to interact with these user interfaces through the first partial key, respectively.

Alternatively, keys of multiple communication functions on the same contact interface may be selectively configured to be associated with different communication networks, meaning that multiple keys on the same contact interface may be associated with different communication networks of different traffic properties, respectively, during the same time period. For example, the first key and the second key in the key row formed by the first partial key are respectively associated with a wireless data transmission network, such as the internet of things, the WLAN or a mobile data network, and the first key and the second key are functionally corresponding. For example, the first key may collect user audio/video signals through a microphone and/or camera in response to a user click operation and transmit the audio message or video message through a wireless data transmission network. The second key is operable by the user to output an audiovisual message received over the wireless data transmission network through the speaker and/or the display. In addition, a third key of the key row is associated with the mobile telephone network through which voice telephone service can be established in response to a user click operation. The selective configuration of the key sets on the contact interface is also applicable to other related embodiments, and is not described in detail herein.

Optionally, in the method or electronic device according to the embodiment of the present invention described above or below, the notification area 289 is laterally configured at the top of the display to at least partially present one or more unread notification information associated with one or more options in the single row area 283, in particular, some or all of these unread notification information are communication information belonging to multiple business properties from contacts, contact groups or unknown contacts in the multiple options, or some of these unread notification information may also be information such as an upgrade reminder for an application in the multiple options. At least a portion of this unread notification information is presented in the notification area 289, preferably in the form of the most recent one, or in the form of a rotation of each, or some number. Correspondingly, in response to the user's operation of the notification area 289, the notification area 289 is extended on the display in the longitudinal direction shown by the arrow in the figure to form an enlarged notification area 285 to collectively present a plurality of or all of the unread notification information, as shown in fig. 24H. If the user performs a click operation on any of the notification information in the communication collection 285, if the notification information is from a certain contact or group of contacts, the communication interface shown in fig. 24I is switched and presented on the display, and a plurality of communication records between the user and the contact are output in the message area 284. The main area of the display is used to display a communication interface or an application interface for the current contact within a certain period of time, and the notification area 289 provided above the display can enable the user to know some communication information and update information of other contacts or applications outside the current contact in time. Wherein the notification area or notification bar 289 content may include: the format of the notification bar may include an avatar and name describing the source of the information, an abstract of the information, and an icon of the type of information, including information, notifications, etc.

By setting the notification bar 289 in the top area of the display above the communication interface and the application interface, after receiving the unread notification information, the notification bar is reminded and accumulated, optionally, the accumulation mode is the latest uppermost and the oldest lowermost, the user can expand all notification information through gestures such as pulling down, clicking and the like on the notification bar 289, clicking information can borrow the whole display range of the display to view the information in an enlarged mode (not shown in the figure), and returning from the message enlarged mode can clear the message. The notification bar 289 or the periphery thereof can be provided with a soft button 'read all' 285-0, all unread information can be read out one by one in sequence, and one piece of read information can be cleared after the reading is finished; in response to a user dragging/sliding or scrolling a single piece of information to the left through the display, a normally hidden "reply/delete" function entry 285-9 may be displayed, clicking on the "reply" button in the notification bar function entry 285-9 may go to the interface of the contact, group or applet corresponding to the sender of the message, in response to a user clicking on the "delete" button in the function entry 285-9, the corresponding notification information may be deleted directly from the notification bars 285, 289, but without deleting the communication record of the relevant sender in the background. Alternatively, for the external output form of the notification information in the notification bars 289, 285, the text or voice notification information may directly use the original content, for example, "i am science and technology application software has a new version, i.e. is updated for the mobile phone". The notification information content of other media types is converted into text form to make a brief reminder, for example, a message of a video type may be presented in text for the video, for example, "mr. Zhao Fenglin (contact: 13761182252) of your patent advisor sent a video" to you, and displayed in notification bars 285, 289.

The inventor finds that the instant messaging schemes in the prior art all require a user to perform complex hierarchical interactive operation on a communication device and application software therein, but lack of schemes for implementing instant messaging through simple hardware operation, and such missing schemes can allow the user to operate a physical keyboard to trigger a corresponding software program to be executed so as to establish instant messaging. Such a missing scheme will be schematically illustrated by the following examples.

Key/button layout and its form and function

Fig. 1a is a schematic structural diagram of a physical keyboard according to an embodiment of the present invention, as shown in fig. 1a, where the physical keyboard includes a first key 5a21 and a second key 5a22, and optionally, the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 are detachable with respect to a main body of a communication device, such as a mobile phone, and may be disposed on a separate base (not shown in the figure), and connected to a processor in a terminal communication device through a physical interface (not shown in the figure) of a connector between the main body of the communication device and the base.

The first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 may be provided on a first surface (front surface) or a second surface (side surface) of the housing in an adjacent manner, for example. The two physical keys can be square or round or other shaped outline structures. Of course, the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 may be disposed in a dispersed manner, for example, one disposed on the first surface of the housing and one disposed on the second surface of the housing; alternatively, the first keys 5a21 and the second keys 5a22 are provided in a dispersed manner on the same surface of the housing. In other alternative modifications, the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 may be connected together or integrally provided, and the key arrangement mentioned herein may be applied to the above or below other embodiments of the present invention, and other parts may not be described herein.

Wherein the first key 5a21 may issue a first trigger signal to the processor 12 in response to a first single action by the user. At this time, the processor 12 collects a first media signal shorter than a preset time period through the media collection unit 13 in response to the first trigger signal, and transmits the first media signal through the wireless data transmission network through the wireless data transmission unit 15. Wherein the second key 5a22 may issue a second trigger signal to the processor 12 in response to a second single action by the user. The processor 12 outputs a second media signal received by the wireless data transmission unit 15 via the wireless data transmission network through the media playing unit 14 in response to the second trigger signal.

Wherein the first media signal and the second media signal may comprise a voice message and/or a video/image message, respectively, having a duration shorter than a preset duration.

As illustrated in fig. 1a, the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 may be keys, which may be coupled to the processor directly or via a physical interface (not shown) and are detachable with respect to the handset via the physical interface. Thus, in the present embodiment, the first single action may be a long press operation (one press but the duration of the press is long, such as at least 2 seconds), and the second single action may be a simple operation such as a single press operation (one press and the duration of the press is short, such as not more than 1 second), a rapid multiple continuous press operation, or the like.

In this embodiment, the two physical keys are set so that the user can implement different communication requirements by respectively operating the two physical keys, such as sending the first media signal and playing the received second media signal.

It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the user can realize the communication requirement for the voice message or the audio-video message of the contact person through the one-key operation by the collection and the sending of the first media signal, and at this time, the processor 12 can respond to the first trigger signal to collect the first media signal not exceeding the preset duration through the media collection unit 13.

Specifically, the processor 12 may control the longest collection duration (i.e. the above-mentioned preset duration) for which the media collection unit 13 works once, for example, 1 minute, so that the user can only send the first media data to the contact for at most 1 minute at a time, and when the user still needs to continue to send, the first operation may be triggered again on the first key 5a 21. In practical applications, taking the first single action as an example of a long press operation, the user may perform a long press operation on the first key 5a21 to trigger the collection of the first media data (for example, voice), after the user presses the first key 5a21, the user may start speaking, at this time, the media collection unit 13 starts to collect the voice of the user under the control of the processor 12, if the pressing duration has not reached the above-mentioned maximum collection duration, the user releases the key, and the media collection unit 13 stops collecting under the control of the processor 12 and sends the collected voice to the processor 12. Conversely, if the user has not released the key when the duration of the pressing has reached the above-described maximum acquisition duration, the media acquisition unit 13 may also stop the acquisition under the control of the processor 12 and send the voice that has been acquired to the processor 12.

In this example, after the user performs the first single action on the first key 5a21, the media collection unit 13 may be caused to record the first media signal for a certain period of time, and then the recorded first media signal is sent out by the processor 12, that is, the user may send out a voice message to the contact.

In practical applications, during the process of sending the first media signal, the processor 12 may first perform compression encoding processing on the first media signal by using a certain encoding standard, for example, h.264, and then encapsulate the compressed and encoded first media signal according to a certain network transmission protocol, for example, TCP, UDP, etc., and send the encapsulated data packet to the opposite terminal contact.

In this embodiment, the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 may be separately operated to trigger the collection and transmission of the first media signal and the playing of the second media signal, respectively, and optionally, the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 may send a third trigger signal to the processor 12 in response to the third operation, and the processor 12 initiates an audio-video call through the wireless data transmission network via the wireless data transmission unit 15 in response to the third trigger signal. The third operation may be a pressing operation applied to the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 simultaneously.

Specifically, the user may apply a third operation to the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 after selecting a certain contact in the communication application, i.e., pressing the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 synchronously. At this time, the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 respectively send third trigger signals to the processor 12, and the processor 12 receives the third trigger signals sent by the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 respectively at the same time or in a shorter time interval, so as to initiate an online audio/video call to the corresponding contact.

It will be appreciated that if the contact answers the audio/video call, the processor 12 may control the media capturing unit 13 to start capturing the media signal of the user (referred to as a third media signal), and send the real-time captured third media signal to the contact side, where the third media signal may be an audio/video signal captured through a microphone and a camera.

To more clearly illustrate that the different operations performed on the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 correspond to different communication processes, as shown in fig. 1b, a correspondence relationship between the different operations performed on the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 and the different communication processes is illustrated in the drawing: performing long-press operation on the first key 5a21, triggering recording of a first media signal shorter than a certain time length, and transmitting the first media signal after loosening; a short pressing operation, namely a single pressing operation, is carried out on the second key 5a22, and the received second media signal is triggered to be played; simultaneously pressing the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 initiates an audio-video call.

Of course, optionally, the physical keyboard may further include another key disposed adjacent to the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22, where the aforementioned initiation of the audio/video call may be implemented by performing a short-press operation on the other key.

In summary, through the two physical keys (the first key and the second key) provided in the embodiment, the user can realize the communication requirements of voice message, message receiving playing and online audio/video call through simple operation of the two physical keys.

Fig. 2a is a schematic structural diagram of another physical keyboard according to an embodiment of the present invention, as shown in fig. 2a, the physical keyboard includes a third key 6a31.

In this embodiment, the third key 6a31 may send the first trigger signal and the second trigger signal to the processor 12 directly or through a physical interface in response to the first single action and the second single action, respectively.

The processor 12 collects a first media signal shorter than a preset time period through the media collection unit 13 in response to the first trigger signal, and transmits the first media signal through the wireless data transmission network through the wireless data transmission unit 15. The processor 12 outputs a second media signal received by the wireless data transmission unit 15 via the wireless data transmission network through the media playing unit 14 in response to the second trigger signal.

Optionally, a third key 6a31 may also issue a third trigger signal to the processor 13 in response to a third single action. In response to this third trigger signal, the processor 12 initiates an audio-video call via the wireless data transmission network through the wireless data transmission unit 15.

In this embodiment, through a single action operation on one physical key, the user can realize the communication requirements of sending a section of media signal, playing the received media signal, and initiating an online audio/video call.

Alternatively, as shown in fig. 2a, the third key 6a31 may be a key, so that operations that may be performed on the key include, for example: single press operation, relatively continuous multiple press operation, long press operation. Thus, alternatively, the above-described first operation, second operation, and third operation may be a long press operation, a single press operation, a multiple press operation, respectively. The response processing logic of the user to trigger different operations of the post-processor 12 may refer to the description in the foregoing embodiment, and is not repeated.

When the third key 6a31 is implemented as a key, in order to more clearly illustrate that the different operations performed on the third key 6a31 correspond to different communication processes, as shown in fig. 2b, a correspondence relationship between the different operations performed on the third key 6a31 and the different communication processes is illustrated: performing long-time pressing operation on the third key 6a31, triggering recording of a first media signal shorter than a certain time length, and sending the voice message after loosening; performing short pressing operation, namely single pressing operation, on the third key 6a31 to trigger playing of the received second media signal; and performing short pressing operation on the third key 6a31 for a plurality of times to initiate an audio-video call.

In summary, through the physical keyboard 11 provided on the communication device according to the embodiment of the present invention, a user can realize different communication requirements only by performing simple operations on at least one physical key included in the physical keyboard 11, so that the operation is convenient, and the timeliness and reliability of sending a communication message to a contact by the user and the timeliness of receiving a communication message sent by the contact are also ensured.

Alternatively, as shown in fig. 32a, the third key 6a31 may be a self-resetting toggle key, which at least includes: the lever, the elastic member supporting the lever below the lever, so that the first operation may be a toggle in a first direction, the second operation may be a toggle in a second direction, and the third operation may be a press in a third direction.

Wherein, a toggle in a first direction, a toggle in a second direction, a press in a third direction along the elastic member may trigger different electrical states on the input port of the processor 12, respectively, so that the processor 12 recognizes what operation the user is currently triggering.

A specific structure of a toggle key is illustrated in fig. 32b, the toggle key comprising: the device comprises a deflector rod, an elastic piece for supporting the deflector rod below the deflector rod, a pair of metal contacts positioned on a first side of the deflector rod, a pair of metal contacts positioned on a second side of the deflector rod, and a pair of metal contacts positioned on a third side of the deflector rod. A toggle in a first direction causes a pair of metal contacts on a first side to be in contact conduction, a toggle in a second direction causes a pair of metal contacts on a second side to be in contact conduction, and a press in a third direction causes a pair of metal contacts on a third side to be in contact conduction.

Wherein, the material of the elastic piece is a metal material. Optionally, the toggle key may further include a rotating shaft supporting the elastic element, and the toggle lever is fixedly connected with the rotating shaft. Wherein each pair of metal contacts may be a metal sheet having a volume.

The toggle key is accommodated in a cavity, and the cavity limits the amplitude of dialing the toggle key. Alternatively, a pair of metal contacts may be provided on each of the three sides, one of the pair of metal contacts being provided on the inner wall of the cavity on the corresponding side, and the other metal contact being symmetrically provided on the elastic member. Each metal contact provided on the inner wall of the cavity may be connected to the processor 12, such that toggling in a first direction may cause a pair of metal contacts on a first side to contact and conduct to issue a first trigger signal to the processor 12; toggling in the second direction may cause a pair of metal contacts on the second side to contact to conduct to issue a second trigger signal to the processor 12; pressing in the third direction may cause a pair of metal contacts on the third side to make contact to issue a third trigger signal to the processor 12. Therefore, when the metal contact on one side is conducted, the connection with the processor 12 is conducted, so that the processor 12 knows which direction of toggle or press operation is currently triggered by the user, and the processor 12 performs the processing of the subsequent corresponding communication process.

The third key, such as the corresponding metal contacts in the three directions, may be connected to the processor 12 through a direct connection manner, so that when a user applies different operations, a level state of an interface, such as a GPIO port, directly connected to the processor 12 may change. Of course, the third key may also be connected to a different GPIO port of the processor 12 through other circuit structures such as logic processing circuitry to generate different level states on the corresponding GPIO port of the processor through the logic processing circuitry in response to user-triggered operations.

Because the toggle key can be toggled or pressed in different directions to realize different communication requirements, the toggle key is generally a self-resetting toggle key. That is, after the user performs the toggle in the first direction, the toggle lever may be automatically reset after the toggle lever is released, so that the user can perform the next operation in a certain direction.

When the third key 6a31 is implemented as the toggle key illustrated in fig. 32a and 32b, in order to more clearly illustrate that different operations performed on the toggle key correspond to different communication processes, as shown in fig. 32c, a correspondence relationship between different operations performed on the toggle key and different communication processes is illustrated in the drawings: the toggle key is toggled leftwards, a first media signal shorter than a certain time length is triggered and recorded, and the voice message is sent after the first media signal is released; toggling the toggle key to the right to trigger playing the received second media signal; and pressing the toggle key downwards at the reset position to initiate an audio-video call.

Fig. 33 is a schematic structural diagram of still another physical keyboard according to an embodiment of the present invention, as shown in fig. 33, where the physical keyboard includes a fourth key 3941 that is configured to send a fourth trigger signal to the processor 12 in response to a fourth operation. Processor 12 initiates an audio or video group call to a member of the emergency contact group via the internet or public switched telephone network, in response to the fourth trigger signal, in an alternative manner through the wireless data transmission unit.

In which alternative means that if a certain network fails, a call can be made through another network.

In the embodiment of the present invention, the user can realize the communication requirement of an emergency call in an emergency situation, in addition to the transmission of the first media signal and the playing of the second media signal in the foregoing embodiments through the physical keyboard 11.

Specifically, the physical keyboard 11 may include a fourth key 3941, where the fourth key 3941 may be a key, so that, for convenience, the user may implement the emergency call more directly in case of emergency, the fourth operation may be a single-press operation or a single-action operation such as 2-3 consecutive presses.

It should be noted that, the fourth key 3941 is co-located on the physical keyboard 11 with the plurality of physical keys that can perform the first media signal transmission and the second media signal playing provided in the other embodiments, for example, the physical keyboard 11 may include the first key 5a21, the second key 5a22, and the fourth key 3941, for example, the physical keyboard 11 may include the third key 6a31 and the fourth key 3941. Illustrated in fig. 33 is a case where the physical keyboard 11 includes a third key 6a31 and a fourth key 3941.

In practice, the fourth key 3941 may be disposed at a preset distance interval from other keys such as the first and second keys 5a21 and 5a22, the third key 6a 31. Such as illustrated in fig. 33: the third key 6a31 is provided on the right side of the lower region of the front face of the housing, and the fourth key 3941 is provided on the left side of the region with a distance from the third key 6a 31.

Alternatively, the fourth key 3941 may also have a shape and/or size different from other keys, such as the first key 5a21, the second key 5a22, and the third key 6a31 being rectangular, and the fourth key 3941 being circular. Alternatively, the fourth key 3941 may have a different logo from other keys, such as L/T for the third key 6a31 and E for the fourth key, as illustrated in fig. 3.

In practical application, an emergency contact group may be preset in an instant messaging application program in the terminal communication device, where the emergency contact group includes at least one contact, and generally, in order to ensure that a user can successfully contact an emergency contact in an emergency situation, the emergency contact group includes at least two contacts.

Based on this, when the user encounters an emergency, only some preset operation of the fourth key 3941 is required to trigger the processor 12 to initiate an audio or video group call to a member of the emergency contact group via the internet or public switched telephone network. Wherein an online video call can be made over the internet and an audio call can be made over a public switched telephone network.

Optionally, since the fourth key 3941 is a physical key used by the user to initiate an emergency call in the event of an emergency, to ensure that the user can more conveniently locate the fourth key 3941 in the event of an emergency, the fourth key 3941 may be sized and positioned differently from other physical keys, such as being spaced a distance from other physical keys and being larger in size.

The foregoing describes several alternative implementations of the physical keyboard 11 provided in embodiments of the present invention. In fact, optionally, a warning light reflecting the communication state of the terminal communication device may be provided on the physical keyboard 11 or the housing. The indicator lamps may be provided independently on each physical key, or one or more indicator lamps may be provided on the physical keyboard 11 that do not correspond to each physical key one by one. For example, a warning light for warning of the receipt of a communication message, such as the communication status warning light illustrated in fig. 3, may be included, which may flash or highlight upon receipt of a message, such as the aforementioned second media signal, to warning that a communication message was received.

In summary, through the physical keyboard 11 provided on the terminal communication device according to the embodiment of the present invention, a user can realize different communication requirements only by performing simple operations on at least one physical key included in the physical keyboard 11, so that the convenience of operation is ensured, and the timeliness and reliability of sending communication messages to contacts and the timeliness of receiving communication messages sent by contacts are also ensured.

Based on several implementations of the physical keyboard 11, the terminal communication device provided herein may further include one or two pairs of direction keys for a user to select the content displayed on the display, such as contact related information displayed by the communication application. That is, the selection of the contact may be accomplished through the directional key.

Alternatively, the pair of direction keys is provided on both sides in the horizontal direction of the first key 5a21 and/or the second key 5a22, or on both sides in the horizontal direction of the third key 6a 31. May be provided adjacent to or integrally with at least one of the first key 5a21, the second key 5a22, and the third key 6a31 in appearance. As shown in fig. 34, fig. 34 illustrates that direction keys 4032 are provided on both left and right sides of the third key 6a 31.

In some embodiments, when the terminal communication device is started, the profile information or the interaction interface of the first contact or the contact group where the first contact is located is presented on the first interface, at this time, the processor 12 may switch the interaction interface that presents the profile information of the second contact or the contact group where the second contact is located on the screen in response to the user pressing the direction key on the right side of the first key.

Optionally, the first contact is a contact that is most frequently contacted by the user in a statistical sense, and the frequency of the second contact and the third contact used in the statistical sense is sequentially reduced.

Similarly, the processor 12 may also switch the profile information or the interaction interface of the second contact or the contact group where the second contact is located to be presented as the profile information or the interaction interface of the first contact or the contact group where the first contact is located on the screen in response to the user pressing the direction key on the left side of the first key, which is not described herein.

When the user selects a contact, e.g. a second contact, on the display by means of the arrow key, after which the second key 5a22 may be pressed continuously, the voice message from the second contact may be played, or the voice message may be sent to the second contact by long pressing the first key 5a 21. Of course, the user may initiate an audio/video call to the second contact through the internet by pressing the first key 5a21 and the second key 5a22 in linkage or by pressing the third key 6a31, which will not be described again here.

In some embodiments, after the user presses the direction key on the right side of the first key 5a 21/the second key 5a22 for the nth time, contact related information or a commonly used application entry is displayed on the screen; the processor 12 may switch into the normal interface of the mobile phone desktop on the screen in response to the n+1th pressing of the direction key on the right side of the first key 5a 21/the second key 5a22 by the user, including a plurality of application icons and other resources, and the user may operate various applications by means of the normal interface of the mobile phone desktop to operate the terminal communication device in the operation manner of the mobile communication device such as a mobile phone.

Alternatively, whether the interactive interface is located in profile information of a contact, an interactive interface, or a contact group where a contact is located, or the like, under the operation of the user, and enters the running interfaces of various application programs through the interfaces of the normal mobile phone desktop, the processor 12 may switch to a predetermined interactive interface in response to a predetermined gesture applied by the user on the screen, for example, the processor may switch to a predetermined interactive interface on the screen, for example, a profile information interface of a specific contact, or back display a start-up initial interface, or the like, in response to the user applying a "Z" slide gesture or a slide gesture along a diagonal line of the screen.

The foregoing describes several implementations of the physical keyboard 11 on a communication device, which may have different implementations in practical applications. For example, the communication apparatus may be implemented as a communication terminal such as a smart phone, a tablet computer, or the like, may be implemented as a portable terminal device, may be implemented as a remote controller, or the like. In the following, several specific implementations are described in connection with the following embodiments.

Design for separating button and host

In an alternative embodiment, as shown in fig. 3, the communication device is embodied as a communication terminal such as a smart phone, tablet computer, or the like. The physical keyboard illustrated in fig. 3 comprises the third key and the fourth key mentioned in the previous embodiments, wherein the third key is illustrated as a key with an L/T letter and the fourth key is illustrated as a key with an E letter. At this time, the front side of the communication device further includes a display having a larger size, and the display supports a triggering operation, and thus may also be referred to as a touch screen, and may be used to display interface elements such as the contact interaction interface illustrated in fig. 3. The physical keyboard is shown in fig. 3 as being located below the display, but the physical keyboard may be located on the left or right side of the display, for example, and not limited thereto.

Additionally, in some alternative embodiments, a housing of the communication device may be further provided with a warning light that reflects the operating state of the communication device, such as a warning light that reflects whether the power is sufficient (e.g., the power warning light illustrated in fig. 3), and blinks or lights up when the power is low to prompt the user to charge the communication device; such as a warning light reflecting the status of network connection (e.g., a network warning light as illustrated in fig. 3), blinks or lights up when the network quality is abnormal to alert the user that the network is poor.

In addition, as shown in fig. 3, a power key, a volume adjustment key may be provided on the side of the communication device.

In an alternative embodiment, as shown in fig. 4, the communication device is embodied as a remote control for use with some kind of intelligent terminal. Communication between the remote controller and the intelligent terminal can be established in a wireless or wired mode, such as Bluetooth, infrared and other communication modes.

The physical keyboard described in the foregoing embodiments may be provided in the remote controller. Alternatively, however, a physical keyboard may be provided in the smart terminal, and in addition, the instant messaging application program mentioned in the foregoing embodiment may be installed in the smart terminal.

The physical keyboard in the remote controller illustrated in fig. 4 includes a first key, a second key, and a fourth key, wherein the first key is illustrated as a key with an L-letter shape, the second key is illustrated as a key with a T-letter shape, and the fourth key is illustrated as a key with an E-letter shape.

In a further alternative embodiment, as shown in fig. 5, the communication device is embodied as a portable terminal device, in which a physical keyboard as described in the previous embodiments and one or several digital displays may be provided.

The physical keyboard located in the terminal device illustrated in fig. 5 includes a first key, a second key and a fourth key, wherein the first key is illustrated as a key with an L-shape, the second key is illustrated as a key with a T-shape, and the fourth key is illustrated as a key with an E-shape.

The terminal device illustrated in fig. 5 is provided with two digital displays, each associated with two switching buttons. The first digital display is used for switching and displaying contact information, and the second digital display can display the number of unread messages corresponding to the contacts displayed on the first digital display and switching and displaying the unread messages.

It should be noted that "recording voice messages and/or video/image messages with identification" mentioned in the foregoing embodiment is mainly embodied in this embodiment by displaying the contact information, the number of unread messages of a part type and the unread messages through a digital display, where the part type may be a voice message or a text message.

In yet another alternative embodiment, as shown in fig. 6, the communication device is embodied as a terminal device having a detachable controller. The physical keyboard described in the foregoing embodiments may be provided in the controller, which is connected to the terminal device main body through the connection interface. That is, the physical keyboard is a separate physical component that is detachably disposed on the housing of the communication device and communicatively coupled to the processor 12 via a wired and/or wireless interface.

The physical keyboard located in the controller illustrated in fig. 6 includes a first key, a second key, and a fourth key, wherein the first key is illustrated as a key with an L-letter shape, the second key is illustrated as a key with a T-letter shape, and the fourth key is illustrated as a key with an E-letter shape.

Of course, it should be noted that: the communication apparatus or the electronic device according to any of the embodiments of the present invention is not limited to an integrally assembled device such as a mobile phone, and the respective functional units of the communication apparatus or the electronic device may also exist independently in a distributed manner. For example, the display comprised by the electronic device may be a physically separate display unit, such as a television or the like. Also for example, the physical keyboard including one or more keys in the embodiment of fig. 6 may be separate from the processor unit and communicatively coupled to the processor unit in a detachable manner, either wired or wireless.

Integrated interactive interface

It should be appreciated that: in'Integrated interactive interfaceAny of the methods or apparatus according to embodiments of the invention mentioned hereinafter may be used in conjunction with the foregoing methods including, but not limited to "Key/button layout and its form and function”“Button and host computer separable equipment Meter with a meter body"etc. according to the invention The descriptions in the methods or apparatuses of the embodiments are combined or implemented in a manner that seeks to achieve the same.

In the process of researching the electronic equipment, such as mobile terminal devices like mobile phones, the inventor finds that in the software system and the communication system in the prior art, different application programs independently receive and present data and utilize communication resources; the applications also each design independent interoperation, and there is no possibility of integrating data and resources of each application for use by users, and there is an unaware need in the prior art, and accordingly, the related solutions are also lacking. Under the existing architecture of operating system software and application software, users need to perform independent interaction with respect to different application programs respectively in the process of accessing required data through an interaction interface of the electronic device, which reduces the efficiency of accessing data or information stored in different application programs by the users.

The method or apparatus according to the embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to an electronic device or a communication apparatus having a communication function, such as a mobile phone. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a prior art system architecture for establishing communication with contacts via a mobile terminal, and the following will describe the system architecture in conjunction with FIG. 7 to reduce the inefficiency of a user to obtain data from multiple applications via human-machine interaction. As shown in fig. 7, the existing man-machine interaction, the access relationship between the person and the program can be clearly expressed. The prior art is to configure communication resources with multiple communication applications in an operating system as a guide, which makes it necessary for a user to access different application programs 1101 and application programs 1102 respectively, even if multiple communication information, such as Short Messages (SMS) and voice messages, are directed to the same contact person, where the different information corresponds to different services respectively, and may come from different communication networks, or occur (ocur) respectively through different communication networks or corresponding network interfaces. Such as from the mobile phone network 1108 and the WLAN (Wireless Local Area Networks, wireless local area network) network 1107, respectively, this configuration of the decentralized communication resources for the same contact 1103 is due on the one hand to the diversification development in the evolution of the communication network and on the other hand to the diversification development of the application development ecology in the development of the software technology, but of course there may be other reasons, but in any event this results in that the information of this contact 1103 is stored decentralized in different applications and that the various communication information similar to the one mentioned above for this contact is also required to be handled and stored decentralized in different applications, respectively. In addition, this situation also results in the user 1104 having to access to different applications, the application 1101, the application 1102, etc., respectively, and to perform different or somewhat repetitive, large number of, multi-level interactions with respect to each application, respectively, to obtain the corresponding information. And each application program has independent interaction interfaces and information presentation modes, and the possibility of integrating the application programs by taking user interaction as a guide does not exist.

Some users also desire that some applications in the electronic device be easily accessible, e.g. that portals for these applications be intuitively available at the first layer of the interaction hierarchy of the software system of the electronic device. For electronic devices for communication, users may also want to provide more consistency or correspondence between their user interface for communication functions and interfaces for applications providing other functions such as photographing or photo album, to enhance the operability across interfaces, and even provide user interfaces that are consistent across software and hardware, during use of the electronic device.

Cross-interface graphic element providing method and device

Based on the inventors' findings of these deficiencies of the prior art and the corresponding studies of potential needs; in one embodiment of the present invention, a resource providing method for an electronic device is provided, optionally, the method may be run at an electronic device having a processor unit, a memory, and a display, fig. 16 is a flow chart of an interface element providing method according to the embodiment of the present invention, as shown in fig. 16, the interface element providing method includes:

In step 2001, a first interactive interface is displayed on the electronic device.

In step 2002, a plurality of communication information corresponding to at least one communication network is integrated and output through a first interactive interface.

Wherein the plurality of communication information is generated by communication via at least one communication network, such as a voice message, a video message transmitted by the at least one communication network, or an incoming/outgoing phone call record via the at least one communication network, etc.

In step 2003, a second interactive interface is displayed on the electronic device in response to the switching operation.

Wherein first and second user interface elements corresponding in form or function are provided on the first and second interactive interfaces, and the first user interface element is associated with at least one communication network for the first interactive interface.

Correspondingly, in another embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided an electronic device, including: a display; a processor unit; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit to: i) Displaying a first interactive interface on the electronic device; ii) integrating, via the first interactive interface, a plurality of communication information corresponding to the at least one communication network; iii) And responding to the switching operation, and switching and displaying a second interactive interface on the electronic equipment. Providing user interface elements on the first interactive interface and the second interactive interface respectively; wherein the user interface element on the first interactive interface is associated with at least one communication network. As an interface element, the user interface element is operable by the processor to establish a plurality of communications information via a plurality of communications networks available to the electronic device in response to a user operation.

In addition, for users, old people and some general users desiring to simplify man-machine interaction, they pay more attention to a certain communication object in an electronic device such as a mobile phone, and the content of communication information itself generated between the communication object and the communication object can be conveniently accessed, rather than what application program or communication channel the communication information is provided by, for example, in a use scene of the mobile phone, some users pay more attention to communication with contacts in the mobile phone, such as short messages sent and received through a mobile phone network, dialing/answering a phone, or voice messages sent or received through a wireless data transmission network, incoming and outgoing web phones, etc.; however, these contact information and the communication information of the related contacts are stored in different application programs in a decentralized manner, for example, in the existing smart phone, the contacts need to be stored in a phone address book, and the contacts need to be stored in an internet communication tool, although in many cases, the two corresponding contacts are the same contact, which causes redundancy of information. This is determined by the software architecture of the multi-application plus operating system described above, and is not described in detail herein.

As described above, this potential problem arises in part because the existing multiple application software developed by different vendors and running on an operating system is a technical problem that a technician cannot predict as necessary and cannot be solved under the prior art architecture.

The potential need in the above-described scenario has not been identified in the prior art, but based on the above-described research effort and the discovery of solutions to the deficiencies of the prior art, the inventors have recognized that it would be beneficial if the accessibility (accessibility) of the communication information or the user interface for communication by the user during interaction with the electronic device could be improved. This means that it is necessary to propose a way to redesign the interactive interface or man-machine interface of the electronic device, which is guided by the user interaction, rather than by the architecture of "operating system + multi-application" in the prior art.

Some embodiments of the first resource providing method

Based on the inventors' findings of these deficiencies of the prior art and the corresponding studies of potential needs; in an embodiment of the present invention, a resource providing method for an electronic device is provided, optionally the method may be run at an electronic device having a processor unit, a memory, and a display, fig. 8 is a flow chart of the resource providing method according to the embodiment of the present invention, as shown in fig. 8, the resource providing method comprising:

In step 1201, communication is established with a first communication object over at least one communication network available to the electronic device to generate a plurality of communication information.

In step 1202, a plurality of communications are provided to a user of an electronic device through at least one interactive interface of the electronic device.

From the viewpoint of user interaction, the above step 1202 may be understood as taking the first communication object as a guide to configure the communication resources and the communication information on the interactive interface in the communication process of the user and the first communication object through the electronic device, or taking the first communication object as a center (center) to reconfigure the communication resources on the interactive interface in the communication process of the user and the first communication object through the electronic device, which also improves the accessibility of a plurality of communication information to the user. This is quite different from the configuration of communication resources in the prior art, which is often conducted by taking communication resources such as communication functions, communication applications, communication channels, and the like as directions.

Meanwhile, it should be noted that: the first communication object mentioned in the above step may be a company or a person as a communication object, or a virtual object such as a robot, chat application software, or the like. And in particular to establish communication with the first communication object, it may be that the communication with the first object is actually performed by means of a communication tool associated with the first communication object, which communication tool has access to the at least one communication network.

The communication means associated with the first communication object may be understood as a communication device in a hardware form used by the first communication object or a communication means in a software form running on an entity communication device, for example, the former may be a mobile device for communication with an operating system or without an operating system, the latter may be instant messaging software running on an entity electronic device, or the like.

Optionally, in some embodiments of the present invention including embodiments under the heading "cross-interface graphic element providing method and apparatus", the at least one communication network may include a plurality of wireless communication networks, or may further include one or more wired communication networks, and in some embodiments below, the resource providing method in the embodiments of the present invention may be described taking a scenario in which a user establishes communication with a certain (indirect) contact (for example, mr. Zhao) using a mobile terminal connected to the plurality of wireless communication networks as an example. For example, if the first contact uses two electronic devices, i.e. a mobile phone and a tablet computer connected to the internet, one of the communication tools corresponding to the first contact in at least one communication network is: the mobile phone corresponding to mr. Zhao in the mobile phone network is provided with a phone number, e.g. +86-13761182252, by which the network is addressed for communication. The tablet personal computer is provided with instant messaging (IM, instant messaging) software, and another communication tool corresponding to the first contact in at least one communication network is the Instant Messaging (IM) software; the tablet computer is allocated with address information such as an IP address and a port number on the internet, and the instant messaging software can be addressed to communicate through the address information. Of course, the user may change the communication tool, for example, log in the instant messaging software in another computer, smart phone, tablet, etc., and at this time, the communication network and network address (IP, network segment) where the user is located may also change, so that the electronic device of the user may communicate with the first contact person through the communication network based on the changed address information.

Here, those skilled in the art will understand that: the user communicates with the contact via the mobile terminal, in effect via an electronic, optoelectronic or photonic medium/channel or network, with the communication device or means associated with the communication object or contact, and the communication address used is also typically the destination address assigned to the communication device on a network or network information similar to the communication means that enables the user to be identified and located on the communication network. Hereinafter, details of such communications may not be described in detail. While in some embodiments of the invention described above or below, it may be simplified to describe: the user establishes communication with the communication object or contact via the mobile terminal, etc.

In the resource providing method of some embodiments of the present invention including the embodiment under the heading "cross-interface graphic element providing method and apparatus", the plurality of communication information may have a plurality of different attributes, for example, a plurality of different media types, services belonging to different properties, communication networks from different service properties, etc., and the above-mentioned first communication object may be a first contact, as a communication object, stored in the mobile terminal by a user (not shown in the drawing), and the step 1201 of integrally providing may further include the steps of: the plurality of communication information is integrated and output to at least one interactive interface for the first contact. Wherein the number of at least one interactive interface is smaller than the number of "a plurality of different properties". The at least one interactive interface, if comprising a plurality of interactive interfaces, for example a plurality of interactive interfaces for the first contact, may appear continuously in the sequence of interactive interfaces of the communication device or may appear independently at different positions in the sequence of interactive interfaces of the communication device due to a plurality of unassociated operations of the user.

Alternatively, on the same level (hierarchy) of the interaction interface, only one interaction interface may be set for the same contact, for which case, the first contact interface is hereinafter referred to as a communication interaction with the first contact. Of course, a plurality of interaction interfaces may also be provided, for example, two communication interaction interfaces are configured in the mobile terminal of the user, in the first communication interaction interface, or may also be referred to as a first communication recording interface, a voice message between the two communication interaction interfaces and the first contact person is provided in an integrated manner, a recording of a video/voice call through a wireless local area network/mobile data network, a short message sent and received through a mobile phone network is provided in an integrated manner, a video message between the two communication interaction interfaces and the first contact person through a wireless data transmission network, GPS position information, a call record of dialing/answering through the mobile phone network/voice network is provided in an integrated manner in the second communication recording interface, and so on. Of course, the examples herein merely illustrate that communication interfaces including communication information via different communication networks may be presented for viewing by a user in response to a user switching operation between a first communication interface and a second communication interface. Likewise, the first communication interaction interface and the second communication interaction interface may also include communication information that is transmitted and received and processed by different communication application software through a plurality of communication networks, which are different or the same, and these similar embodiments are not described herein again.

Meanwhile, it should be noted that: in the step 1201, the mobile terminal of the user may establish communication with the first contact through only one communication network, or may establish communication with the first contact through a plurality of communication networks, but may generate a plurality of different attribute or different types of communication information. Referring to the above examples of receiving and transmitting short messages and making/receiving calls through a mobile phone network, in the resource providing method of some embodiments including the embodiments under the heading "cross-interface graphic element providing method and apparatus", a user may communicate with a first contact only through the mobile phone network to which the mobile terminal is connected, thereby obtaining two types of communication information, such as a call making/receiving record and a short message. This case also falls within the scope of the method of the present embodiment, and a description of this case of obtaining multiple communication information through a single network will not be given in the following embodiments.

The communication information, communication content or communication data displayed in the communication interactive interface is not limited to the content with various properties/types, and the different properties of the communication information also include different network sources, such as networks with different service properties, for example, a mobile communication network, a fixed communication network, a wireless data transmission network, a WLAN represented by WIFI, a mobile telephone network, a mobile data network, and the like. In other words, the plurality of communication information is generated (ocur) based on the plurality of communication networks or the corresponding communication interfaces, respectively. Furthermore, the electronic device may connect to a plurality of communication networks with different service properties, and the generated communication information is generated based on interfaces of the plurality of communication networks corresponding to the different service properties, respectively, where the interfaces are communication interfaces conforming to communication protocols of the plurality of communication networks, or simply referred to as a plurality of communication network interfaces. Taking as an example a wireless data transmission network interface based on the open system interconnection communication reference model (OSI, open System Interconnection Reference Model), the wireless data transmission network interface may be divided into a plurality of parts, for example, may include an interface belonging to a physical layer; an interface belonging to the data link layer, or a data link interface, can also be included; the system also can comprise interfaces belonging to a network layer, and particularly can comprise communication addresses, port numbers, hardware chips, corresponding drivers and other software and/or hardware resources; interfaces corresponding to traffic carried by the network, or simply traffic interfaces, may also be included. As an integral part of the wireless data transfer network interface, the communication interfaces, e.g., data link interfaces, in the various layers may be implemented at least in part in the electronic device or distributed across multiple network devices including switches, servers, while providing calling interfaces, e.g., system calling interfaces or network calling interfaces, to applications running in the electronic device. As another part of the overall wireless data transport network interface, some of the higher layer interfaces in OSI may be implemented in the operating system of the electronic device or in an application running therein. In the same way, in the electronic device of the embodiment, the voice interface and the short message interface for the mobile phone network may be managed by the operating system such as Android or the underlying software and then indirectly provided to the application program of the instant messaging class after being encapsulated, and the wireless data transmission interface may also be directly or indirectly provided to the application program of the same instant messaging class. The configuration and deployment manners of such multiple communication network interfaces are also applicable to the methods or apparatuses of the other embodiments described above or below, and may not be described herein.

Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the specific embodiments of these communication network interfaces are varied and that the specific embodiments do not limit the invention. For example, the sms interface and the voice interface managed by the os for the mobile phone network may be integrated with the data link interface of the wireless data transmission network supporting the instant messaging function through redevelopment of the os interface, and encapsulated into the same application. Further, it should be noted that the interface resources of the plurality of communication networks of the electronic device of the present embodiment are integrated and provided to the same instant messaging application in a direct or indirect manner, in other words, the instant messaging application in the electronic device of the present embodiment may call up interfaces of a plurality of different communication networks, such as a voice interface of a mobile phone network, a short message interface, and a wireless data transmission network interface, etc., so as to transmit and receive data through the plurality of different communication network interfaces, which is different from the case where the interfaces of the communication networks of the related art are utilized by a plurality of independent applications, respectively.

Based on this, optionally, in the resource providing method of some embodiments, the communication establishing step 1201 further includes establishing communication with the network address corresponding to the first contact through the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network to generate a plurality of communication information having different service properties. In some embodiments, including embodiments under the heading "cross-interface graphical element providing method and apparatus", the integration outputting step 1202 further includes an arrangement displaying step of displaying a plurality of communication information arrangements with different business properties for the first contact via the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network on the first contact interface.

Alternatively, in some embodiments including embodiments under the heading "cross-interface graphical element providing method and apparatus", the plurality of communications information described above corresponds to different traffic properties, and may be generated by corresponding network protocol interfaces among the interfaces of the plurality of communications networks described above, respectively. Correspondingly, the communication establishing step 1201 may further include that the user establishes communication with the first contact via a plurality of communication network interfaces to generate a plurality of communication information of different traffic properties. The foregoing arrangement display step may further include integrating and outputting, on the first contact interface, a plurality of communication information for different service properties of the first contact through the plurality of communication networks.

Optionally, in some embodiments including embodiments under the heading "cross-interface graphical element providing method and apparatus", the plurality of communication information of different traffic properties includes, for example, i) voice traffic information, ii) short message traffic information; iii) A data traffic message comprising at least one of the following: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data. Here, by integrating and displaying the plurality of communication information from one or more communication networks carrying different communication services, accessibility of the plurality of communication information corresponding to various service properties is enhanced, and interaction complexity of a user in accessing the information is reduced, for example, the user does not need to access different application programs such as a call management program, a short message management program and the like in a mobile phone respectively to obtain two different communication information respectively; similarly, two kinds of communication information with different service properties, such as a short message and a voice message, are respectively acquired without respectively accessing different application programs, such as a short message management program and an instant communication program, in the mobile phone.

The arrangement display step further comprises: at least two of the data service messages are displayed in the first message area according to the occurrence time sequence aiming at the voice service information and the short message service information of the first contact person.

Optionally, in the above first message area, only the voice service information and the short message service information for the first contact may be displayed, and the latest 1 or 2-3 records in at least two of the data service messages may be displayed, so, if the first message area is only used for displaying 1-3 communication records, the fonts of each communication record may be relatively large, and the visual presentation effect for the user is relatively good.

In some embodiments, the plurality of communication information may further include a plurality of different attributes, which may be derived from a plurality of communication function modules, or called a plurality of communication protocol interfaces, that is, the plurality of communication information is processed by or transmitted through a plurality of communication function modules, which are configured in the electronic device, and may respectively follow different communication protocols to be compatible with different communication networks. Correspondingly, the resource providing method in the embodiment according to the present invention may further include the step of providing the communication function module: a plurality of communication function modules are provided in the electronic device compatible with at least one communication network that can establish communication with a communication tool of the at least one communication network associated with the first contact. And, the communication establishing step 1201 may further include the sub-steps of: communication is established with the first contact via at least one communication network through a plurality of communication function modules to generate a plurality of communication information.

FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an electronic device and an interactive interface thereof according to another embodiment of the present invention; the first contact interface and the communication information available therein are further explained in connection with fig. 10. In this embodiment of the invention, the at least one interaction interface for a single first contact described above may comprise, in an interface hierarchy, a single layer of interaction interfaces for the first contact, i.e. a first contact interface for providing the user with a plurality of types of communication records as described above, or an interface layer of communication records with the first contact. Of course, it is not excluded that the first contact interface comprises, in addition to the interface layer of the communication record, other interaction interface layers, such as a first contact profile interface layer, located at a layer above the interface layer of the communication record.

The integration output step 1202 of the resource providing method of this embodiment may further include the steps of: integrating and outputting the communication information aiming at the first contact through the communication network on a first contact interface. For example, in the above embodiment, the different types of communication data that are distributed and integrated in the first communication interaction interface and the second communication interaction interface may be alternatively displayed only on the first contact interface in the resource providing method of the present embodiment, instead of being displayed on the first communication interaction interface and the second communication interaction interface respectively. In other words, in the resource providing method of the present embodiment, in response to the switching operation of the user, a plurality of different attribute or type of communication data of different groups may be switched on the first communication interactive interface to be provided to the user. Of course, in another alternative embodiment, instead of the user switching the communication information exhibiting the grouped different media types/service types in the first contact interface, the communication information or the communication data of the plurality of different attributes or types may be all integrally displayed in the first contact interface, as shown in the first contact interface in fig. 10.

The method is further guided by the contact person, the communication resource and the communication information are configured, and accessibility of the communication information to the user is improved. This reduces interaction complexity for some users who are relatively concerned about the communication information with the communication contacts and who desire to have access to such information in a simple operation. The resource providing method reconfigures the communication information at the interaction layer by taking the contact person as the center so as to integrate and output, thereby prejudging (anti) the demands which do not exist in the prior art and solving the corresponding technical problems.

In some embodiments of the present invention including embodiments under the heading "cross-interface graphical element providing method and apparatus", the at least one communication network described above comprises a wireless communication network, and the wireless communication network further comprises two networks: mobile telephone network, wireless data transmission network. Correspondingly, the plurality of communication function modules include a mobile phone network communication function module, a wireless data transmission network communication function module, and the step 1201 of communicating through at least one communication network further includes: the communication function module is connected to the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network respectively through the mobile telephone network communication function module and the wireless data transmission network communication function module, and communication is established between the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network through communication tools associated with the first contact person through the two networks so as to generate a plurality of communication information; and, the integrating outputting step 1202 further includes: displaying a plurality of communication information arrangements for the first contact through the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network on a first contact interface; the arrangement order can be longitudinal or transverse, such as a mobile phone operated on a transverse screen, etc.

Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of an interactive interface in a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention, and the resource providing method in this embodiment is further described below with reference to fig. 11. In this embodiment of the present invention and the resource providing method of the embodiment under the heading "cross-interface graphic element providing method and apparatus", the first contact interface includes a first message area 1502, and the mobile phone network communication function module includes a voice interface and a short message interface configured in the mobile terminal 1500, and the plurality of communication information respectively used for transmission/processing includes, but is not limited to: i) Voice call recording, ii) short message text; the plurality of communication information correspondingly processed or transmitted by the wireless data transmission network communication function module comprises one or more of the following: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data. And, the arrangement display step further includes: at least two of the three types of i) voice call service information, ii) short message text, iii) data service information for the first contact are integrated and displayed in the first message area 1502 according to the occurrence time sequence, as shown in fig. 11. Here, by integrating and displaying the plurality of communication information from one or more communication networks carrying different communication services, accessibility of the plurality of communication information corresponding to various service properties is enhanced, and interaction complexity of a user in accessing the information is reduced, for example, the user does not need to access different application programs such as a call management program, a short message management program and the like in a mobile phone respectively to obtain two different communication information respectively; similarly, two kinds of communication information with different service properties, such as a short message and a voice message, are respectively acquired without respectively accessing different application programs, such as a short message management program and an instant communication program, in the mobile phone.

In the method of the above embodiment, the method may further include the step of: in response to a selection operation by the user, the above-mentioned various audio/video type messages presented in the first message area 1502 are output to the user through a display or a speaker in a visual or audible (audio) manner, and optionally, when the network to which the mobile terminal is connected is a mobile data network, in this case, the above-mentioned various audio/video type messages may be downloaded through the mobile data network when the user selects to play. Of course, additional text information such as short messages may be automatically downloaded by the mobile terminal over the network and presented in the first message area 1502 of the display.

Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram of switching an interactive interface for displaying the latest message or messages in a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention, as shown in the drawing, in this embodiment, the time-sequence arrangement display step further includes: in a message queue of at least two of i) a voice call record, ii) a short message text, iii) a data service message for a first contact, only the latest record or records, or information such as a timestamp of a message to be displayed in association, are selected for display in a first message area 1602-a, 1602-B, wherein the data service message includes one or more of the following: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data. The optional content of the data service message herein is not described in detail. Because less information is displayed, the display space in the first contact interfaces 1603-A, 1603-B can be fully utilized, facilitating easy visualization of the information by the user.

Optionally, in the resource providing method of all embodiments of the present invention including the embodiment under the heading "cross-interface graphic element providing method and apparatus", the first contact interface belongs to a single program, which means that a plurality of communication information are integrally displayed in the same application or associated programs, without including the following cases: the first application program displays the first communication information or the interactive content on the display of the electronic device, and the second application program independent of the first application program temporarily pops up the second communication information or the interactive content such as the notification on the screen, so that the display area of the whole display is shared with the first application program. In this connection, the embodiments described hereinabove and hereinafter are applicable and will not be described in detail hereinafter. In addition, a conventional operating system such as android may be customized to integrate a portion of programs with related communication application interfaces into the operating system of the electronic device to collectively form a system-level single program, and program components related to the communication application interfaces may be used as an operating system User Interface (UI), where multiple interfaces such as contact communication interfaces in the single program may be presented to a user at a first time after startup is completed. Correspondingly, before the step of establishing communication over the communication network, it may further comprise: a single program to which the first contact interface belongs is run during a startup phase of the electronic device to load the interface for the first contact at a top level of a software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device. In some Android operating systems, the communication application may be set to be a startup (Launcher) level application under the ROOT authority of the operating system, so that, along with the startup of the operating system, the processor unit 12 may display a single program load to which the first contact interface belongs on the display, while the conventional desktop, any other application cannot be accessed by the user through the display. In this manner of initiation, the communication application may be specifically executed by the processor 12 to occupy display resources on the display, i.e., the display, in an exclusive manner, such that the first contact interface, as well as other interfaces configured in the single program described above, such as the second contact interface, the first application interface, etc., may be presented "on the display" as a screen, and such interfaces configured in the single program may be switched with one another at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device. By means of the exclusive resource integration providing mode, communication contacts are used as centers or are used as guidance, communication resources such as a plurality of communication information or a user interface aiming at a communication network are integrated and configured in a priority mode at an upper layer of an interaction level, and accessibility of contact related information and a man-machine interface for communication is greatly facilitated.

The resource providing method according to the above embodiment of the present invention may further include the steps of: a user interface element is provided on the first contact interface, the user interface element(s) being associated with the communication network to form a communicable coupling relationship to establish or terminate a corresponding communication, such that a user may initiate/accept a communication request through the corresponding communication network by manipulating the user interface element(s) on the first contact interface. On the one hand, the user interface elements are each associated with a plurality of communication networks, and on the other hand, the functional operation (functional operation) of the user interfaces is also triggered by a plurality of different operations from the user, respectively. Correspondingly, the step of establishing communication over the communication network further comprises: in response to a user operation of the user interface element, communication is established with the first contact over the communication network to generate a plurality of communication data.

It should be noted that: the user operation on the user interface element mentioned herein generally refers to a single action operation, where a single action has been explained above, where the user can establish the communication only on a single interface through a single action operation, and no independent operation is generally required for two or more times, or even switching of the interactive interface for two or more times. In addition, on the one hand, one or more user interface elements may be responsive to a plurality of operations by a user, and on the other hand, one or more user interface elements may be associated with one or more communication networks, respectively, by a processor, such that communication via this/these communication networks may be established for the communication device by the processor, e.g. a first user interface element may trigger the processor to establish communication with a wireless data transmission network of a contact for the mobile terminal in response to a first operation by the user, while a second user interface element may trigger the processor to establish communication with a mobile telephone network of the contact for the mobile terminal in response to a second operation by the user. The association between one or more user interface elements, one or more communication networks, and one or more user operations described herein may be applied to the methods, apparatuses, and devices of the previous and subsequent embodiments, and will not be described in detail in other embodiments.

Fig. 13 is a schematic view of an interactive interface of a providing button in a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention, and user interface elements in the resource providing method according to this embodiment include a first button 1706 and a second button 1707. The first button 1706 and the second button 1707 or still other buttons comprised by the user interface element may be responsive to different operations of the user, such as a single press of the first button 1706, a double press of the first button 1706, or a single long-time press of the second button 1707, etc., respectively, to establish communications over different 2 or 3 communication networks, such as a wireless data transmission network or a mobile telephone network, respectively, to transmit communication data or information of various different media types conforming to the communication protocols of these networks, online or offline, including online video, online voice, text information, audio information, video information, data information, etc., through the communications of these networks; the data information may also include GPS address location, files, data, etc., as well as calls, short messages, etc. from the mobile telephone network.

Correspondingly, the step of establishing a communication over the communication network further comprises: responsive to independent operation of the first button 1706 and the second button 1707, respectively, the enabled mobile terminal may be enabled to send audio messages and/or video/image messages and/or text messages over a wireless data transmission network and output audio messages and/or video/image messages and/or text messages received over the wireless data transmission network on the first contact interface 1703.

Optionally, the first button and the second button may be disposed in relatively close proximity (not shown in the figure), and the step of establishing communication over the communication network further comprises: in response to an associated operation such as a synchronous press of the first button and the second button, the mobile terminal may be enabled to initiate an audio-video call over the wireless data transmission network.

Optionally, the step of establishing communication over the communication network further comprises: in response to a plurality of user operations on the user interface element, respectively, a plurality of communications are conducted with the first contact over the communication network to generate a plurality of communication data. In other words, the user may enable the mobile terminal to perform various communications with the first contact through one or more mobile communication networks by applying different operations and gestures to a certain interface element to generate a plurality of communication data.

Optionally, user interface elements on the first contact interface, such as a first button, a second button, may switch the functionality of these buttons in response to a switching operation by the user. In some embodiments, when the mobile terminal is connected to a different communication network, the first button and the second button may automatically redefine their functions, or redefine the functions of the first button and the second button in response to a switching operation of the user. For example, when the mobile terminal is connected to the mobile phone network, the first button and the second button can make a voice call and send a short message to the first contact through the mobile phone network in response to a single press. And when the mobile terminal is connected to the WLAN in the room, the first button and the second button can respond to a single pressing to send voice leave words to the first contact person and listen to voice messages from the first contact person.

Fig. 15 is a schematic diagram of an interactive interface in a resource providing method according to another embodiment of the present invention. The user interface elements in the resource providing method according to this embodiment include a first key 1902, a second key 1903, a third key 1904, and a fourth key 1905. As another modification of the user interface element of this embodiment, the four keys may be associated with communication functions of the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively. For example, the first key 1902 and the second key 1903 may respectively send a short message to the first contact via the mobile phone network or listen to a short message from the first contact via the mobile phone network in response to a single press. While the third key 1904 may collect a user's voice message and send the voice message to the first contact in response to a long press operation, the fourth key 1905 may listen to the voice message from the first contact in response to a short single press operation. All the above-described records of the transmitted and received voice messages, the transmitted and received short messages, the incoming/outgoing calls, and the like are displayed in the first message area 1906. The mobile phone can provide the sending and receiving of a plurality of communication information such as short messages of short message service and audio messages of data service on the same interface, thereby further improving the accessibility of the communication information and interface elements and reducing the complexity of user interaction.

Of course, it should be understood that: the specific implementation of sending a short message or short message to the first contact via the mobile phone network in response to a single press is various, for example, a soft keyboard may be provided on the display of the mobile terminal in response to a single press by the user for the user to edit the short message, and in response to a sending operation by the user, the edited short message is sent out via the mobile phone network via the SMS short message interface in the mobile terminal. Alternatively, the audio signal of the user may be collected through the microphone in response to a single press of the user and converted into the short message content by using the software conversion module of "voice→text" in the mobile terminal, and then the converted short message content is sent out through the SMS short message interface in the mobile terminal via the mobile phone network in response to the sending operation of the user, where specific implementation forms are not enumerated any more.

In the above embodiment, when the key group on the contact person communication interface is associated with different communication networks, the form is always consistent, so that the interface elements presented to the user by different networks used by the electronic device to establish communication are consistent, the key group is equivalent to multiple networks in terms of use of the user, the user cannot perceive the diversity of the communication networks, a unified user interface is provided for the outside under the network condition of coexistence of multiple networks, and the user experience of using a single network is given to the user. Furthermore, in the process of establishing communication by using the SMS service, a conversion from "voice to text" or "text to voice" is used, allowing the user to obtain the SMS message in an audio manner and send the SMS message in an audio manner, whereby the interaction required by the electronic device for the SMS service to the outside is equivalent to the interaction required for listening to and sending the voice message in the data service. The method and the system make the user not aware of the change of the used communication network or communication service, improve the operability of cross-network communication of the electronic equipment and enable the multi-network resources to have consistent accessibility to the user.

Optionally, the user interface element may further include another third button (not shown in the figure); and establishing communication over the wireless communication network further comprises: in response to operation of the third button, an online audio group call or video group call is alternatively initiated via the mobile telephone network or the wireless data transmission network. In other words, when the user operates the third button, if the network environment of one of the mobile phone network, the mobile data network, or the wireless lan is not good enough, which may affect the call quality or even fail to call out, the resource providing method of the present embodiment may support the mobile terminal to automatically switch the network connection to the network with better network signals, so as to ensure the call quality.

Preferably, in all of the foregoing or following embodiments, these user interface elements, similar to the first, second and third buttons 1706, 1707 of the present embodiment, that correspond to a variety of communication means, such as sending voice messages to contacts, making phone calls, etc., may each be provided in a persistent manner on a directly viewable portion of a single-level interactive interface, such as the first contact interface 1703 shown in FIG. 13. On the one hand, these user interface elements are continuously and stably present in the same (idetical) partial area on the interface, which avoids the need for the user to reproduce the user interface elements on the interface by additional operations when the user interface elements are automatically hidden; on the other hand, through this configuration of the user interface elements, in the communication process of the user with the first contact through the electronic device 1700, the interface resources used by the user through the interactive interface, such as the first button 1706, the second button 1707 and the third button (not shown in the figure), are integrated in a single interactive interface or a directly visible part of the single user interface and collectively provided to the user, so that the user does not need to cross different levels of interactive interfaces or additional operations to access all the user interface elements, in other words, the configuration manner of the user interface elements does not need to click on some of the entry buttons to enter the interface of the next level or the sub-interface of the current level after the user accesses the first communication means/user interface element through the interface of the current level, so that the accessibility to the user of multiple communication resources in the same communication network or multiple communication resources in different communication networks can be accessed, or the efficiency of the user in the communication process of interacting with the first contact can be further improved.

The resource providing method according to other embodiments of the present invention further includes: in response to a user's switching operation, a second contact interface or application portal is displayed from the first contact interface, which supports the user to switch contacts or switch to other functional interfaces through a single action, reducing interaction complexity, as shown in fig. 4, while at the same time in the aforementioned heading'Button- Button layout and its form and functionThe embodiments relating to the various user interface elements, such as the buttons, referred to herein may be combined or reversed with the embodiments described herein and above. Of course, the switching operation may also include a set of simple interactive operations, that is, switching contacts through a plurality of actions or switching to other functional interfaces, for example, a first gesture is performed to go back from a first contact interface to a previous interaction level to display a first contact profile interface, then a second gesture is performed to display a second contact profile interface, and then a third gesture is performed to enter a next interaction level to display a second contact interface or an application program, which may refer to the interface interaction diagram shown in fig. 3. As for the functions of the user profile interface described above, the foregoing may not be repeated.

In addition, the application program portal may be a first functional interface corresponding to an application other than communication interaction, where the first contact interface, the second contact interface, and the first functional interface all belong to or are associated with a single program or multiple programs, and the first contact interface, the second contact interface, and the first functional interface are all located at a top level of interaction of the single program, so that the interaction interfaces may switch with each other at a first level of interaction of the application in response to a switching operation of a user. Also, in some embodiments described above or below, a single program or associated multiple programs may be run during a startup phase of the electronic device to load the first contact communication interface at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, such that the first contact interface, the second contact interface, and the first functional interface are at the top level of interaction of the entire software system, including the operating system, after system startup of the communication device. As previously described, the user may access the contact interface and other functional interfaces through a first level of operation of the interaction of the software system of the communication device. For the user, the contact interface involves interactive operations, and thus, the contact interface is also called a contact interactive interface, and may not be described in detail elsewhere. The first contact interface may comprise a single-level interactive interface, i.e. a communication record interface between the user and the contact. Of course, the first contact interface may also comprise two levels of interaction interfaces, such as a user profile interface and a communication record interface between the user and the contact, in which case, typically, after system start-up of the communication device, the user profile interface in the first contact interface will be loaded on top of interactions of the entire software system for direct access by the user after start-up of the communication device. In summary, this is a resource allocation that is directed to communication with contacts, or is centered on contact related information, which greatly increases the accessibility of resources to users, such as contact related information, and various available communication functions around contacts. This is quite different from prior art resource configurations that are oriented with the division of application, software functions/groups of functions (functions groups).

Notably, are: the first functional interface may belong to or be associated with a single program of the communication device, but the first functional interface or the content provided by the first functional interface, such as an application program, may be developed by a third party, for example, a plug-in developed by the third party, or an application program of a separate third party running outside the system of the communication device or outside an operation platform of the communication device. These plug-ins or shortcuts to third party applications are provided to the user at the communication device through the first functional interface. If the application of the third party is started, the interactive interface of the third party application is displayed at the communication device, but if the third party application exits, the first interactive level of the software system of the communication device, such as the first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first functional interface, is still displayed on the display of the communication device.

Alternatively, the profile interface may include an avatar image of the first contact and a display area for displaying a single piece or a few pieces of latest information including weather, stock market, health information, latest instant message, or reminder information (reminder), etc.

Some embodiments of the second resource providing method

In another embodiment of the present invention, a resource providing method for an electronic device is presented, optionally the method may be run at an electronic device having a processor unit, a memory, and a display, fig. 14 is a flow chart of a resource providing method according to yet another embodiment of the present invention, as shown in fig. 14, in step 1801 of the resource providing method, a plurality of communication resources, which may be respectively established with a first contact, are provided for the electronic device, the plurality of communication resources being operable to generate a plurality of communication information through at least one communication network, wherein the at least one communication network is associated with the plurality of communication resources, for example, in a communication coupling (communicatively coupled) manner. Here, the plurality of communication information has different service properties, for example, the plurality of communication information may be categorized into two or more service properties respectively, including a voice service and a short message service carried by a mobile phone network, a data service carried by a WLAN, and so on; in step 1802, user interfaces corresponding to the plurality of communication resources are integrated and configured on the interactive interface corresponding to the first contact. Step 1801 and step 1802 have no chronological precedence.

From the user's interactive operation perspective, the above step 1802 may be understood as "configuring the communication resource with the first contact as a direction", in other words, reconfiguring the user interface of the communication resource with the first communication object as a center (center), so that the user may establish that the user accesses the corresponding communication resource with the first contact through fewer interactive operations, which improves accessibility of multiple communication resources.

Optionally, the plurality of types of communication information include, but are not limited to: communication information for online connection, such as online video, online voice, etc.; or call information generated by communication through a mobile phone network, short Message Service (SMS), or text information, audio information, video information, picture information, and other types of data information generated by communication through a wireless data transmission network, which may further include address location information, files, data, etc.

Optionally, the first contact interface belongs to a single program or associated multiple programs configured in the electronic device, the multiple communication resources include multiple interfaces corresponding to at least one communication network, and the multiple communication resource providing step 1801 further includes: multiple interfaces corresponding to at least one communication network are provided integrally to a single program or to associated multiple programs.

Wherein, the at least one communication network and the at least one communication network respectively correspond to a plurality of interfaces, and each of the interfaces conforms to different communication protocols. Any one of a plurality of communication network interfaces may be operable to communicate over a communication network corresponding to the interface to generate at least one of a plurality of communication information of different traffic properties.

Optionally, the at least one communication network comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks having different traffic properties corresponding to the plurality of communication information, for example, a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network, and the electronic device is a mobile communication terminal. It should be noted that: a single communication network may correspond to multiple traffic properties, for example, here a mobile telephone network may correspond to two different traffic properties: short message service, voice telephony service, or simply voice service. Thus, it can be appreciated that: two different communication messages, i.e. a short message and voice telephony information such as an incoming/outgoing call record, can be generated by means of a single communication of the mobile telephone network. The correspondence between a single communication network and a plurality of communication information of a plurality of service properties or a plurality of communication information of different service properties, which are described herein by taking a mobile phone network as an example, may be applied to the method, apparatus and device of all embodiments of the present invention, including the related embodiments under the heading "cross-interface graphic element providing method and device", and therefore, other embodiments may not be described herein. In addition, the wireless data transmission network includes WLAN and mobile data network, and the plurality of communication resources include mobile phone network interface, which may further include a cellular module, a voice interface, a short message interface, a corresponding hardware chip, a driver thereof, and the like. The plurality of communication resources may also include a mobile data network interface, a communication interface of a WLAN, and the like.

Optionally, the first contact interface preferably comprises only a single interface, but may also comprise multiple interfaces. The single interface or multiple interfaces belong to a single program or an associated plurality of programs. In general, the associated programs mentioned heretofore or hereafter may be developed and distributed in packages by the same company or by multiple associated companies.

Optionally, the plurality of user interfaces in the resource providing method of the above embodiment includes a plurality of input interfaces, which are respectively responsive to a plurality of different operations of the user to enable communication through the plurality of communication networks. In the resource providing method of some embodiments, the plurality of user interfaces further includes a first message area, the plurality of communication networks having different traffic properties corresponding to the plurality of communication information; the resource providing method further comprises the steps of: in response to a plurality of operations applied to the plurality of input interfaces, communicating with the first contact over a plurality of wireless communication networks to generate a plurality of communication information of different traffic properties, respectively; and integrating and providing a plurality of communication information for different business properties of the first contact in the first message area. By the resource providing method of the embodiment, the user interface and the input interface of a plurality of communication networks with different service properties are integrated on the interactive interface, so that the accessibility of the plurality of communication networks and a plurality of communication information to the user is further improved.

Optionally, the communication network is a wireless communication network, and correspondingly the electronic device is a mobile terminal, and the communication resources are compatible with the wireless communication network so as to be communicably accessible to the wireless communication network. The plurality of input interfaces includes a first button and a second button.

The step of establishing communication over a plurality of wireless communication networks may include: the data traffic message is transmitted over the wireless data transmission network in response to the operation of the first button, and the data traffic message received over the wireless data transmission network is output in response to the operation of the second button. Or establishing communication over a plurality of wireless communication networks may further comprise: in response to an operation of the first button, a telephone call is initiated or an incoming call is received to or from the first contact via the mobile telephone network, and in response to an operation of the second button, a short message service is established with or a short message from the first contact is output via the mobile telephone network.

In the following embodiments, a resource providing method in the embodiments will be described taking a wireless communication network including a mobile phone network and a wireless data transmission network as an example.

Alternatively, the input interfaces are virtual interfaces implemented in software, which are associated with a plurality of communication networks, respectively, on the one hand, and correspond to a plurality of different operations from a user, on the other hand, in other words, the input interfaces may be responsive to a plurality of different operations applied by the user to establish communications through the mobile telephone network interface, the wireless data transmission network interface, respectively, to connect the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network, thereby generating a plurality of communication information of different service properties, respectively,

the operation of the plurality of communication resources may be controlled in response to a plurality of operations to enable communication of the plurality of communication resources over respective ones of the plurality of communication networks. Such an input interface is not limited to a particular implementation and may be, for example, one or more software buttons or the like. The variants of the input interface can be referred to by the heading'Key/button layout and its form and function"the description below, and the interface elements of the user interface in the embodiments of fig. 15 and 13, are not repeated here.

In the resource providing method of another embodiment, the plurality of user interfaces further includes a first message area, which is an interface for outputting or presenting the communication information externally, and may also be understood as: the single program or the associated plurality of programs described above may be executed by the processor unit to embody (email) part of the user interface on the display in the form of a first message area. Correspondingly, the resource providing method according to some embodiments of the present invention may further include: in response to a plurality of operations applied to the plurality of input interfaces, respectively communicating with the first contact via the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network through the mobile telephone network interface, the wireless data transmission network interface to respectively generate a plurality of communication information of different traffic properties, comprising: i) Voice service information, ii) short message service information; iii) A data traffic message comprising one or more of the following: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data; and, the integration providing step further includes: and displaying at least two of the voice service information and the short message service information which are generated by the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network and are aimed at the first contact person, and displaying the at least two of the data service information in a first message area according to the occurrence time sequence. By the above steps in the resource providing method of this embodiment, communication information with the first contact via a plurality of communication interfaces, such as i) and ii) or ii) and iii) or i) and iii) or all three, i.e. i), ii) and iii), respectively, transmitted via one or more communication networks of a mobile phone network, a mobile data network, a WLAN or the like, is further presented in the first message area in an integrated manner, centering on the first contact. Here, by integrating and displaying a plurality of communications from one or more communications networks carrying different communications services, the requirements on the interaction layer and the number of the user in the process of operating the mobile terminal to access related communications are reduced, for example, the user does not need to access different application programs such as a call management program and a short message management program in the mobile phone respectively to acquire two different communications; similarly, two kinds of communication information with different service properties, such as a short message and a voice message, are respectively acquired without respectively accessing different application programs, such as a short message management program and an instant communication program, in the mobile phone. Further improving accessibility of related communication resources/communication information in user interaction

Alternatively, in the above arrangement display step, only the latest record or records among the plurality of communication information of the mobile phone communication and the wireless data transmission communication may be displayed in the first message area.

Optionally, in the resource providing method according to some embodiments of the present invention, the first contact interface belongs to a single program or a plurality of associated programs, and the resource providing method may further include the steps of: the single program or an associated plurality of programs are run during a startup phase of the electronic device to load the first contact interface at a top level of a software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device. Preferably, the first contact Interface is loaded on the top layer of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device as part of a system level User Interface (UI), and is arranged in an exclusive manner with other interfaces in the multiple application interfaces configured in the single program and can be displayed through the display in a mutually switched manner. Related communication resources, communication information and the like are also automatically provided to the user through the first contact interface, so that accessibility of the communication resources and the communication information in user interaction is improved. Of course, the single program or the associated multiple programs described above may also be run as a conventional application in response to user selection. By adopting the exclusive setting mode, communication contacts are used as centers or are used as guidance, and communication resources such as a plurality of communication information or a user interface aiming at a communication network are integrated and configured in priority in the upper layer of the interaction level, so that accessibility of the contact related information and a man-machine interface for communication is facilitated.

Optionally, in response to a switching operation of the user, switching and displaying a second contact interface or a first function interface from the first contact interface; wherein the first contact interface, the second contact interface, and the first function interface all belong to or are associated with a single program, and are located at the top level of interaction of the single program.

The first functional interface may be a portal corresponding to an application other than the communication-interactive application. The first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first function interface are all of or associated with a single program or associated multiple programs, and the first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first function interface are all on top of interactions of the single program, whereby the interaction interfaces can be switched to each other at a first level of interactions of the application in response to a switching operation by a user. Meanwhile, in some embodiments described above or below, a conventional operating system such as android may be customized to integrate a part of programs related to a contact communication interface into the operating system of the electronic device to jointly form a single program at a system level, and program components related to a communication application interface are used as an operating system User Interface (UI), where multiple interfaces such as the contact communication interface in the single program may be presented to a user at a first time after the startup is completed. A single program or an associated plurality of programs may be run during the start-up phase of the electronic device such that the plurality of interfaces comprised by the application program will run exclusively on the display of the communication means, at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, preferably the first contact communication interface is loaded at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device and is juxtaposed to the other interfaces of the plurality of application interfaces configured in the application program at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device. In this way, the first contact interface, the second contact interface, and the first functional interface are located at the top level of interaction of the entire software system, including the operating system, after system start-up of the communication device. By means of the exclusive setting mode, communication contacts are used as centers or are used as guidance, communication resources such as a plurality of pieces of communication information or user interfaces aiming at communication networks are integrated and configured in priority in the upper layer of the interaction level, and accessibility of contact related information and communication man-machine interfaces is improved.

As before, the user may access the contact interaction interface and other functional interfaces through a first level of operation of the communication device's software system interactions. The first contact interface may comprise a single-level interactive interface, i.e. a communication record interface between the user and the contact. Of course, the first contact interface may also comprise two levels of interaction interfaces, such as a user profile interface and a communication record interface between the user and the contact, in which case, typically, after system start-up of the communication device, the user profile interface in the first contact interface will be loaded on top of interactions of the entire software system for direct access by the user after start-up of the communication device. In summary, this is a resource allocation that is directed to communication with contacts, or is centered on contact related information, which greatly increases the accessibility of resources to users, such as contact related information, and various available communication functions around contacts. This is quite different from prior art resource configurations that are oriented with the division of application, software functions/groups of functions (functions groups).

Notably, are: the first functional interface may belong to or be associated with a single program of the communication device, but the first functional interface or the content provided by the first functional interface, such as an application program, may be developed by a third party, for example, a plug-in developed by the third party, or an application program of a separate third party running outside the system of the communication device or outside an operation platform of the communication device. These plug-ins or shortcuts to third party applications are provided to the user at the communication device through the first functional interface. And if the third party application is launched, an interactive interface of the third party application may be presented at the communication device, but if the third party application exits, a first interaction level of the software system of the communication device, such as a first contact interface, a second contact interface, and a first function interface, will still be presented on the display of the communication device.

In the above embodiment, the communication resource enabling provision step may further include: providing a plurality of communication resources in a single program or in an associated plurality of programs, the plurality of communication resources having a plurality of different attributes, the plurality of communication resources being capable of establishing communication with a first contact; and integrating and configuring the user interfaces respectively corresponding to the communication resources in the first contact interface.

Alternatively, the profile interface in some embodiments of the invention may include an avatar of the first contact and a display area for rotating to display a single piece of information.

According to some embodiments of the invention, an electronic device includes a display, an optional processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs; one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, and the one or more programs include instructions for performing or causing the performance of any of the methods and operations of the steps therein in the embodiments described herein above or below.

Optionally, the electronic device of the above embodiment further comprises a touch sensitive surface and one or more sensors for detecting a contact strength with the touch sensitive surface.

According to some embodiments of the present invention, a computer-readable storage medium has instructions stored therein, which when executed by an electronic device having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform or cause to perform operations of any of the methods described herein above or below.

High operability electronic device

In addition, according to other embodiments of the present invention, further electronic devices are proposed, which include some different functions or structural units in addition to the same/similar units as the electronic devices of the above embodiments, and detailed descriptions will be focused on the differences from the electronic devices of the above embodiments, and the same/similar parts may not be repeated.

Fig. 9A is a schematic view of a portion of a module of one or more programs stored in a resource providing apparatus according to another embodiment of the present invention, and fig. 9B is a schematic view of an electronic device according to another embodiment of the present invention, where the electronic device includes two different interface states, and the first contact interface may include a profile interface 1310 of a first contact in addition to a first contact communication record interface 1310'. 13B shows a first contact profile interface 1310 and a first contact communication record interface 1310', respectively. After a user's selection/confirmation operation of the first contact, for example, the user clicks on an avatar image of the first contact on the first contact's profile interface 1310, the electronic device 1300 may switch an interface on the display that presents two different levels, i.e., from the first contact profile interface 1310 to the first contact communication record interface 1310', in response to the user's operation described above, during which the processor executes the program module 1301. The first contact communication record interface 1310' displays detailed communication records including messages, pictures, files, etc. from networks of different traffic properties, as shown, for example, voice messages, pictures, videos, etc. coming and going through a mobile data network or a WIFI network, and short messages coming and going through a mobile phone network, incoming/outgoing phone records, etc. This embodiment is explained below with reference to fig. 9A and 9B.

In some embodiments of the electronic device including the embodiment shown in fig. 9A and 9B and the embodiment under the heading "cross-interface graphic element providing method and device", in addition to the functions/structural elements (elements) or units in the electronic device of the above embodiments, the method may further include: the virtual at least one user interface element provided on the first contact interface, the physical connector interface, wherein the connector interface may be a pin hole interface of a pogo pin connector provided in the electronic device, and the connector interface is externally used for being detachably connected to a probe interface of the pogo pin connector for being coupled with at least one physical operation part on the base.

The at least one physical operation portion is disposed on a base 1320 and can be coupled to a processor unit (not shown) through a physical connector interface 1340, and the at least one user interface element is disposed on the first contact profile interface 1310 or the first contact communication record interface 1310', or on both, respectively. Preferably, the physical manipulation section 1330A may be configured on the base 1320, and the base 1320 is physically independent and may be used to house the mobile terminal 1350. And the processor unit in the electronic device is connected to a connector interface 1340, which connector interface 1340 is for detachably coupling the physical manipulation section 1330A. It should be noted that: for simplicity of description, in other embodiments of the invention, the connector interface is also simply referred to as a connector.

The at least one entity operation section 1330A and the at least one user interface element 1330B substantially correspond in number and are respectively associated with a plurality of communication networks, and may be independently operated by a user to establish communication through the plurality of communication networks. When the user operates at least one entity operation portion 1330A or at least one user interface element 1330B, in response to the user operation, the processor executes the program module 1201-1 to cause the electronic device to establish communications with a contact, or first contact, on the current interface through a plurality of communication networks, respectively, to generate a plurality of communication information. This corresponding configuration between the at least one entity operation section 1330A and the at least one user interface element 1330B is equally applicable to other embodiments of the present invention and may not be described here in detail.

Alternatively, in some embodiments including the embodiment shown in fig. 9A, 9B and the embodiment under the heading "cross-interface graphic element providing method and apparatus", the at least one entity operation section 1330A may include a first button and a 1330a_1 second button 1330a_2; on the first contact interface, at least one user interface element 1330B may include a first button 1330b_1 and a second button 1330b_2, respectively; and in response to a user operation of at least one entity operation portion 1330a_1, 1330a_2 or at least one user interface element 1330b_1, 1330b_2 corresponding to the first contact interface while the electronic device is currently displaying the first contact interface, the processor executes the program module 1202-1 to cause the electronic device in fig. 9B to display a plurality of communication information arrangements for the first contact, such as the first contact communication record interface 1310', through the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network on the first contact interface in response to the user operation. Likewise, upon user operation of at least one user interface element 1330b_1, 1330b_2 corresponding to the first contact interface, the processor may also execute program modules 1202-1 to cause the electronic device of fig. 9B to direct a first contact to display a plurality of communication information arrangements for the first contact over a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network on the first contact interface in response to the user operation. The entity manipulation parts 1330a_1, 1330a_2 and at least one user interface element 1330b_1, 1330b_2 have a certain correspondence in form and function. This applies to other embodiments of the invention and may not be described in detail elsewhere.

Specifically, the electronic device in fig. 9B transmits some data service messages on the first contact communication recording interface 1310 'as shown in fig. 9B through the wireless data transmission network in response to the operation of the first button 1330b_1 or 1330a_1, and outputs data service messages received through the wireless data transmission network through the message region 1312 on the first contact communication recording interface 1310' in response to the operation of the second button 1330a_2 or 1330b_2. Or, in response to an operation of the first button 1330b_1 or 1330a_1, a phone call is initiated or an incoming phone call is received to or from the first contact through the mobile phone network, and in response to an operation of the second button 1330a_2 or 1330b_2, a short message service is established with or a short message from the first contact received through the mobile phone network is output through the mobile phone network. And thereafter, in response to a user's switching operation, the processor executes program module 1201-1 to cause the electronic device to switch to present a second contact interface or application portal (not shown) from the first contact interface in response to the user's switching operation.

Alternatively, as shown: the first button 1330a_1 and the second button 1330a_2, or the first button 1330b_1 and the second button 1330b_2 are disposed adjacently. The program module 1201-1 is also executable by the processor to initiate an audio or video call over a plurality of wireless communication networks, such as a mobile telephone network, a mobile data network, or a WLAN, in response to an associated operation of the first button 1330a_1 and the second button 1330a_2.

Optionally, the program module 1201-1 is further executable by the processor to communicate with the first contact over a plurality of communication networks to generate a plurality of communication information, respectively, in response to a different plurality of operations by the user on one of the at least one physical operation portion or one of the at least one user interface element. It should be noted that, in the electronic device of this embodiment, the program module 1201-1 may be executed by the processor to perform different communications in response to different operations of the same physical operation portion by the user, and of course, the program module 1201-1 may also be executed by the processor to perform different communications in response to different operations of the same user interface element by the user. Optionally, the operation of the first button, the second button, or other user interface element or the physical operation portion includes, but is not limited to, any of the following: single click, double click, short single press, short double press, long press, toggle, touch slide/scroll, single contact, single continuous contact, simultaneous press of two or more buttons, sequential press. This modification of the physical manipulation section or user interface element, user input interface manipulation action is equally applicable to the method or electronic device of all embodiments hereinbefore and hereinafter. In addition, it should also be noted that: the same physical operator or user interface element, user input interface may be responsive to different operational actions to trigger the processor to perform different functions, while different physical operators or user interface elements, user input interface may be responsive to the same operational actions to trigger the processor to perform different functions, as is applicable to the methods or electronic devices of all embodiments heretofore and hereafter.

Optionally, the at least one entity operation section 1330A further includes an entity third button, and the at least one user interface element 1330A further includes a virtual third button (not shown in the figure); program module 1201-1 may also be executable by the processor to initiate an online audio group call or video group call over a mobile telephone network or a wireless data transmission network in response to an operation of a physical third button or a virtual third button, for example in an alternative (alternative) manner.

Preferably, in the embodiment herein and in all other similar embodiments, the at least one user interface element 1330A may include two or more graphical command input interfaces (or simply input interfaces, which are not described further herein), all provided on a single level of the first contact interface, such as the first contact communication record interface 1310' shown in fig. 9B. On the one hand, these input interfaces are continuously and stably provided on the interface, which avoids the need for the user to use the input interfaces to reproduce on the interface through additional operations when the input interfaces are automatically hidden; on the other hand, through this configuration of the user interface elements, in the communication process of the user with the first contact through the electronic device 1300, the interface resources used by the user through the interactive interface, such as the input interface, are integrated and collectively (collectively) provided in a persistent manner on the direct visual portion of the single interactive interface, so that the user does not need to cross different levels of interactive interfaces or additional operations to access all the input interfaces, in other words, the configuration mode of one or more user interface elements does not need to click certain entry buttons after the user accesses the first communication means/user interface element through the current level of interface to enter the next level of interface or the sub-interface of the current level of interface to access the second communication means/user interface element, which further improves the accessibility of multiple communication resources in the same communication network or multiple communication resources in different communication networks to the user, or the interaction efficiency of the user in the communication process with the first contact. For simplicity, in the methods or apparatuses according to other embodiments of the present invention, a description will not be given of an implementation in which a plurality of or all communication input interfaces are collectively provided at the same level of an interaction interface, where the plurality of or all communication input interfaces may be associated with the same communication network or may be associated with different communication networks. For simplicity, in the methods or apparatuses according to other embodiments of the present invention, a description will not be given of an implementation in which a plurality of or all communication input interfaces are collectively provided at the same level of an interaction interface, where the plurality of or all communication input interfaces may be associated with the same communication network or may be associated with different communication networks.

Optionally, in some embodiments described above, the at least one physical manipulation portion and the at least one user interface element have correspondence and/or consistency in at least one of number, layout, morphology, feel, orientation, color family, color, shape, pattern.

Optionally, the one or more programs are further configured to be executed by the processor unit to present the profile interface 1310 for the first contact; the first contact communication record interface 1310' may be presented on the display in response to a confirmation operation for the first contact profile interface 1310' or an interactive interface or other application portal interface for the second contact may be presented from the interface switch for the first contact in response to a user's switch operation. Of course, the switching from the first contact interface to the second contact interface or other application portal interface may be performed one or more times from the user, or may span one or more different levels of interfaces.

In the heading'High operability electronic deviceThe steps of some methods performed by the processor unit in the electronic device of the embodiments below may be referred to correspondingly " Some embodiments of the first resource providing method"OR"Second kind of resource Some embodiments of the method are provided"some of the steps illustrated in" are not described in detail herein.

Optionally, in some embodiments including embodiments under the heading "cross-interface graphical element providing method and apparatus", the first user interface element and the second user interface element functionally correspond to an application of the first interactive interface and an application of the second interactive interface, respectively. In other words, the first user interface element may be configured by one or more programs in the electronic device to be a first application program for providing the first interactive interface to correspond to the user interface of the first application program, and as the interactive interface switches to the second interactive interface, the first user interface element may be configured to be a second application program for providing the second interactive interface to correspond to the second application program user interface, so that the first user interface element remains substantially consistent in form during the presence across the interface, but functionally varies from one application program to another. Also, this cross-interface maintenance of form consistency and function correspondence with the current interface is applicable to the second user interface element, and may not be repeated here.

Fig. 18 is a schematic diagram illustrating an operation of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention. The operation procedure of switching the user from the first interactive interface of the communication interactive function to the second interactive interface of the album function will be described with reference to fig. 18. In this embodiment, the first interactive interface provides a communication application, a communication interactive program, and the second interactive interface provides an application of an album, correspondingly, the 3 buttons 2202 included in the first user interface element may be "send voice message" and "listen to voice message", "make/receive phone call", and the 3 buttons 2201 included in the second user interface element of the second interactive interface may be "take a picture/record video", "play a picture/video", and "pause play".

Optionally, in some embodiments including embodiments under the heading "cross-interface graphical element providing method and apparatus", the first user interface element and the second user interface element remain corresponding in form. In some of the above embodiments, the plurality of buttons included in the first user interface element and the plurality of buttons included in the second user interface element each have a certain overall similarity, such as consistency and/or correspondence for at least one of: number, layout, morphology, look, orientation, color system, color, shape, pattern. There may of course be some local differences to identify their different functionalities for different interaction interfaces, e.g. in the above embodiment, on 3 buttons provided on the second interaction interface for an album application, a play cue may be set on one of the buttons, e.g. a simple triangle: These buttons, when displayed across the interface, may have consistency, correspondence in the properties described above, e.g., two groups of users in FIG. 18The mouth elements 2201, 2202 are 3 in number and are arranged on the right side of the interactive interface in layout, wherein two buttons are arranged near the middle of the right side of the interactive interface, and the third button is arranged on the upper right side of the interactive interface. Based on the similarity of interface elements such as buttons, software keys and the like of the software across interfaces, unified operation senses, use habits and the like can be established for the interface operation of a user, so that the efficiency of the interactive operation of the user is improved.

Optionally, the virtual key groups such as the buttons on the album application interface and the calendar application interface and the entity key groups arranged on the electronic device maintain consistency in form, for example, the virtual key groups have consistency and/or correspondence with respect to at least one of the following: number, layout, morphology, look, orientation, color system, color, shape, pattern.

Optionally, in some embodiments including embodiments under the heading "cross-interface graphical element providing method and apparatus", the first interactive interface, the second interactive interface are each of or associated with a single program, and are located at a top level of interaction of the single program.

Optionally, in some embodiments including embodiments under the heading "cross-interface graphical element providing method and apparatus", the first interactive interface is a first contact interface and the second interactive interface is a second contact interface or a first functional interface. Conventional operating systems such as android may be customized to integrate a portion of the program of the contact communication interface into the operating system of the electronic device to form a system-level single program, and program components associated with the communication application interface may be used as operating system User Interfaces (UIs), where multiple interfaces such as the contact communication interface may be presented to the user at a first time after startup is complete. In this way, a single program or an associated plurality of programs may be automatically run during the start-up phase of the electronic device, such that the plurality of interfaces included in the application program will be loaded exclusively on the electronic device display, at the top of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, preferably the first contact communication interface is loaded at the top of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, and collocated with other interfaces in the plurality of application interfaces configured in the application program at the top of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, switchably accessible to the user via the display.

Graphic element providing method and apparatus including the above-mentioned heading "Cross-interface", "One of the first resource providing methods Examples of embodiments"He"Some embodiments of the second resource providing methodThe first functional interface mentioned in the method or apparatus of all embodiments including the related embodiments may be one, for example, corresponding to a portal of another application program other than the communication interactive application. The first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first function interface are all of or associated with a single program or associated multiple programs, and the first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first function interface are all on top of interactions of the single program, whereby the interaction interfaces can be switched to each other at a first level of interactions of the application in response to a switching operation by a user. Meanwhile, in some embodiments described above or below, a conventional operating system such as android may be customized to integrate a program related to a contact interface into the operating system of an electronic device to together form a single program at a system level, and a program component related to a communication application interface is used as an operating system User Interface (UI), where multiple interfaces such as a contact communication interface in the single program may be presented to a user at a first time after the startup is completed. Thus, the single program or the associated plurality of programs is arranged as a launch (Launcher) level application and the first contact interface, the second contact interface and the first functional interface are located at the top level of interaction of the whole software system including the operating system after system start-up of the communication device. As before, the user may access the contact interface and other functional interfaces through a first level of operation of the interaction of the software system of the communication device. The first contact interface may comprise a single-level interactive interface, i.e., a communication record interface between the user and the contact, for presenting more detailed historical communication content with the contact. Of course, the first contact interface may also include two levels In the latter case, typically after system start-up of the communication device, the user profile interface in the first contact interface will be loaded on top of interactions of the entire software system for direct access by the user after start-up of the communication device. In summary, this is a resource allocation that is directed to communication with contacts, or is centered on contact related information, which greatly increases the accessibility of resources to users, such as contact related information, and various available communication functions around contacts. This is quite different from prior art resource configurations that are oriented with the division of application, software functions/groups of functions (functions groups).

After the electronic device is started, some contact-related communication resources and other applications can be easily accessed without any user operation for multiple interaction levels of the applications, e.g. the portals of these applications can be intuitively acquired at the first layer of the interaction level of the software system of the electronic device. For electronic devices for communication, users may also want to provide more consistency or correspondence between their user interface for communication functions and interfaces for applications providing other functions such as photographing or photo album, to enhance the operability across interfaces, and even provide user interfaces that are consistent across software and hardware, during use of the electronic device. This enables integration of a plurality of different application resources, including communication interaction applications, to be provided integrally at a first interaction level of the electronic device.

Optionally, the method and apparatus are provided in a graphical element comprising the heading "cross-interface", "First resource providing method Some embodiments of (a)"He"Some embodiments of the second resource providing methodIn some embodiments, including the embodiments below, "the second interactive interface comprises an album application, and the user interface elements comprise user interface elements for taking a picture, taking an image, playing, and pausing.

Graphic element providing method and apparatus including the heading "Cross-interface", "Some implementations of the first resource provisioning method Examples"He"Some embodiments of the second resource providing methodThe electronic device of some embodiments, including the embodiments below, further includes a first interface of a connector, and in other embodiments or also simply referred to as a connector, a processor in the electronic device is coupled to the first interface of the connector, and the first interface of the connector is used to detachably couple the entity operation portion. Specifically, the interface of the second end of the connector is configured on a base, and the physical operation part is configured on the base and is coupled with the interface of the second end of the connector. Thus, the corresponding two connector interfaces of the base and the electronic device, respectively, may preferably constitute a spring probe connector, which is preferably a pogo pin connector. The connector and its corresponding configuration on the physical operating section and the electronic device are also applicable in methods and apparatuses according to other embodiments of the present invention and may not be described in detail hereinafter. In addition, a further description of the above-described communications device with a base, or an electronic apparatus comprising a base and a communications device that may be joined by a connector, may be found in the heading " Split type electric with baseSub-device"lower embodiment.

Optionally, the entity operation part or the user interface element of the electronic device of this embodiment may be functionally configured as a user interface of the application program provided in the first interactive interface and the second interactive interface through one or more programs. In other words, the physical operator or user interface element may enable the user to interact with the application programs provided by each of the first and second interactive interfaces by operating the physical operator or user interface element, respectively, through the configuration of the functionality of the two by one or more programs. It should be noted that the physical operation section or the user interface element mentioned in the present embodiment is basically equivalent in terms of operability of the mobile terminal, that is, the interactive operation with the mobile terminal by the user through the virtual user interface element can be basically realized by means of the physical operation section. The entity operation part and the virtual user interface keep basic consistency in function and form, so that the operability of mobile terminals such as mobile phones and electronic equipment is improved. The correspondence in form and function between the physical operation parts or virtual user interface elements shown in the present embodiment is also applicable to the method and apparatus according to other embodiments of the present invention, and may not be described herein.

Method and apparatus for providing graphic element including title "cross interface", "Some of the first resource providing methods Examples"He"Some embodiments of the second resource providing methodIn the electronic device of the embodiments below, at least one communication network includes a wireless lan and a mobile communication network, and the mobile phone or the mobile terminal can be separated from the base to operate independently as an electronic device having a communication function by connecting or disconnecting the pogo pin connector. One or more programs stored in the mobile terminal may be executable by the processor unit to: the mobile terminal is switched between the wireless local area network and the mobile communication network according to at least one of i) a network switching operation from a user, ii) a communication network condition around the mobile terminal, iii) connection or disconnection of the connector.

Fig. 19 is a schematic structural view of a terminal communication device according to another embodiment of the present invention. The following describes in detail the relevant operation of the communication device of the embodiment in which network connection switching and the like occur during connector connection/disconnection, with reference to fig. 19. The terminal communication device of this embodiment further includes a connector interface 2340, wherein the connector interface 2340 is connected to the processor unit in a pair, and the connector interface 2340 is externally used to detachably couple the entity operation part, for example, through a connector second interface 2340' provided on the base 2320. The base 2320 is physically independent of the handset 2310. The operation part is embodied as a physical keyboard 2330, the physical keyboard 2330 is disposed on the housing of the base 2320, and both ends of the connector interface 2340 are correspondingly disposed on the housing of the mobile phone 2310 and the base 2320, so that the physical keyboard 2330 can be connected to a processor disposed inside the communication device through the connector interface 2340.

Alternatively, for the embodiment shown in fig. 19 that includes the connector interface 2340 and the communication device of the base 2320, and for the communication device of all other embodiments, one or more programs may be executed by the processor to: switching the data link of the communication device between the wireless local area network and the mobile data network according to one or more of the following three: i) Active handoff operation of the communication network from the user, ii) ambient (existence) communication network conditions, especially WLAN signal strength, iii) connection or disconnection of the connector interface 2340.

In particular, in one aspect, in some exemplary application scenarios, a WLAN wireless data transmission network signal is generally available to a mobile phone of a user in a residence such as a user's room, while a mobile communication network is also available for access, and in this scenario, one or more programs in the mobile phone 2310 may be executed by the processor to enable the mobile phone 2310 to access the WLAN in the room, and as the geographic location of the user changes, for example, the user shifts from indoor to outdoor, the change in the geographic location may cause a communication network condition around the mobile phone 2310 carried by the user, such as a signal strength of the wireless communication network, to change. Generally, during the movement of the user, the WLAN signal will be weaker and the mobile communication network will be stronger, and when the WLAN communication network signal is below a predetermined threshold, one or more programs in the handset 2310 may be executed by the processor to cause the handset 2310 to access the mobile communication network. If the user returns to the indoor or resident surrounding area, one or more programs within the handset 2310 may be executed by the processor to re-access the handset 2310 to the WLAN based on a comparison of the signal strengths of the available multiple networks.

Meanwhile, it is noted that: the mobile phone 2310 may be used in combination with the base 2320 or may be used as a mobile terminal independently. When the user is indoors, the mobile phone 2310 may be disposed on the base 2320, and the mobile phone 2310 is operated by the physical keyboard 2330 disposed on the base, while when the user is outdoors, the user typically operates the mobile phone by virtual keys/buttons provided on the screen of the mobile phone 2310, and the virtual keys/buttons and the keyboard 2330 have a correspondence and/or consistency in at least one of number, layout, form, feel, azimuth, color system, color, shape and pattern, which is detailed in the embodiment of the communication device/electronic device under the heading "highly operable electronic device" herein.

In summary, one or more programs within the handset 2310 may be executed by the processor to make a comprehensive decision to access the handset 2310 to a WLAN or mobile communications network based on the connection or disconnection of the connector, or based on the connection or disconnection of the connector in combination with the communications conditions or communications environment of the network. Wherein, the communication conditions of the network include: signal strength, network connectivity/stability, etc., or network status, etc. For a description of switching connection between WLAN and mobile data network of an electronic device or mobile communication apparatus such as a mobile phone, and selectively configuring or reconfiguring a communication key set and a user interface element provided on the first contact communication interface, so that the electronic device enters a mobile phone mode or an internet mode, reference may also be made to a description under the heading "switching between internet mode and mobile phone mode", which will not be repeated herein.

Further, optionally, the media capturing element in the above-mentioned communication device may include at least one of a microphone and a camera, and the media playing element may include at least one of a speaker and a display.

When the mobile phone 2310 can be used in combination with the base 2320, that is, the connector interface 2340 is communicated with the connector opposite interface 2340' provided on the base, the user is generally located indoors, so that the WLAN signal is strong, and correspondingly, the mobile phone 2310 may also automatically access the WLAN. When the user removes the mobile phone 2310 from the base 2320, the connector interface 2340 is separated from the connector opposite interface 2340' provided on the base, and at this time, generally, the user may move to the outside and away from the WLAN, so the mobile phone 2310 may also automatically access the mobile communication network, especially establish a data link of the mobile phone through the mobile data network, or comprehensively judge that the mobile phone 2310 should be accessed to the mobile communication network or maintain the access state of the WLAN according to the disconnection state of the connector and the signal intensity of a plurality of communication networks available in the environment and whether the network switching operation of the user occurs. In other words, as a result of switching the communication device between different communication networks such as a wireless lan and a mobile data network, it is possible to still maintain the connection with the current communication network or switch from the current communication network to another available communication network, which maintains the quality and stability of the communication connection, and an overall optimal communication effect is obtained.

In one or more programs in the mobile phone 2310, when the communication device such as the mobile phone is combined with the base, a signal identifying connection with the base is sent to the operating system or the processor of the mobile phone through the data interface in the connector interface 2340, and after the one or more programs acquire the signal/event notification through the software system, the corresponding program module can switch the WLAN in the connection room, and switch the software mode to "internet mode" or "internet mode". On the contrary, when the communication equipment such as the mobile phone is disconnected from the base, a signal for identifying the disconnection from the base is sent to the operating system or the processor of the mobile phone through the data interface, after one or more programs acquire the signal/event notification through the software system, the corresponding program modules can be switched to be connected to the mobile communication network such as 3G, 4G, 5G and the like, and correspondingly, the software mode of the system is also switched to a "mobile phone mode", or called a "mobile phone mode" (mobile phone mode). The "mobile phone mode" and the "internet mode" described above are generally associated with home scenes and scenes of outdoor movement, and in particular, relate to different ways of calling and running software and hardware resources or ways of providing interactive resources provided by users and different types of interaction generated thereby. For example, in the "mobile phone mode" mode, communication resources such as voice phone service carried by a mobile phone network, short message service, or data service carried by a mobile data network are mainly used or used by default. And mainly uses the "internet mode" described above, or uses by default instant communication resources such as video phones, voice messages, etc. carried over WLAN, internet. In addition, in the "internet mode", resources such as a camera in the mobile phone can be automatically activated to turn on the monitoring function, while in the "mobile phone mode", resources and functions related to the camera are turned off and the speaker is enabled. In "mobile phone mode", the processor may be configured to automatically activate resources such as GPS in the handset to open an outdoor location/navigation service for the user; and in "internet mode" this function and related resources are turned off.

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned switching connection between WLAN or mobile communication network by the mobile phone 2310 automatically does not meet the needs of the user, the user may also switch the communication network associated with the user interface element or the communication operation interface provided on the mobile phone according to the actual usage scenario, for example, switch the communication capability provided by default by the user between the WLAN-based data service and the short message service and the voice service based on the mobile phone network. The handset 2310 will switch between WLAN-based data services and mobile phone network-based short message services and voice services through the user interface to the communication capability provided by default by the user, and the data link of the communication device may also switch between WLAN and mobile data network. In other words, one or more programs within the handset 2310 may be executable by the processor to switch the handset 2310 between the wireless local area network and the mobile data network in response to a switch operation from the user to a default communication service property provided by the terminal communication device through the communication interface, while in general the handset 2310 will maintain access to the mobile telephone network.

In some embodiments of the communication device described above or below, the media playing unit comprises a display, preferably a touch display; one or more programs are executable by the processor unit to: providing, via the display, a first array of user interfaces corresponding to the wireless data transmission network and a second array of user interfaces corresponding to the mobile telephone network in response to any one of: i) Network switching operations from the user, such as closing a connection with the WLAN, ii) changes in surrounding communication network conditions, such as signal strength of the WLAN, iii) connection or disconnection of a connector between the base and the handset. Wherein the second user interface array, the first user interface array each comprise one or more buttons or other interface elements presented on the display for a user to establish communication via a communication network such as WLAN, mobile data network, mobile telephone network or the like by operating the buttons.

Notably: all the connectors between the base and the mobile phone in the communication device according to the embodiments of the present invention described above and below may include a spring probe connector, for example, a pogpin connector, and the two ends of the connector are respectively a probe interface and a pinhole interface, which are not easy to be damaged even if the connector is repeatedly plugged. Preferably, the probe interface of the pogo pin connector is configured on the base, and the pinhole interface of the pogo pin connector is correspondingly configured on the mobile phone.

Optionally, when the electronic device performs connection handover between wireless local area networks or mobile communication networks, one or more programs stored in the electronic device may be executed by the processor unit to: the user interface element on the first interactive interface is functionally and formally reconfigured to be associated with the wireless local area network in response to the electronic device switching connection to the wireless local area network. Or one or more programs stored in the electronic device may be executable by the processor unit to: the user interface element on the first interactive interface is functionally and formally reconfigured to be associated with a mobile communication network, in particular a mobile telephone network, in response to the electronic device disconnecting from the WLAN or switching access to the mobile data network after disconnecting from the WLAN.

Fig. 20 is a schematic diagram of an interactive interface in a terminal communication device according to another embodiment of the present invention. The following exemplifies the terminal communication device of the embodiment shown in fig. 20, and the above-mentioned user interface elements or communication key groups, such as the second user interface array and the first user interface array shown in the drawings, may be reconfigured to have their functions and forms after the communication device performs a network connection handover.

As shown in fig. 20, the left side terminal communication device is in a "mobile phone mode" to access a mobile phone network and a mobile data network, and a first user interface array 2430A provided on a first contact interface on a display of the terminal communication device is preferably associated with the mobile phone network, and includes three interface elements, or three buttons, on the touch display, corresponding to "short message", "listen to short message", "talk on line", and communication via the mobile phone network with the current contact on the display, respectively. The terminal communication device on the right is in "internet mode" and accesses the mobile telephone network and the WLAN, and a second array of user interfaces 2430B provided on the first contact interface on the display of the terminal communication device, preferably associated with the WLAN, comprises three buttons corresponding to communications via the WLAN for "send voice message", "listen to voice message", "video call" respectively for the current contact on the display. Of course, when the user operates the second user interface array 2430B on the terminal communication device to the right of "internet mode" to establish the data traffic class communication described above, the data traffic class communication may also be established through the mobile data network, such as in the case where the WLAN is temporarily inaccessible.

One or more programs stored in the memory in the terminal communication device of this embodiment may be executed by the processor unit (not shown in the figure) to collect a first media signal, such as a voice message, a video message, through the microphone, the camera, etc., and transmit the first media signal, such as the voice message or the video message, etc., through the wireless data transmission network in response to a fifth operation, such as a single long-time press, a double-click touch, etc., of a middle button among three buttons of the second user interface array 2430B by the user. In general, the wireless data transmission network may include a WLAN and a mobile data network belonging to a mobile communication network. In addition, one or more programs may also be executable by the processor unit to output, through a speaker, display, etc., a second media signal received via the wireless data transmission network, through the media play unit in response to a sixth operation, e.g., a single press/touch, by the user on a lower button of the three buttons of the second user interface array 2430B. Alternatively, the second media signal, the first media signal are not limited to the above-mentioned voice message, but may be a video message, a text message, etc. belonging to a data service message. By integrating and displaying a plurality of communication information from one or a plurality of communication networks carrying different communication services in the same contact interaction interface, the network connection can be switched according to comprehensive judgment of various conditions, the behavior of a user and the network environment to be in can be predicted to a certain extent according to the on-off state of the connector, and correspondingly, the electronic equipment can synchronously provide corresponding user interfaces for networks with different service properties. The interaction layer and the number requirements in the process of the user operating the mobile terminal to access the related communication information are reduced, for example, the user does not need to access different application programs such as a call management program and a short message management program in a mobile phone respectively to acquire two different communication information respectively; similarly, two kinds of communication information with different service properties, such as a short message and a voice message, are respectively acquired without respectively accessing different application programs, such as a short message management program and an instant communication program, in the mobile phone. The accessibility of related communication resources/communication information in user interaction is further improved.

Preferably, the display may be a touch display, the mobile communication network comprises a mobile telephone network, and the one or more programs are further executable by the processor unit to: i) In response to a seventh operation of a user on a middle button included in the first user interface array 2430A, for example, a single press/touch or the like, collecting a short message edited by the user through a touch display or collecting a third media signal such as voice of the user through a media collection unit such as a microphone and transmitting the third media signal through a mobile phone network; ii) in response to an eighth operation by the user of the lower button in the first user interface array 2430A, such as a single press/touch, etc., outputting a fourth media signal, such as a short message, received via the mobile telephone network through a media playback unit, such as a display, speaker, etc., that is, one or more programs executable by the processor to convert text to speech of the short message through a "text-to-speech" function, output in the speaker. It should be understood that the third media signal and the fourth media signal are not limited to short message service messages, but may be voice service related information such as voice call records and voice calls.

It should be noted that: the voice service information, the short message service information and the data service related information transmitted by the wireless data transmission network can be displayed on the first contact interface on the display collectively or in a concentrated mode, or can be divided into a plurality of groups, and each group is independently displayed on the first contact interface in different time periods. In other words, one or more programs in the communication device may be executable by the processor unit to: alternatively, the one or more programs may be further executable by the processor unit to integrate and display the first media signal, the second media signal, the third media signal, and the fourth media signal on the display. The user can browse the voice service information, the short message service information, the voice message, the video message, the text message and the like belonging to the data service information on the same first contact interface. Such an integrated display promotes the accessibility (accessibility) of the information generated by the communication of the various business properties to the user.

In addition, it should be understood that: in a state in which the communication device is connected to the mobile communication network but not to the WLAN, such as the "mobile phone mode" of the embodiment shown in fig. 20 described below, the operation interface of the data service or the user interface element of the communication network supporting the data service may still be provided on the display of the communication device by one or more programs in the communication device for the user to conduct data service based communication with the current contact via these interfaces, and the communication of the data service may be established by the mobile data network in the mobile communication network, such as sending voice messages, receiving picture messages, video messages, etc. Conversely, when the electronic device is in the "internet mode" state of connecting to the WLAN, the electronic device may still provide an operation interface of the mobile voice service and the short message service or a user interface element supporting operation of the mobile communication network on the display of the communication device through one or more programs in the communication device, so as to allow the user to send a short message, answer a call, and so on. The same applies to the methods or devices, apparatuses in other embodiments described above or below. And will not be described in detail elsewhere.

In the schematic diagram of the interactive interface in the resource providing method in the embodiment shown in fig. 20, for two setting modes of the communication device, the plurality of communication information may be divided into two groups, and displayed on the first contact interface in time sequence, so that the plurality of communication information belonging to different service properties is integrated and output on the interface for the first contact in a manner of time division multiplexing of the first contact interface. For example, the communication device may allow the user to switch communication resources using the WLAN and the mobile phone network to which the communication device has access in response to a user's click operation of a mode switch button of "mobile phone mode"/"internet mode" on the upper right of the first contact interface. The above-mentioned "mobile phone mode"/"internet mode" or "outdoor mode"/"home mode", "mobile phone"/"landline" may also be named for convenience of understanding. Whereas communication traffic corresponding to WLAN is primarily data traffic, e.g., transmitting or receiving one or more of the following information: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data, and so forth. Communication services corresponding to mobile communication networks, especially mobile telephone networks, are mainly voice services, short message services. Communication information of data services such as voice messaging may be displayed on a first contact interface (not shown) in the internet mode, and communication information such as voice call, short message, etc. may be displayed on a first contact interface in the mobile phone mode, as shown in a first message area 2403 in the left diagram of fig. 20. Of course, it should be understood that: voice messages, video messages, text messages, etc. belonging to the data service message may also be displayed independently on the first contact interface in the internet mode, for example a first message area (not shown in the figure). Furthermore, the above-mentioned plurality of communication information is not limited to being displayed in the same space in an integrated manner at different times, for example, the first contact interface, and the plurality of communication information may be displayed on the first contact interface collectively at the same time, as shown in the first message area 2403 in the right-hand diagram of fig. 20, the communication records of the "voice call incoming record" and the "short message" are all from communication through the mobile phone network, and the "internet voice message", "geographic location information" and the "picture" are all from the wireless data transmission network such as the mobile data network or the WLAN. Here, by integrating and displaying the plurality of communication information from one or more communication networks carrying different communication services, accessibility of the plurality of communication information corresponding to various service properties is enhanced, and interaction complexity of a user in accessing the information is reduced, for example, the user does not need to access different application programs such as a call management program, a short message management program and the like in a mobile phone respectively to obtain two different communication information respectively; similarly, two kinds of communication information with different service properties, such as a short message and a voice message, are respectively acquired without respectively accessing different application programs, such as a short message management program and an instant communication program, in the mobile phone.

Of course, the user interface elements for the user to operate and use the communication capability of the mobile data network, the mobile phone network, the WLAN and other networks may be provided on the first contact interface collectively, or, for example, in a packet form, displayed on the first contact interface 29-0 in chronological order, may correspond to the communication network actually accessed by the electronic device or the communication apparatus, may be independent of the communication network available or actually accessed by the communication apparatus, and may be customized by the user to the user interface elements and the communication key groups on the first contact interface 29-0. Reference may also be made herein to various variations of the manner in which multiple communications of different service properties are displayed on the first contact interface in the embodiment illustrated in fig. 20, and various variations of the user interface elements and multiple communications of corresponding different service properties referred to herein are applicable to the interface, or to the methods or apparatuses, devices of the other embodiments described above or described below. And will not be described in detail elsewhere.

Integrated communication over multiple networks

In the process of including"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main interface configuration", "Whole Interface for interaction and single card display "In the method of some embodiments of the present invention, including title related embodiments, for a user to communicate with a first contact via a first contact interface, a resource providing method in an electronic device may include 3 steps: step 4201, step 4202, and step 4203 are illustrated in fig. 36, which is a flow diagram illustrating a resource provisioning method for an electronic device according to one embodiment of the present invention.

In step 4201, a communication interface for the first contact is presented on the display for presenting communication information between the user and the first contact, optionally also for presenting profile information of the first contact.

In step 4202, communications are established with the first contact over the at least one communication network to generate a plurality of communications information in response to user operation of the communication operation interface.

In step 4203, a plurality of communications occurring with the contact are output through the first contact communication interface.

Optionally include"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main interface configuration Setting up, integrating interactive interfaces, some embodiments of the first resource providing method, single card display " Title related embodimentsIn some embodiments of the method of the present invention, the at least one communication network includes a plurality of communication networks having different traffic properties, and the communication operation interface may include a virtual key group virtually provided on the first contact communication interface, the virtual key group being respectively associated with the plurality of communication networks. The communication operation interface may further include an entity key group physically provided to the electronic device, the entity key group being respectively associated with the plurality of communication networks. Both the virtual key set and the physical key set may be configured in the electronic device and communication with the current contact on the communication interface may be independently established in response to user operation of both, respectively.

Optionally include"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main interface configuration Put "," integrate interactive interface "," single card display "In some embodiments of the method of the present invention, including title related embodiments, the plurality of communication networks comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks including a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network. The virtual or physical key set or key set, respectively, associated with a mobile phone network and a wireless data transmission network, and the communication establishing step 4202 may further comprise: in response to a user operation of the key set, communication is established with the first contact through the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively, to generate a plurality of communication information.

Optionally include"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main interface configuration Put "," integrate interactive interface "," single card display "In some embodiments of the method of the present invention, including title related embodiments, the plurality of communications information comprises: at least two of voice service information, short message service information and data service information. The communication establishing step 4202 may further comprise two sub-steps for the case that the key sets are associated with communication networks of different traffic properties, respectively, in different time periods: 1) When the key group is associated with the mobile telephone network, responding to the operation of the key group by the user, the key group is connected with the first mobile telephone networkThe contact establishes communication to generate voice service information and/or short message service information; and 2) establishing communication with the first contact via the wireless data transmission network to generate a data traffic message in response to a user operation of the keypad when the keypad is associated with the wireless data transmission network. Wherein the wireless data transmission network comprises a wireless local area network or a mobile data network.

Fig. 25A to 25B are schematic diagrams of network instant messaging and mobile phone network communication modes according to an embodiment of the present invention. The face combining the group of graph pairs comprises "Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main Interface configuration, integrated interaction interface, single card display "Title related embodiments in the methods of some embodiments of the present invention, further description is made.

Fig. 25A shows a network communication interface 29-0 of a single contact, in which there is a scrolling function bar, or sliding function bar 29-3, comprising a plurality of contacts, and a plurality of operation options, such as a virtual key set 29-2, for a user to trigger to communicate with a current contact based on a mobile data network or WLAN to which the electronic device is currently connected, and a communication mode switching option 29-5 is also provided in the interface 29-0 shown in fig. 25A. One or more programs stored in the electronic device are executable by the processor unit to selectively configure the keypad 29-2 to be associated with communication networks of different traffic properties, such as a mobile telephone network or a wireless data transmission network, in response to user operation of the communication mode switching option 29-5. And one or more programs stored in the electronic device are executable by the processor unit to establish communication of the corresponding traffic properties over the communication network associated with the key set 29-2 in response to a user operation of the key set 29-2. Alternatively, the keypad may be selectively configured to be associated with a mobile telephone network or a wireless data transmission network depending on the connection status of the electronic device to the WLAN. In particular, the electronic device may configure virtual or physical key sets associated with the wireless data transmission network and the mobile telephone network, respectively, in response to connection and disconnection of the electronic device to the wireless local area network. Reference title' Internet mode and mobile phone modeIs switched between (a) and (b)The following description is not repeated here.

Specifically, when the user triggers the communication mode switching option 29-5 on the interface shown in fig. 25A, the electronic device enters the mobile phone communication interface of the single contact shown in fig. 25B, and the interface includes a plurality of contact options and a slidable navigation window area 29-3 of the application options, and still holds a plurality of operation options 29-2 for the user to operate and further perform communication interaction based on the mobile phone network with the current contact, for example, the user may use the top circular key of the key set 29-2 to dial a voice call through the mobile phone network, or the user may also operate the middle or lower two keys of the key set 29-2 to respectively perform "listen to a short message" and "send a short message", and related communication information generated by the user operating the communication key set 29-2 is all output in the message area 29-4, and the first contact communication interface 29-0 is further provided with the communication mode switching option 29-5 for the user to trigger switching back to the network communication interface shown in fig. 25A. Whereas in the network communication interface 29-0 of the first contact shown in fig. 25A, the virtual key set 29-2 is operated by the user to interact with the current contact by communication based on the mobile data network or WLAN to which the electronic device is currently connected, for example, the user may use the uppermost circular key of the key set 29-2 to dial a voice call through the mobile phone network in an alternative manner or, for example, in response to the user operating the uppermost circular key of the key set 29-2, the electronic device selectively dials a video/voice call through the WLAN to the first contact, and if the phone call fails, the electronic device directly switches the communication network to dial a voice call again through the mobile phone network to the first contact due to network failure or the other party is not on line. This way of establishing communication based on the two alternative communication networks may not be described in detail elsewhere. The user may also operate the middle or lower two keys of the key set 29-2 to "listen to the voice message" and "send the voice message" through the WLAN or the mobile data network, respectively, and the relevant communication information generated by the user operating the communication key set 29-2 is output in the message area 29-4. It should be noted that: here, with respect to the message area 29-4 on the first contact communication interface 29-0, only communication information such as a short message service and a voice telephone service generated through the mobile telephone network may be output in the message area 29-4 in 29B, or only communication information of a data service class generated through the mobile telephone network may be output in the message area 29-4 in 29A, which corresponds to a communication function in which the communication key group 29-2 is dynamically configured. Of course, in the electronic device, the above three types of communication information with different service properties may be presented in the message area 29-4 on the first contact communication interface 29-0, optionally, at the same time, the number of the virtual key groups 29-2 may be increased on the first contact communication interface 29-0, so that the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network are respectively associated with each other by means of the greater number of the virtual key groups 29-2, and further, the user is supported to more conveniently establish communication with the first contact on the first contact communication interface 29-0 through the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network, which may be referred to the embodiment shown in fig. 15 and will not be repeated herein.

In the above embodiment, when the virtual key group 29-2 on the contact communication interface is associated with different communication networks, the form is always consistent, so that the interface elements presented to the user by the different networks used by the electronic device to establish communication are consistent, the virtual key group is equivalent to the multiple networks in terms of use by the user, the user cannot perceive the diversity of the communication networks, a unified user interface is provided for the outside under the network condition of coexistence of multiple networks, and the user experience of using a single network is given to the user. Furthermore, in the process of establishing communication by using the SMS service, a conversion from "voice to text" or "text to voice" is used, allowing the user to obtain the SMS message in an audio manner and send the SMS message in an audio manner, whereby the interaction required by the electronic device for the SMS service to the outside is equivalent to the interaction required for listening to and sending the voice message in the data service. The method and the system make the user not aware of the change of the used communication network or communication service, improve the operability of cross-network communication of the electronic equipment and enable the multi-network resources to have consistent accessibility to the user.

The first contact communication interface 29-0 is further provided with a communication mode switching option 29-5 for triggering by the user to switch from the communication interface shown in fig. 25B to the communication interface shown in fig. 25A, and the communication interfaces shown in fig. 25B and 25A are both the first contact communication interface, or can be understood as two different states of the first contact communication interface, and the main difference between the two different states corresponding to the "mobile phone mode" and the "internet mode" of the electronic device is that the communication resources provided by the electronic device to the user are different, which can be seen in the title "Integrated communication over multiple networksThe relevant contents of "are not described in detail herein. For the "mobile phone mode" and the "internet mode", the overall background color of the first contact communication interface may be set differently, such as blue and green, respectively, so that the user can easily distinguish between the two possible states of the electronic device. In response to the user operating the communication mode switching option 29-5, the electronic device correspondingly switches and presents the interface shown in fig. 25A or the interface shown in fig. 25B, optionally, while the electronic device switches the interface shown in fig. 25A and 25B and redefines the communication functions of the interface elements thereon, the mobile data network in the WLAN or the mobile communication network may also switch the data link, thereby differentially carrying data traffic that may occur to the electronic device.

Optionally, the plurality of communication information in the resource providing method of some embodiments of the present invention respectively belong to two or more kinds of different service properties; the first application interface element and the communication interface element respectively comprise a virtual key group 29-2; the virtual key set 29-2 on the communication interface is associated with at least one communication network; the communication information outputting step further includes: in response to a user operation of the virtual key set 29-2 on the communication interface, establishing communication with the current contact or the current group of contacts over at least one communication network to generate a plurality of communication information; and integrally outputs a plurality of communication information through the message area 29-4.

Optionally, in the resource providing method of some embodiments of the present invention, the plurality of wireless communication networks includes a mobile phone network, a wireless data transmission network, the wireless data transmission network includes a wireless local area network and a mobile data network; the virtual key group 29-2 may be time-multiplexed so as to be associated with the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively, in different periods, and the communication information outputting step in the resource providing method of the embodiments of the present invention further includes: responding to the operation of the virtual key group 29-2 on the communication interface 29-0 by a user, and establishing communication with the current contact person or the current contact person group through a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network respectively to generate a plurality of communication information; multiple communications for the current contact or group of contacts are integrally output to the message area 29-4.

Optionally include"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main interface configuration Put "," integrate interactive interface "," single card display "The method of some embodiments of the present invention, including title related embodiments, further includes providing profile information 29-1, e.g., head portraits, identities, etc., for the current contact or group of current contacts on the communication interface 29-0, and the plurality of different business property communications in the above embodiments includes: communication over a mobile telephone network, comprising: voice service information and short message service information. The plurality of communication information of different traffic properties further comprises data traffic messages transmitted over a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, which data traffic messages may further comprise one or more of the following: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data, and the like.

The step of integrating output in the resource providing method according to some embodiments of the present invention further includes: and outputting the voice service information, the short message service information and the data service information or all three kinds of communication information in the same time period to the message area collectively according to the time sequence.

Optionally, include"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main Interface configuration, integrated interaction interface, single card display "Some implementations of the invention including title related embodimentsIn the method, after integrating the communication information of the user and the contact person, the related communication network, the communication operation options on the communication interface of the contact person and other resources, the user can correspond to the same contact person, that is, for the contact person, the unique ID (or instant messaging address) corresponding to the instant messaging tool and the mobile phone number of the contact person are stored in the mobile phone at the same time, and of course, the mobile phone number is also unique, in other words, different communication tools used for communicating with the contact person and the address of the communication tool on the corresponding communication network are integrated and stored in the same communication application in the electronic device. The communication application may also store profile information for the contact's avatar, name, identity, personal relationship, etc. This promotes accessibility of the communication information to the user, as well as operability of the electronic device.

Currently, the communication modes mainly used by users include traditional mobile phone network communication, namely mobile phone and short message, and instant messaging tools based on mobile data network or WIFI, such as WeChat, WATSAPP and the like, but for users, complicated switching is often required by using the two communication modes, because the functions are provided by different software layers. In practical situations, most of mobile internet instant messaging software is provided by third party software independently as a program in an operating system of electronic equipment or a communication device, while mobile phone and short message functions are directly integrated by a system (such as an IOS and an android) of a smart phone or an intelligent mobile internet device, so that a user needs to switch different communication application software, needs to store two sets of contact information, namely, two redundant address books are actually stored, and the mobile internet instant messaging software is easy to confuse and has complicated access.

After the method of the embodiment of the application is operated by the electronic equipment such as a mobile phone and the like, the instant messaging and mobile phone communication functions are integrated, only one set of address book system is needed to be established, and the electronic equipment does not need to be switched among software, and only needs to be used in the same software interface. Specifically, in the mobile phone operated by the method of the embodiment of the present application, two modes, namely, an internet mode and a mobile phone mode, are provided for a contact person, and the two modes can be switched by one key through a mode switching key 29-5 as shown in fig. 25, and resources of the mobile phone are configured for guiding in the internet mode to provide instant messaging functions, such as non-real-time voice information, pictures, videos, articles, sharing and positioning. In the mobile phone mode, the resources of the mobile phone are configured to provide mobile phone network functions, such as mobile phone playing and short message sending and receiving, etc., and the steps of the method or the electronic device and the related interfaces in some embodiments of the present application are illustrated and described by taking the internet mode as an example, but it should be understood that the resource providing method for the internet mode and the related communication interfaces, interaction interfaces, interface configuration methods and steps, etc. are also applicable to the mobile phone mode, and vice versa.

Notably: in the internet mode described above, the virtual key set 29-2 is communicatively associated with a wireless data transmission network, such as a WLAN or a mobile data network. For instant messaging that occurs between the user and the contacts and contact groups through the communication interface, communication resources of the data service are preferentially provided to the user through the contact interface. But for some users such as elderly people, the information received and sent by the user may alternatively have asymmetry in this internet mode. For example, the type of information sent by the user through the message area 29-4 and the complexity of the information sending operation are simplified, and as much support as possible is provided for the operation of receiving communication information by the user through the message area 29-4 and the related resources. Because these received communications may be from young people, the types of communications may be diverse.

Optionally, for such asymmetry between the transmitted information and the received information, the non-real-time message receivable by the user is more in types, and the receivable message includes voice, text information, independent expression, graphic and text comprehensive information, pictures, videos, and the like. In the aspect of communication information transmission, fewer non-real-time communication information types such as voice messages, independent expression packages and the like can be provided for users to select when editing communication information, so that simple and practical user experience is obtained for the old and other users. The independent expression generally refers to an independent expression chart, and is not an expression symbol mixed in the text information.

Regarding asymmetry, in another aspect, the types of real-time communications that a user may receive are more numerous, and may include voice telephony and video telephony. The types of real-time communication information which can be sent by the user are fewer, the communication information can only comprise video telephones, and the called contact can select whether to answer in a video or voice mode; wherein, real-time and non-real-time refer to whether the user reply information needs real-time response or delay response in the communication process

Integrating multiple communication network information for contacts in a single program

The communication means of the contact, such as IM software or a mobile phone, a corresponding mobile phone number in a mobile communication network, or a corresponding Identity (ID) in a wireless data transmission network, such as WLAN, or it may be understood that the instant messaging address/instant message address is stored or mapped in the same (identification) program, such as a communication application program for the contact, so that the communication application program can establish communication with the communication means used by the current contact through the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network respectively according to the mobile phone number and the unique identity corresponding to the contact in the instant messaging mode during the use of the user, thereby generating communication information. To some extent, the contact communication application integrates the primary functions of both mobile communication (e.g., based on a mobile phone network) and Instant Messaging (IM) software. And for users of electronic devices such as mobile phones, the communication application program to which the communication interface belongs perceives and experiences a single communication means or communication tool. In addition, the resources of the communication information aiming at different service properties in the communication process, including the communication interfaces corresponding to the communication networks with different service properties, are positioned at the lower layer of the software architecture, and the interaction interfaces for outputting a plurality of communication information are positioned at the upper layer of the software architecture, and are integrated into a single program. This is different from the following two cases: i) The communication interfaces with different service properties are configured in different application programs, and only the information with different service properties generated by the communication interfaces are concentrated and displayed on the same interaction interface in a forwarding mode among different programs; ii) unique identification code (ID) and mobile phone number for instant messaging are configured in a plurality of different application programs, and only a plurality of information with different service properties generated by the ID and mobile phone number of instant messaging are concentrated and displayed on the same interactive interface in a forwarding mode among different programs. The references mentioned herein are also applicable in the corresponding scenarios of all relevant embodiments described above or below.

Switching between internet mode and mobile phone mode

One of the differences between the mobile phone mode and the internet mode is that the set of communication keys on the user interface are associated with communication networks of different traffic properties. In the internet mode, the software key 29-2 on the first contact communication interface of the electronic device or communication means is associated with the WLAN or mobile data network, in particular in terms of communication functionality. Whereas in the mobile phone mode the software key 29-2 is associated with a mobile phone network, in particular a communication function (functionally associated with) mobile phone network, this also applies to the communication operation interface, the user interface element, the communication key set, etc. in other related embodiments, which may not be described in detail. Meanwhile, the distinction between the mobile phone mode and the internet mode may also include a resource configuration distinction for use and disabling of functional modules such as a camera of the electronic device. Reference may be made to other related embodiments, and further description may not be provided herein.

A) The user actively switches modes, that is, the electronic device switches the corresponding working modes of the mobile phone in response to the user operating the mode switch 29-5 of the "internet mode/mobile phone mode", that is, the association relationship between the configuration communication key group and the plurality of communication networks with different service properties and the enabling and disabling of related resources are changed, which are not described herein.

Furthermore, the mode switch 29-5 can also distinguish the current mode of the mobile phone from the mode switch 29-5, and besides the state of the mode switch 29-5, the user can distinguish the two different communication modes of the electronic device by using the differential visual effect of the three software buttons 29-2 when they are configured with different communication functions and the overall background color difference of the communication interface 29-0 as shown in fig. 25A and 25B.

B) The mode switching is performed based on the change in the form of the hardware. For example, when the handset portion is placed on the base, it automatically switches to the internet mode in response to the connection of the connector between the handset and the base, and when the handset portion is pulled out of the base, the electronic device may optionally automatically switch to the mobile phone mode, allowing the user to establish communications over the SMS service and voice service preferentially by operating a communication key set associated with the mobile phone network on the first contact communication interface. Details of the related embodiments are described below, and are not repeated. Regarding the embodiment of the base and the electronic device formed by combining the mobile phone with the base, reference is made to the following description of the heading "detachable electronic device with base".

C) And automatically switching according to the network connection state. When the electronic device is connected to WIFI, it may automatically switch to the internet mode, where the network traffic costs are at a minimum, and the instant messaging functionality based on the data network is suitable, thus preferably allowing the user to establish data service based communication by operating the keypad 29-2 on the first contact interface. If the electronic device is disconnected from the WIFI network or the electronic device is disconnected from the WIFI network and switches to access the mobile data network, the electronic device may automatically switch to a mobile phone mode, the communication key set being functionally configured preferentially to be associated with the mobile phone network. At this time, in general, the network traffic cost may be higher than the cost of transmitting the data service through the WLAN, and thus, it is preferable to switch to the mobile phone mode, thereby allowing the user to preferentially use the SMS service and the voice service by operating the communication key group on the first contact communication interface, one of the purposes being to reduce the communication tariffs. Details of the related embodiments are described below, and are not repeated.

In connection with the cases of a) and C), if no WLAN is available around the electronic device and the user tries to switch the electronic device to "internet mode" by operating the mode switch 29-5 on the first contact interface, one or more programs in the electronic device will be executed to communicatively associate the software key 29-2 with the mobile data network, allowing the user to establish SMS service and voice service based communication by operating the key set 29-2 on the first contact interface.

Combining the cases of a) and B), for example, if the connector between the indoor electronic device and the base is disconnected, that is, the mobile phone is pulled out of the base, the electronic device will normally disconnect the connection with the indoor WIFI network and switch to the mobile data network, so as to enter the mobile phone mode, so as to meet the outdoor communication requirement possibly happened by the user. However, if the user attempts to switch the electronic device to "internet mode" by operating the mode switch 29-5 on the first contact interface, the electronic device will determine if the current WLAN signal strength meets the connection threshold and selectively switch the electronic device to the WLAN or mobile data network, thereby allowing the user to establish data traffic based communication via the WLAN or mobile data network by operating the keypad 29-2 on the first contact interface. Of course, in this case, if the signal strength of the WLAN meets the communication requirement, the electronic device may preferably access the WLAN, possibly because the user is not away from the residence with the electronic device; and if the WLAN signal does not meet the communication requirement, accessing the mobile data network to enter an internet mode. If the network conditions of both the WLAN and the mobile data network do not meet the communication requirements at this time, the electronic device gives a corresponding prompt to the user through the display and temporarily maintains the association between the key set 29-2 and the mobile phone network in terms of communication function, thereby supporting that the user can temporarily establish communication based on SMS service and voice service by operating the key set 29-2.

In summary, in an electronic device or mobile communication apparatus, the keypad 29-2 may be selectively configured to be communicatively functionally associated with a mobile telephone network, WLAN, or mobile data network by comprehensively determining whether to configure the mobile communication apparatus in an internet mode or a mobile telephone mode based on i) ambient communication network conditions, particularly the signal strength of the WLAN, ii) the connection or disconnection of a connector between the mobile communication apparatus and the base, iii) a mode switching operation actively performed by a user via a contact interface, one, two, or all three of these three.

The user operation of the mode switch 29-5 may trigger one or more programs stored in the electronic device to be run to configure the traffic properties of the communication that the communication key set can establish when operated by the user, or alternatively to selectively configure the association of the communication key set of the first contact communication interface with several communication networks of different traffic properties. For example, when associated with a mobile telephone network, the software key set 29-2 supports audio retrieval of the content of an SMS communication, transmission of an SMS communication, etc., whereas when associated with a mobile data network or WLAN, the software key set 29-2 supports audio retrieval or transmission of a voice message, etc. belonging to a data service, etc., in other words, the user-switching mode switch 29-5 can selectively reconfigure the type of communication service that the user initiates by operating these software keys 29-2. For electronic devices such as cell phones, it is preferable to maintain access to one of the mobile telephone network and the "mobile data network and WLAN", which makes the communication capabilities of the "voice service and SMS service" and the "data service" available at any time to the user.

In particular, one or more programs in the mobile communication device may be executed by the processor unit to connect or disconnect the electronic equipment from the wireless local area network according to network conditions of the surrounding wireless local area network, and one or more programs may also be executed by the processor unit to connect or disconnect the electronic equipment from the wireless local area network in response to connection or disconnection of the connector, respectively. Further, one or more programs in the mobile communication device may be executable by the processor unit to, in response to the connection of the electronic device to the wireless local area network, independently associate the virtual key set and the physical key set with the wireless local area network, thereby entering an internet mode. One or more programs are also executable by the processor unit to, in response to the disconnection of the electronic device from the wireless local area network, independently associate the virtual key set and the physical key set with the mobile telephone network to enter a mobile telephone mode. For a description of the switching connection of the electronic device or the mobile communication apparatus between the WLAN and the mobile data network, and the selective configuration or reconfiguration of the communication key set provided on the first contact communication interface, respectively, so as to enable the electronic device to enter the mobile phone mode or the internet mode, reference may also be made to the description of the embodiment shown in fig. 19, which is not repeated herein.

Optionally include"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main interface configuration Put "," integrate interactive interface "," single card display "In some embodiments of the invention, including title related embodiments, the method includes enabling the camera in response to the electronic device accessing the wireless local area network or switching to the internet mode described above, and disabling the camera and enabling location services in the speaker and the electronic device in response to the electronic device accessing the mobile data network or switching to the mobile phone mode described above. Thereby dynamically utilizing various handset functions and communication resources in the corresponding network environment.

Optionally include"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main interface configuration Put "," integrate interactive interface "," single card display "In some embodiments of the present invention, including title related embodiments, the method between internet mode and mobile phone mode is applicable to all contact targets stored in the handset, in other words, when the electronic device is switched to mobile phone mode on the first contact communication interface, the mode switching is also applied to all other contacts logically, and after the current contact is switched to the second contact, the communication occurring on the second contact interface also defaults to mobile phone mode.

Included"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main interface configuration", "integration Interactive interface, single card display "In methods of some embodiments of the invention, including title related embodiments, communication operationsThe interface, e.g. a set of keys in the form of software virtually provided in the first contact communication interface, a set of keys in the form of hardware physically provided in the electronic device, may be functionally redefined in accordance with the communication network or the like to which the electronic device is currently connected, thereby being selectively associated with a plurality of communication networks currently available. In other words, the communication association between the key set and the plurality of different communication networks may be dynamically configured such that a user may conveniently initiate communication with the first contact based on any one of the currently available communication networks through the key set or interface element for communication. In addition, the physical operation unit and the virtual user interface element may be functionally redefined for the application of the first interactive interface and the application of the second interactive interface, respectively. In other words, the entity operation part may be functionally configured as user interfaces corresponding to similar or different application programs provided in the first interactive interface and the second interactive interface through one or more programs in the cellular phone. The virtual user interface element may also be functionally configured by one or more programs in the handset as user interfaces corresponding to similar or different application programs provided in the first and second interactive interfaces. Thus, the user can operate the software functions on different interactive interfaces by using the same entity operation part, or can operate the software functions on different interactive interfaces by using the same or similar virtual user interface elements on different interactive interfaces. The usability of the terminal devices or the electronic equipment such as the mobile phone is improved by following the use habit of the user. For example, when the interactive interface is switched, the user interface element is correspondingly provided on the switched user interface and the function associated with the user interface element is redefined according to the function of the switched user interface. For example, the first interactive interface provides a communication application program, a communication interactive program, and the second interactive interface provides an application program of an album, correspondingly, when the electronic device presents the first interactive interface, a plurality of entity buttons/keys arranged on the base, or a plurality of virtual buttons/keys provided on the first interactive interface, and the respectively associated functions may be "send words The audio messages "and" listen to voice messages ", or" make/receive phone calls ", and" edit/send short messages ", etc., and when the electronic device displays the second interactive interface, the functions respectively associated with the plurality of physical buttons/keys provided on the base, or the plurality of virtual buttons/keys provided on the second interactive interface may be" take a picture/record a video "," browse a picture/video ", etc.

The virtual user interface elements provided on the user interface described above may be maintained in form consistent with the physical operations provided on the base, and the processor may also be programmed to maintain form consistent across interfaces. In other words, the user interface elements are configured by one or more programs in the handset to maintain formal consistency across interfaces, and at the same time also formal consistency with the physical operator. For example, user interface elements distributed on the first and second interactive interfaces are configured by one or more programs in the handset to have consistency and/or correspondence with the entity operator for at least one of: number, layout, morphology, look, orientation, color system, color, shape, pattern. Taking consistency of the layout as an example, fig. 17 is a layout schematic diagram of an entity operation portion and virtual user interface elements of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention, where a virtual user interface element 2102 includes three virtual keys distributed on a first contact interface: "listen", "talk", "telephone". The physical operation unit 2101 includes three physical keys provided on the base 2103: "listen", "talk", "telephone". The key layout of the entity operation unit 2101 and the user interface element 2102 corresponds to, or is consistent with, each other. Wherein, the "listen", "talk" two keys of the user interface element 2102 are arranged adjacently, and are located in the middle of the right side of the first contact interface, and the "phone" key is located in the upper right side of the first contact interface, and correspondingly, the "listen", "talk" and "phone" three physical keys of the physical operation part 2101 on the base 2103 have the same/similar layout. The mobile phone terminal device is further compatible with the use habit of a user, and the operability of the mobile phone terminal device or the electronic equipment is improved.

Single card display

In the process of including"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main interface configuration" ", whole Integrated communication based on multiple networks "In the method of some embodiments of the present invention, including the under-heading embodiment, for a user to communicate with a first contact via a first contact interface, a resource provisioning method in an electronic device may include 3 steps: step 4101, step 4102, and step 4103 are shown in fig. 35, which illustrates a flow diagram of a resource provisioning method for an electronic device according to an embodiment of the invention.

In step 4101, a communication interface for the first contact is presented on the display, including a message area for accommodating communication information between the user and the first contact.

In step 4102, in response to user operation of the communication operations interface, communications are established with the first contact over the at least one communication network to generate a plurality of communications.

In step 4103, a plurality of communications occurring with the contact are output through a message area on the first contact communication interface.

Optionally include"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main interface configuration Setting 'integrating interaction interface' and 'integrating communication based on multiple networks'In some embodiments of the present invention, including under-heading embodiments, the plurality of communications with the contacts may be categorized in one, two or more different traffic properties, and correspondingly, the at least one communication network may include only one communication network or two or more communication networks, for example, one or more of a mobile telephone network, a mobile data network, and a WLAN. If the plurality of communications information relates to two or more traffic properties, step 4103 can further comprise: integrating and providing the plurality of communication information for a first contact in electronic equipment such as a mobile phoneIs provided for the communication interface.

It should be understood that: for brevity, in some embodiments of the present invention, a method and an electronic device related to a "single card display" header will be described with respect to two or more communication networks, but these embodiments also apply to a case where at least one communication network includes only one communication network.

Optionally include"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main interface configuration Setting 'integrating interaction interface' and 'integrating communication based on multiple networks'In some embodiments of the present invention, including under-heading embodiments, the communication information occurring between the user and the contact may be output in a message area on the first contact communication interface in a number of different ways, or some prompt in other applications may also be output through the message area, such as alarm timing information, calendar scheduled event expiration reminders, and the like.

Optionally, according to a simplified message output concept, including"switching generally applicable to various application interfaces Menu interface, interface and main interface configuration, integrated interactive interface, integrated communication based on multiple networks "In some embodiments of the present invention, including the embodiment under the heading, the outputting step 4103 may further include: in response to the occurrence of the latest one of the plurality of communication information, the latest one is individually output in the message area.

Optionally include"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main interface configuration Setting 'integrating interaction interface' and 'integrating communication based on multiple networks' In some embodiments of the present invention, including the embodiment under the heading, the outputting step 4103 may further include: the latest one of the plurality of communication information is continuously updated individually for output to the message area on the first contact communication interface.

The pairs to be described later in connection with fig. 25 and 26 include"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces"), Interface and main interface configuration and integration interactionInterface "" Multi-network based Integrated communication'The embodiments under the heading describe in detail the manner in which messages are output "one at a time" in some embodiments of the invention.

Fig. 25A to 25B are schematic diagrams of network instant messaging and mobile phone network communication modes according to an embodiment of the present invention. Taking fig. 25 as an example, optionally, the at least one communication network includes a plurality of wireless communication networks, and the plurality of wireless communication networks further includes a mobile phone network and a wireless data transmission network, where the wireless data transmission network includes a wireless local area network and a mobile data network; the first contact's communication interface 29-0 is further provided with a key set 29-2, which is respectively associated with the mobile phone network and the wireless data transmission network, and the key set can respond to clicking or other operations of the user, and establish communication through the above-mentioned communication network to generate a plurality of communication information with different service properties. The electronic device may establish communication with the first contact via the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively, in response to a user operation of the key set 29-2 to generate a plurality of communication information, including: communication information and data service information of the mobile telephone network; the communication information of the mobile telephone network includes: voice service information and short message service information.

Optionally, in the process of including"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "interface and Main interface configuration Setting 'integrating interaction interface' and 'integrating communication based on multiple networks'In some embodiments, including the under-heading embodiment, in the "integrate output step", further, at least two of the voice service information, the short message service message, and the data service message may be integrated and output to the message area 29-4.

In particular, for a further embodiment of the "integrated output" described above, reference may be made in part to the description of the method and associated contact interface in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15. In the embodiment shown in fig. 15, more keys are simultaneously provided in the group of keys 29-2 on the contact interface, such that each key is associated with a communication network of a different business nature, respectively.

In another further embodiment of the "integration output" described above, in the electronic device, the integration output of the message may be performed in a time-division multiplexing manner on the first contact interface, specifically, when the key group 29-2 is associated with the mobile phone network, in response to the user's click on the key group 29-2 or the like, communication is established through the mobile phone network and two kinds of information of voice service information and short message service message are generated, and the two kinds of information of voice service information and short message service message between the first contact and the first contact are integrated and output through the message area 29-4 on the first contact communication interface, or only one of them, for example, the short message service message is output. In addition, when the key group 29-2 is associated with the wireless lan or the mobile data network, in response to a user's click on the key group 29-2 or the like, communication is established through the wireless lan or the mobile data network and a data service message is generated, and the data service message is output through the message area 29-4 on the first contact communication interface. In the embodiment of the method for integrating and outputting the messages through the first contact interface, consistency is formed between the communication network associated with the key set 29-2 and the type of the communication information output through the message area 29-4, so that the user can conveniently operate and identify the information category.

It should be understood that the foregoing is merely an exemplary illustration, and in fact, may be substantially independent between the communication network with which the key set 29-2 is associated and the type of communication information output via the message area 29-4. For example, i) when the key set 29-2 is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, the user can transmit data service messages using the WLAN or the mobile data network by operating the key set 29-2, and ii) when the key set 29-2 is associated with a mobile phone network, the user can transmit voice service information and short message service messages using the mobile phone network by operating the key set 29-2. In both cases, the communication information output through the message area 29-4 may include three kinds of communication information at the same time: voice service related information, short message service related information, and data service related information. This may enable the user to obtain, for example, via the message area 29-4, communication information of a data service nature such as a voice message sent by the first contact via the mobile data network or the WLAN, and reply to the voice message sent by the first contact via the mobile telephone network by means of a short message service by operating the keypad 29-2 associated with the mobile telephone network on the first contact interface. Likewise, the set of keys 29-2 provided on the first contact interface may also be associated with both a mobile telephone network and a wireless data transmission network. The manner of association of the key set 29-2 with the corresponding communication network is varied, and for example, it is possible to define that the first key in the key set 29-2 transmits SMS-like communication information via the mobile phone network in response to a single click operation by the user and transmits communication information of data traffic via the mobile data network or the WLAN in response to a double click operation by the user. Of course, more keys may be provided in the key group 29-2, so that each key is associated with a communication network of a different service property, respectively. Specific examples may also refer to the description of the method and related contact interfaces in the embodiment shown in fig. 15, and are not described herein. In the embodiment shown in fig. 15, if the user of the electronic device needs to operate the communication key set and the user interface element to establish communication by using the communication networks with different service properties, it is not necessary to switch the association between the communication key set and the communication networks with different service properties by operating, for example, the communication mode switching option 29-5 in fig. 25, so that the user can directly access the communication networks with different service properties only by a single operation of the first contact communication interface, which further improves the accessibility of the communication resources and the communication information of the electronic device.

In the instant messaging software in the prior art, the design of the interactive interface is an instant messaging tool such as ICQ, messenger QQ and the like from the PC end, namely, the interface of the chat record is used as the element background of the whole communication interface, but for users who do not need to pay attention to the chat record too much, the layout mode of the interface elements on the communication interface occupies too much screen display space of the electronic equipment, and the information is too rich, so that the users lose attention to the current information or newer information instead.

Fig. 26A-26C are schematic diagrams of a first contact communication interface provided in a method of an embodiment of the present invention that is switchable between a "single card display mode" and a "communication record display mode". In the methods of the embodiments shown in fig. 26A to 26B of the present invention, some simplified interface configuration methods for instant messaging interaction are also provided. Fig. 26A and 26B are schematic diagrams of interfaces in which a single message is independently displayed in the method according to the embodiment of the present invention. The resource providing method and the interface configuration method according to the present invention will be described with reference to fig. 25, 26A and 26B. Optionally, the first contact communication interface is provided with the profile information 29-1 of the first contact, which is located above the message area 29-4, and the integrating output step in the method of the foregoing embodiment may further include: in response to the occurrence, reception, or transmission of a plurality of pieces of communication information of the Latest piece, the Latest piece (last One) is individually output in the message area. For example, electronic devices have heretofore generated a plurality of communications, including: a) 1 Short Message (SMS) with the first contact through the mobile telephone network, sent from the first contact to the electronic device 1 minute ago, b) 2 voice call records with the first contact through the mobile telephone network, outgoing before 25 minutes and first incoming before 30 minutes respectively, with duration of 35 seconds and 3 minutes respectively, and c) 3 voice messages from the mobile data network, all received 2 hours ago. The SMS messages in a) are the latest ones in time occurrence order. The electronic device outputs the SMS short message alone in the message area 29-4 without displaying any other communication information in b), c). At the present moment, the user of the electronic device sends a voice message of data service property to the first contact through the WLAN associated with the middle key in the middle key group 29-2, and then the electronic device updates and displays the latest voice message in the message area 29-4, as shown in fig. 26A, and of course, the latest communication information is updated and output through the message area, which may be performed during the process of sending or receiving the communication information, or may be performed after the sending or receiving of the communication information is completed, for example, after the sending of the above voice message is completed for 1-10 seconds, and then the latest communication information is updated and output through the message area 29-4. In another aspect, the electronic device may output the latest one of the three service properties of voice service information, short message service information, and data service information generated between the user and the first contact separately in the message area of the communication interface of the first contact, and continuously update and output the latest one of the communication information in the message area as more communication information is continuously generated, which will not be described in detail below. Of course, the latest one of at least two of the communication information of the three service properties may also be continuously updated separately to be output to the message area of the first contact communication interface. For example, only the latest one of the plurality of pieces of communication information whose service property belongs to the voice service or the short message service is output to a message area (not shown in the figure) of the interface. The above-mentioned communication information of the voice service includes communication information such as a time of calling in/out through the mobile phone network, a time of occurrence of the calling, etc., which is also applicable to all other embodiments, and may not be described in detail elsewhere. Alternatively, only the latest one of the plurality of pieces of communication information whose service properties belong to the short message service and the data service may be output to the message area of the first contact interface.

Alternatively, as described above, an association or correspondence may be formed between the communication network with which the key group 30-2 is associated and the type of communication information output through the message area 30-4. For example, when the key group 30-2 is associated with the mobile phone network, in response to occurrence of communication information of the latest one of the mobile phone networks, the communication information of the latest one of the mobile phone networks is individually output in the message area, in other words, only the latest one of the plurality of communication information of which the service property belongs to the voice service and the short message service is output in the message area (not shown in the figure) of the interface, that is, the latest one of the communication information is individually continuously updated and output in the message area, and each time the communication information of the two service properties occurs, for example, accepted/transmitted, the newly occurring communication information is substantially synchronously updated and output in the message area. Alternatively, only the latest one of the plurality of communication information of the voice service may be continuously updated and outputted to the message area (not shown), or of course, only the latest one of the plurality of communication information of the short message service may be continuously updated and outputted to the message area (not shown), and the details thereof will not be repeated.

Alternatively, when the key group 30-2 is associated with a wireless lan or a mobile data network, the latest one of the data service messages is individually output in the message area in response to the occurrence of the latest one of the data service messages, such as an individual piece of communication information shown in the message area 30-4 in fig. 26B, which is text information sent by the current contact through the data service. In other words, the electronic device displays only the latest one of the plurality of pieces of communication information whose service property belongs to the data service type individually in the message area 30-4. The latest data traffic type communication information is continuously updated and outputted in the message area 30-4, that is, the latest communication information is individually outputted in the message area 30-4 every time one data traffic type communication information occurs. Of course, the data service message includes one or more of the following: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographical locations, text messages, files, data, and video calls, voice calls, etc. established over a WLAN or mobile data network, may not be described in detail elsewhere.

The mode of displaying only one piece of (one at a time) latest communication information at a time or alternatively simply called a message can be simply called a single-card display mode, the interface element layout method in the single-card display mode can meet the requirement of instant messaging in most cases, one or more messages are serially and one by one output through a message area, and the one-to-one mode enables the electronic equipment to provide the order of message flows for users to be improved, so that the experience of the users for acquiring the messages is more visual. Of course, in addition to the "one-to-one" approach, the round (round) of the message may also include: after receiving the plurality of messages, the user feeds back one message, or may simply be "many-to-one. Whether for the "one-to-one" or "many-to-one" approach, in some embodiments, the manner of presentation of these incoming and outgoing messages in the message area may be preferably the "display only one at a time" (only one at a time) approach, such as displaying only the most recently occurring message.

When the communication application program to which the contact communication interface in fig. 26A or fig. 26B belongs accumulates a plurality of unread information for the current contact, the electronic device also supports the user to further view more chat records occurring with the current contact through the operation of the current contact communication interface.

In the method of some embodiments, if the user applies a common or specific interactive gesture operation such as clicking, double-clicking, etc. to the profile information 30-1 or the message area 30-4 in fig. 26B, the electronic device may expand the message area 30-4 on the communication interface in response to the user's predetermined operation, thereby adapting to accommodate more communication information, allowing for collective output of more communication information in the message area 30-4, as shown in fig. 26C. Meanwhile, optionally, the electronic device may configure the profile information 30-1 on the first contact communication interface in a abbreviated manner, so as to reduce the display area occupied on the interface, thereby facilitating the expansion of the message area. The profile information 30-1 may be configured above the message area 30-4. In response to the expansion of the message area, the electronic device can output the plurality of pieces of communication information collectively (collectively) in the message area 30-4 in fig. 26C in the course of integrally outputting the plurality of pieces of communication information, instead of displaying only the latest one of the plurality of pieces of communication information in the message area, and of course, the collective presentation of the plurality of pieces of communication information in the message area can be arranged in the chronological order in which the respective pieces of communication information occur.

Optionally, in the resource providing method of the embodiment of the present invention, with respect to the message area 30-4 in fig. 26C that collectively presents the history communication information, the user can also selectively browse the communication information of the desired date through the calendar option 30-9. In addition to correspondingly presenting historical communications in response to a user's drag scroll, a calendar floating interface (not shown) may be popped up for the user to select a date in response to the user through calendar options 30-9 on the communications interface, with communications corresponding to the date being located and loaded in message area 30-4 according to the particular date clicked by the user on the calendar floating interface. Therefore, the history communication information expected by the user can be positioned mainly through at most 1 or 2 operations of the user on the first contact communication interface of the single layer, and the requirement on interactive operation of the user is further reduced.

Alternatively, an association or correspondence is formed between the key group 30-2 in fig. 26C and its associated communication network and the type of communication information output through the message area 30-4. When the key group 30-2 in fig. 26C is associated with a mobile phone network, the communication information of the mobile phone network is collectively output to the message area 30-4 in fig. 26C in time sequence, instead of displaying only the latest one of the plurality of communication information belonging to the voice service or the short message service in the message area; when the key group 30-2 in fig. 26C is associated with a wireless lan or a mobile data network, data service messages are collectively output to the message area 30-4 in fig. 26C in time series, instead of displaying only the latest one of the plurality of pieces of communication information belonging to the data service in the message area.

The above manner of displaying the latest single one of the plurality of communications individually through the message area of the first contact communication interface may be referred to as a "single card display" mode, for simplicity, as above. And outputting two or more pieces of communication information collectively through the extended message area may be simply referred to as a communication record display mode. Of course, after the electronic apparatus enters the communication record display mode from the single-card display mode in response to the switching operation by the user, it may also be necessary to return to the single-card display mode as shown in fig. 26B from the communication record display mode in fig. 26C in response to the switching operation by the user again. In particular, in response to a user operation of the profile information or message area of the first contact communication interface of fig. 26C, the electronic device may narrow down the message area and expand the profile information to be presented, as shown in fig. 26B. Correspondingly, the electronic device may also switch to the single-card display mode shown in fig. 26B by the following steps, so as to integrally output a plurality of communication information through the message area of the first contact communication interface, for example, a latest piece of the plurality of communication information is individually output in the message area in fig. 26B, in other words, each time one communication information is generated, the latest generated piece of communication information is output through the message area and only output. Alternatively, an association or correspondence may be formed between the key set 30-2 in fig. 26B and its associated communication network and the type of communication information output through the message area 30-4. Specifically, when the key group is associated with the mobile telephone network, a piece of communication information of the mobile telephone network which is newly generated, accepted or transmitted is independently output in a message area; when the key group is associated with a wireless local area network or a mobile data network, the latest data service message is output in the message area. See the description of the corresponding parts in other embodiments under the heading "single card display", and are not repeated here.

Of course, from another aspect, the first contact communication interface of fig. 26B and 26C may be considered as two sub-communication interfaces included in the first contact communication interface, e.g., the first contact communication interface of fig. 26A and 30-B may be referred to as a profile interface, and the first contact communication interface shown in fig. 26C may be referred to as a communication record interface. The profile interface and the communication record interface include profile information and a message area, respectively, for the current contact, as shown in fig. 26B and 26C, the profile information on the communication record interface in fig. 26C being configured in a abbreviated manner with respect to the profile information on the profile interface in fig. 26A or 26B, the message area on the profile interface in fig. 26A being for accommodating a single communication record; with respect to the profile interface in fig. 26A, the message area of the communication record interface in fig. 26C is configured to accommodate multiple communication records for accommodating more communication information. When the user operates on the message area or profile information on the profile interface in fig. 26B, the electronic device can switch the communication record interface in fig. 26C to be presented on the display in response to the operation. Of course, the display may also switch to present the profile interface in fig. 26B on the display in response to a user operation on the message area or profile information on the communication record interface in fig. 26C. Thus, the user can switch between the profile interface in fig. 26B or the communication recording interface in fig. 26C by the operation of the profile information or the message area of the respective communication recording interface in fig. 26B or fig. 26C, respectively, and the switching operation of the user can be the operation of a usual or specific interaction gesture such as clicking, double clicking, or the like, which can be predefined and saved in the electronic device.

Alternatively, switching between the single-card display mode and the communication record display mode of the electronic device is similar to switching between the profile interface shown in fig. 26B and the communication record interface shown in fig. 26C. The switching may be performed in response to a switching operation of the active application of the profile information or the message area by the user, or may be performed in the profile interface shown in fig. 26B, automatically switched to the communication recording interface shown in fig. 26C when two or more pieces of user unread information occur, or the electronic device may issue a prompt message (not shown in the figure) through the message area in the profile interface shown in fig. 26B when two or more pieces of user unread information occur, prompting the user that there are a plurality of unread pieces of communication information, and thus switched to the communication recording interface shown in fig. 26C in response to a selection operation of the prompt message by the user. Of course, the above-mentioned prompt message may be issued continuously or intermittently, that is, the following two are alternately output in the message area: 1) The hint information of "plurality of unread messages" is associated with 2) the latest piece of communication information. In addition, as described above, the user may switch to the communication recording interface shown in fig. 26C by clicking on the area where the profile information such as the current contact avatar in the profile interface shown in fig. 26B is located or a predetermined peripheral area. Here, the electronic device issues a notification of a plurality of unread communications on the first contact interface, and the electronic device may previously determine whether the associated communications have been read by the user. For example, a communication may be considered read when it has been received and output through the message area for a period of time exceeding 1 minute. Or 1) the communication information is subjected to the operation of a user after being generated, such as the gesture of clicking, sliding and the like, or 2) the user is judged to be captured through the resources of a camera, a display and the like of the electronic device, so that the user is currently in visual interaction and physical interaction with the current contact communication interface of the electronic device, 3) the audio message is played (without being completely played), 4) the shorter text message is amplified or related reading options are operated, 5) the longer text message, picture or video is amplified or played, and the related communication information for the current contact, which occurs in the interaction stage, can be determined to be in a read state.

For some users desiring to simplify interaction and with clear visual focus, the resource providing method or the interaction method provided according to the above embodiment of the present invention further emphasizes the round (round) of the communication information in the daily communication process, and presents the information one at a time, that is, only displays one latest piece of information at a time, which is read or not read, or alternatively, only displays the received communication information from the contact, and does not display the communication information sent by the user of the electronic device to the contact. The method simplifies the interactive operation process of the user, is easier to focus on the latest generated communication information, has clear and simple typesetting of a communication interface, and also leaves enough breadth for showing profile information such as contact head portraits, thereby improving the accessibility, such as readability and instantaneity, of the communication information and improving the operability of the electronic equipment.

Optionally, in the method of the foregoing embodiment, the contact communication interface belongs to a single program, and in general, multiple interfaces configured in the electronic device also belong to multiple programs associated with the single program or the multiple programs. In the method of the foregoing embodiment, a conventional operating system such as android may be customized to integrate a program related to a contact interface into the operating system of the electronic device to collectively form a single program at a system level, and a program component related to a communication application interface is used as an operating system User Interface (UI), where multiple interfaces such as a contact communication interface in the single program may be presented to a user at a first time after the startup is completed. Thus, the single program is also loaded during the operating system boot process of the electronic device. By running a single program or associated multiple programs on the electronic device display in an exclusive manner at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, preferably the contact communication interface is loaded at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, and is collocated with other ones of the multiple application interfaces configured in the application program at the top level of the software interaction hierarchy of the electronic device, switchably accessible to a user through the display. Therefore, the contact person communication interface and the like in the embodiment can be automatically loaded and displayed on the display in the starting process of the electronic equipment, and then the communication interface in the single-card display mode, the profile interface and the like are loaded as default home pages in a normal working state after the electronic equipment is started so as to enable a user to communicate with related contact persons. By loading the single program in the starting stage, the communication interfaces such as a single-card display mode and the like can be automatically loaded on the top layer of interaction of the whole software system of the electronic equipment. The method further improves the intuitiveness and instantaneity of the communication information, and improves the accessibility and operability of the communication application and related information in the electronic equipment.

In some embodiments according to the application, there is also provided a computer-readable storage medium having instructions stored therein that, when executed by an electronic device having one or more processors, cause the device to perform operations including, but not limited to, a titleInterface and main interface configuration, integration interaction interface, integration communication based on multiple networks, and split type electronic with base Device "" Single card display "The operation of any of the methods of the present application below.

In some embodiments according to the application, there is also provided a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium including one or more programs for execution by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs including instructions that when executed by the one or more processors cause the device to perform operations including, but not limited to, a titleInterface and host Interface configuration, integration interaction interface, integration communication based on multiple networks, split type electronic equipment with base and single card Display'Operations or instructions of any of the methods of the application below.

According toIn some embodiments of the present application, there is also provided an electronic device including: a display, a processor unit and a touch-sensitive surface unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect a contact; wherein the processor unit is coupled to the display and the touch-sensitive surface unit, the processor unit being programmed to perform operations including, but not limited to, a title Interface and main interface configuration Integrated communication based on multiple networks, split electronic equipment with base, single-card display "Operations or instructions of any of the methods of the application below.

In some embodiments according to the present application, there is also provided an electronic device including: a processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs including instructions that when executed by the one or more processors cause the electronic device to perform operations including, but not limited to, a titleInterface and main interface configuration, integration interaction interface, integration communication based on multiple networks, and split type electronic with base Device "" Single card display "Operations or instructions of any of the methods of the application below.

In addition, it is notable that: all the embodiments under the heading "single card display" described above propose that the definition and description of the steps of the method, of the various module units of the electronic device are also applicable and can be incorporated in the application"boundary Surface and main interface configuration, integration interaction interface, integration communication based on multiple networks, split type electronic equipment with base " Methods or electronic devices, communication apparatuses, presented in all embodiments, including the embodiment under the heading.

Split electronic device with base

In the case of including the above"Menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces", "Integrated interaction interface" Multi-network based integrated communication interface and main interface configuration"use in methods or electronic devices and communication apparatuses set forth in all embodiments including the under-heading embodimentThe user interface element for the user to operate to interact with the application interface or the communication operation interface for the user to operate to interact with the communication interface may be a virtual key set provided on the communication interface and the application interface in a software form, or may be an entity key set provided on the electronic device physically, where the entity key set and the virtual key set may be respectively associated with a plurality of wireless communication networks. Thus, for the current contact communication interface, the electronic device may establish communication with the current contact over a plurality of wireless communication networks to generate a plurality of communication information in response to a user operation of the virtual or physical key set; and integrating and outputting a plurality of communication information through a message area on the current contact communication interface. It should be understood that: the plurality of communications, or also referred to as a plurality of communications, may correspond to two or more different traffic properties, and may include, for example: communication information of voice service through a mobile phone network, communication information of short message service through a mobile phone network, communication information of data service through a wireless data transmission network such as a mobile data network or a WLAN. Here, the "multiple communications" is also applicable to any other related embodiment, and may not be described herein.

The following will take the example that the key group is configured on the electronic device in a hardware manner, and the key group is combined with the accompanying drawings to compriseInterface and method for producing the same The main interface configuration, the integrated interaction interface, the integrated communication based on multiple networks and the switching of various application interfaces are generally applicable to the switching of the application interfaces Menu interface "The title related embodiments are described in terms of an entity key group in embodiments, an electronic device configured with the entity key group that is dependable, primarily dependent, or substantially entirely dependent on physical manipulation, and a user supported by the electronic device to establish communications by operating the entity key group. In addition, the electronic equipment can also comprise a communication device such as a base and a mobile phone which are combined in a detachable mode.

With the evolution of electronic devices of high-tech elements, for example, intelligent machines are gradually replaced by functional machines and touch screens, but problems also occur, for example, the assembly of touch screens on the electronic devices obviously improves misoperation caused by touch sensing. Moreover, in some cases, electronic devices that interact based on emerging technologies such as touch control cannot be consistent with the usage habits of some users including but not limited to elderly people, limited to the lack of awareness or learning capabilities of some users including elderly people for new technologies, new experiences. Therefore, for some electronic devices such as smartphones, more hardware operation-based access or interaction to the electronic device needs to be supported, so as to improve accessibility to multiple programs in the electronic device, and cross-interface accessibility of similar or different functional programs therein.

In some embodiments of the present invention, there is further provided a terminal communication device, as shown in fig. 27, 28 and 29, including: a base and a first mobile terminal 5, wherein the base comprises:

a body 4;

a seating part 411 formed on the body 4 to seat the first mobile terminal 5;

a physical operation unit provided on the main body 4;

a first interface provided on the body 4, a first end of which is coupled to the physical operation part;

the second interface is arranged on the first mobile terminal 5;

the second end of the first interface is communicatively coupled to and detachable from the second interface;

wherein the physical manipulation section is operable to send a signal to the first mobile terminal 5 via the coupled first interface and second interface to trigger communication of the first mobile terminal 5 via at least one communication network, e.g. exchange of media data with the second terminal via a wireless data transmission network.

In addition, as described above, in "Split electronic device with base"He"Key/button layout and form and button layout thereof Function of' etcThe electronic device/communication apparatus of some embodiments are mainly presented in terms of hardware, and the configuration method or the providing method for software resources such as a user interface in the electronic device or the communication apparatus can Reference toInterface and main interface configuration Setting up menu interface, integrating interactive interface and single card display for switching various application interfaces "The configuration or providing method of the software resources such as the communication interface for the contact and the user interface for the application provided in any embodiment including the embodiments related to the title is not described herein.

Optionally, the at least one communication network includes a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network, and the wireless data transmission network may include a WLAN and a mobile data network; the physical operation section may include a first operation section that is operable to send any one or a combination of the following signals to the first interface in response to an external operation:

a first signal for indicating the first mobile terminal to establish a short message service through the mobile telephone network;

a second signal for instructing the first mobile terminal to establish a voice telephone service through the mobile telephone network;

and a third signal for instructing the first mobile terminal to transmit the data service message via the wireless data transmission network.

Optionally, the first operation portion includes: a first key and a second key. Wherein the first key may transmit the above-described first signal or second signal to the first interface in response to the first operation. And a second key which is also responsive to a second operation to transmit the above-mentioned first signal or second signal to the first interface. Preferably, the first key and the second key may send different signals to the first interface, i.e. if the first key may send a second signal to the first interface, the second key is arranged to send the first signal to the first interface.

Optionally, the first operation part further includes a third key, and the second signal or the third signal may be sent to the first interface in response to the third operation, and optionally, the third signal may be a signal for instructing the first mobile terminal to initiate a real-time call request based on wireless data transmission to another communication device.

Referring to fig. 27, the first interface is a physical interface and is directly connected to the first communication interface on the host housing.

Further, the second interface may be a physical interface provided on the first mobile terminal 5 matching the first interface.

Further alternatively, when the first interface is a physical interface, the first communication interface and the second communication interface form a spring probe connector, for example, a pogo pin connector, the first interface may be preferably an interface of a contact structure of the spring probe connector, for example, a probe interface of the pogo pin connector, and the second communication interface may be configured as a pin hole interface of the pogo pin connector, so that the spring probe connector is not easily damaged due to repeated plugging and unplugging.

Of course, when adapting to a mobile terminal that is conventional in the market and is not designed for customizing the base provided by some embodiments of the present invention, the first interface and the second interface may also use data transmission interfaces that are common in various mobile terminals in the market, such as a lightning interface or a USB interface. The lightning interface and the Type-C USB interface are adopted as a preferable scheme.

In terms of communication coupling such as data interface protocol, data interface protocol such as USB protocol or GPIO may be adopted to support data transmission, audio/video transmission, and power supply.

Of course, the first interface may be a wireless interface, and may be wirelessly connected to the second interface through a short-range communication protocol such as bluetooth or NFC.

When the wireless connection is adopted, a wireless charging mechanism can be further arranged in the body 4, and the first mobile terminal 5 can be charged by the wireless charging mechanism. At this time, the seating part 411 may not be formed as a fixed structure as shown in fig. 27, but may be simplified as one platform for the first mobile terminal 5 to be seated thereon.

The connection mechanism/fixing mechanism by the placement portion 411 may include, for example, but not limited to, a chute, a buckle, a magnetic coupling mechanism, a coupling mechanism utilizing gravity generated by the placement angle of the device, and the like, regardless of whether a physical interface or a wireless interface is used.

It should be noted that: the first interface may also be converted by some switching mechanism/component, such as a connector, a connection wire, etc., to other mobile terminals that are not compatible with the various physical interfaces described above or with data interface protocols such as USB protocol, GPIO, etc.

Wherein the second terminal may generally be any mobile terminal located remotely. The mobile terminals held will be different according to different contacts, so that the second terminal or the second terminal according to some embodiments of the present invention is not specific to a certain mobile terminal, that is, any mobile terminal that may generate media data with the first mobile terminal 5 may be defined as a second terminal.

Compared with the prior art, the terminal communication device provided by some embodiments of the present invention converts the operation of the first mobile terminal 5 into a physical operation with good feedback by means of the base and the physical operation part arranged on the base, which greatly improves convenience, and is particularly suitable for users including but not limited to the old, children, blind people and the like who are not good at operating electronic equipment.

In particular, media data to which some embodiments of the present invention are directed includes, but is not limited to, various text messages, files, data, voice and video communication data generated by communication between multiple mobile terminals. It should be noted that, when using GSM network for communication and call, the cost is relatively high, and many people are sensitive to call cost. In contrast, exchanging media data over a wireless data network tends to be free or less costly. However, it is often difficult for these particular groups to distinguish between GSM based networks and wireless data based networks, and to find portals for communication using wireless data networks.

Take the "WeChat" class of applications as an example. In the mobile terminal in the prior art, when people operate WeChat to send voice and video messages, the people need to open a wireless data network in the 'setting' of the mobile terminal, then open a 'WeChat' app (application program), then find a contact person to be contacted in the app interface, switch to the contact person interface and open a dialog box, find a 'more' plus button near the dialog box, and then select the 'video call' button, so that the video call to the specific contact person can be realized. This series of operations is very difficult for the user mentioned before.

In some embodiments of the present invention, only the physical operation portion is operated, so that the first mobile terminal 5 can be prompted to directly initiate a video call, send audio, text or picture data, etc. through the wireless data network, and compared with the prior art, the method and the system have obvious convenience in operation, and obviously can make the user more safe and safer in cost. In some embodiments, the first mobile terminal 5 may further reduce the tariff burden of the user by identifying whether to connect to the first interface, so as to switch its own network environment to Wlan or 3G, 4G, etc. network.

Next, alternatives of the physical operation portion of the base provided by some embodiments of the present invention will be described in further detail.

Alternatively, the physical operation section includes a first operation section that can transmit any one of or a combination of the following signals to the first mobile terminal 5 via the first interface and the second interface in response to an external operation:

a signal for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to collect and transmit media data;

a signal for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to play the media data.

A signal for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to initiate a real-time call request based on wireless data transmission to the second terminal.

In the first operation section, most of functions for exchanging media data are integrated, which is convenient. In the first operating section, it may be embodied in the form of physical operating components, such as keys, levers, handles, touch pads, etc. In some of the embodiments that follow, a preferred key structure is schematically illustrated.

Specifically, the first operation unit includes:

a first key 21, which is responsive to a first operation to transmit a signal for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to collect and transmit media data to the first mobile terminal 5 via the first interface and the second interface;

The second key 22 is operable to transmit a signal for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to play the media data to the first mobile terminal 5 via the first interface and the second interface in response to the second operation.

Wherein the first key 21 and the second key 22 may be arranged in an adjacent manner. The two physical keys can be square or round or other shaped outline structures. Of course, the first key 21 and the second key 22 may be disposed in a dispersed manner, for example, one disposed on the first surface of the housing and the other disposed on the second surface of the body 4; alternatively, the first key 21 and the second key 22 may be disposed on the same surface of the body 4.

The specific manner of each operation may be determined according to the form of each "key", for example, the "keyboard" may be configured by pressing, toggling, sliding, scrolling, etc. to correspond to the various forms of keys, toggling keys, knobs, sliding bars, etc.

Taking the pressing operation as an example, when the first key 21 is pressed, the first mobile terminal 5 receives a signal from the first interface, starts to collect media data, and gives a corresponding prompt. After receiving the prompt, the user can record own voice and video and send the recorded voice and video as media data to the second terminal. Wherein, the media data can be set with a prescribed time length, and can be unlimited.

Optionally, the first operation part further includes:

a third key 23, which is operable in response to the third operation to send a real-time call request to the first mobile terminal 5 via the first interface and the second interface for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to initiate a wireless data transfer based real-time call request to the second terminal.

The second terminal may respond to this real-time call request to implement a real-time call between the first mobile terminal 5 and the first mobile terminal 5. The real-time call request is referred to in some embodiments of the invention. Including but not limited to video telephony, voice telephony, and the like.

That is, by three simple keys, namely, the first key 21, the second key 22 and the third key 23, the user can trigger one key and meet his own communication demands, so that complex operations of a plurality of hierarchical menus are not required in operation, and operability of the communication device and accessibility of communication resources in the communication device are improved.

Alternatively, the third key 23 is shaped differently from the first key 21 and the second key 22. By distinguishing the shape of the third key 23 from the first key 21 and the second key 22, misoperation can be prevented, and the memory requirement of the user can be reduced.

Of course, instead of providing the third key 23, the first key 21 or the second key 22 may be operated in combination, for example, by simultaneously pressing the first key 21 and the second key 22, so as to achieve the purpose of the real-time call request.

Optionally, the method may further include:

and a presentation lamp 231 for reflecting the communication status of the first terminal communication device, the presentation lamp 231 being provided on the third key 23. The indicator light 231 provided on the third key 23 may directly give feedback of the state of the real-time call, for example, may turn on a red light when the real-time call request fails, and turn on a green light during the real-time call. The visual degree of the state indication can be improved compared with the case of being directly arranged at other parts of the body 4.

In real life, network congestion sometimes occurs, which is represented as a situation that a video or an audio is blocked in the real-time conversation process. For a specific crowd, it is difficult to understand the cause of the occurrence of the jamming, and it is possible to take additional unnecessary operations such as tapping the body 4, removing the first mobile terminal 5, etc. in consideration of the failure of the conversation. The third key 23 is provided with the prompting lamp 231, so that the prompting function for prompting the user to talk in real time without interruption can be still started when the network is congested, and the prompting device has positive significance.

Optionally, the third key 23, the first key 21, the second key 22 are arranged substantially along a straight line.

When the three keys are arranged along the same straight line, the user can more clearly and intuitively understand the interaction logic. In the UI interface (user interface) of the first mobile terminal 5, three keys with equivalent functions are also generally arranged along a straight line. When the virtual keys in the UI interface are consistent with the entity keys on the body 4, the consistency of user operation can be improved, and the learning cost of the user can be reduced.

Further, the third key 23, the first key 21, and the second key 22 are arranged in this order along a substantially straight line. In which the functions of the first key 21 and the second key 22 are associated, the positions of the first key 21 and the second key 22 can be interchanged.

Further, the third key 23 is spaced from the first key 21 by a distance greater than the distance between the first key 21 and the second key 22.

Since the function of the third key 23 has relatively small functional association with the first key 21 and the second key 22, when the third key 23 is disposed at a relatively distant position, erroneous operation can be further prevented.

It should be noted that the interval between the first key 21 and the second key 22 may be set smaller, and may even be connected together, i.e., integrally provided.

Alternatively, the placement portion 411 may be provided on the first surface 41 of the body 4, and the first operation portion is provided on the first surface 41. When the placement unit 411 and the first operation unit are provided on the same surface, the user can view the content of the first operation unit while viewing the display of the first mobile terminal 5, and the interactivity and operability of the communication device can be further improved.

In addition, when the virtual key which is consistent with the appearance (color, shape, size, etc.) of the key of the first operation part exists in the user interface of the first mobile terminal 5, the user can intuitively understand that the function of the key of the first operation part is also consistent with that of the virtual key, so that the operability of the communication device is improved, and the difficulty of interactive operation between the user and the communication device is reduced.

Further alternatively, the placement portion 411 may be provided on the left side of the first surface 41 of the body 4, and the first operation portion is provided on the right side of the first surface 41.

When the placement part 411 is disposed on the left side and the first operation part is disposed on the right side, the operation habit of the right-handed person is met, and the range of the applicable person of the base in the embodiment of the invention is improved. Of course, a design is also possible in which the placement portion 411 is provided on the right side and the first operation portion is provided on the left side.

Optionally, the physical operation part further includes:

a fourth key 24, which is responsive to a fourth operation to send a request for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to initiate a real-time call to at least two second terminals to the first mobile terminal 5 via the first interface and the second interface.

The fourth key 24 may be used as a help key in an emergency situation. The fourth operation may be a single operation such as a single press or 2 to 3 presses in succession. Upon actuation of the fourth key 24, a real-time call request may be initiated to a plurality of second terminals via all available data transmission paths supported by the first mobile terminal 5. These data transmission paths include, but are not limited to, all data transmission paths based on a mobile communication network, and may be tried one by one through other networks when any one network fails.

The contact corresponding to the second terminal from which the request is initiated may be preset in the first mobile terminal 5. In practical application, an emergency contact group may be preset in an instant messaging application program in the terminal communication device, where the emergency contact group includes at least two contacts, and generally, in order to ensure that a user can successfully contact an emergency contact under an emergency situation, the emergency contact group includes at least two contacts.

Alternatively, the fourth key 24 is disposed on the second surface 42 of the body 4, and the placement portion 411 is formed on the first surface 41 of the body 4, and the second surface 42 intersects with the first surface 41. In this way, the position of the fourth key 24 can be significantly differentiated from the first, second and third keys 23.

Further alternatively, the first surface 41 is a front surface and the second surface 42 is an upper surface, thereby making the fourth operation easier for the user in case of emergency. When located on the upper surface, the user is most likely to contact the upper surface in the dark, and is likely to find the location of the fourth key 24, and thus is more likely to be found in an emergency.

Alternatively, referring to fig. 28, the physical operation part may further include:

A second operation section including:

a direction key 25 and/or a return key 26.

The direction key 25 allows the user to select the content displayed on the display, such as contact related information displayed by the communication application described above. That is, contact selection may be accomplished through the directional key 25. The direction keys 25 may be a pair or a single direction key 25, and a pair of direction keys 25 is generally preferred. The return key 26 (called Home key) may be used for the user to scroll back, or return to the Home page or the initial page, that is, the first interface presented after the user is started, such as the first contact interface or other application interface.

It should be understood that: the electronic device including physical keys such as a direction key and/or a Home key (Home key) is not limited to a combination of a mobile communication body and a base, such as a mobile phone, but may also include a mobile phone integrally configured with the direction key and/or the return key, which are shown in fig. 34 and described in detail herein.

Of course, in these embodiments, communication keys may be further included, and the communication network associated in terms of communication function such as the first key 21, the second key 22, the third key 23 in the above embodiments may be dynamically configured according to at least one of a user's switching operation, a change in a surrounding network condition (e.g., connection or disconnection with a WLAN), a connection or disconnection between a mobile communication device and a base, and the like, see in detail the contents related to the title "switching between internet mode and mobile phone mode".

In addition, the electronic device of the embodiment including physical keys such as a direction key and/or a Home key, a communication key, etc. can also be used in the embodiment shown in fig. 9, 10 and 10Interface and main interface configuration and universal application interface switching Menu interface, integrated interactive interface, single card display "The contact interfaces, resource providing methods, etc. disclosed in any title related embodiments are combined, and are not described herein.

For the electronic device of the embodiment including the plurality of thumbnail options of the menu bar disposed at the bottom of the display, correspondingly, the second operation portion of the above embodiment may further include a physical key (not shown in the figure) for turning pages for the plurality of thumbnail options in the menu bar to move the options in batches for presentation.

In addition, alternatively, the placement portion 411 is formed on the first surface 41 of the body 4, and the second operation portion is provided on the surface intersecting the first surface 41 on the body 4 of the base. Specifically, it may be provided on the aforementioned second surface 42, with a long distance maintained between the second operating portion and the fourth key 24.

In some embodiments of the present invention, the direction key 25 may be set on the second surface 42 to better maintain consistency in the switching direction of the display content on the display, and in some embodiments, when the terminal communication device is started, the profile information or the interaction interface of the first contact, or the contact group where the first contact is located, is presented on the first interface, and at this time, the processor may switch the display of the profile information of the second contact, or the interaction interface of the second contact, or the contact group where the second contact is located, on the screen in response to the user pressing the direction key 25. The first contact may be the most frequently contacted contact of the user in a statistical sense, and the frequency of the later second contact and the third contact used in the statistical sense is sequentially reduced.

In addition, optionally, the physical operation part further includes:

a function operation unit including:

a power key 27, which is responsive to the fifth operation to transmit a signal for instructing the first mobile terminal 5 to switch power to the first interface;

the volume key 28 may be responsive to a sixth operation to adjust the volume of the base or to send a signal to the first interface instructing the first mobile terminal to adjust the volume.

Through the function operation part on the base body 4, the control of the two common functions of the volume and the power switch of the first mobile terminal 5 can be directly realized, and the convenience is further improved.

Alternatively, the seating portion 411 is formed at the first surface 41 of the body 4, and the function operating portion is provided on a surface of the body 4 intersecting the first surface 41. Wherein the function operating part may be provided on the third surface 43 to be distinguished from the first and second surfaces, and the third surface 43 may be a side surface or a back surface of the body 4.

Specifically, the third surface 43 may be located on a side surface of the body 4. Providing the power key 27 and the volume adjustment key on the third surface 43 intersecting the surfaces of the first surface 41 and the second surface 42, respectively, can prevent unexpected situations of shutdown and abrupt increase in volume caused by false touch. Further, since the frequency of use of the power key 27 and the volume key 28 is low, the use of both is not affected by the arrangement on the side surface.

In summary, the user can realize different communication requirements by simply operating at least one key included in the physical operation part or the physical operation part arranged on the base, and the timeliness and reliability of sending communication messages to the contacts and the timeliness of receiving the communication messages sent by the contacts are ensured while the operation is convenient.

Alternatively, the seating part 411 is provided with a magnetic force adsorption assembly for coupling the first mobile terminal 5. Specifically, a permanent magnet may be provided on the placement portion 411, and a ferromagnetic substance may be provided on the first mobile terminal 5, thereby preventing the influence of spontaneous magnetism on the use of the first mobile terminal 5. Or the two can be fastened and combined by fasteners such as buckles, clamping pieces and the like, and the details are omitted here.

In particular, at least part of the first interface is formed as an elastic protrusion. And a portion of the first mobile terminal 5 corresponding to the first interface, for example, the second interface may be formed with a groove.

When the first mobile terminal 5 receives the magnetic force to be placed on the placement part 411, the protrusion may be naturally inserted into the groove to achieve the connection of the first interface and the second interface.

Optionally, the communication device further includes: and one end of the adapter is detachably connected with the first interface, and the other end of the adapter is output as at least one of a USB interface, a lightning interface, an audio interface and a video interface. The adaptor may enable the base referred to in some embodiments of the invention to be adapted not only to the dedicated first mobile terminal 5, but also to other commercially available conventional mobile terminals when a special interface is employed.

Alternatively, the seating part 411 includes a slope inclined upward with respect to the placement surface of the body 4.

In particular, this incline may have an inclination angle of typically 10-30 degrees, or 50-80 degrees, suitable for use in sitting and standing situations, respectively.

The base provided by some embodiments of the invention is particularly suitable for application scenes when placed on a living room tea table or a bedside table. The general height of these platforms generally determines that the user cannot look up the display of the first mobile terminal 5, but needs to look down at a certain angle of inclination. Accordingly, setting the seating part 411 to have a slope with a certain inclination angle can significantly improve user experience.

Optionally, the placement portion 411 includes a platform, which is disposed on the body 4 to carry the first mobile terminal 5, and can rotate relative to the rest of the body 4 to adjust its orientation.

When the platform can rotate relative to the rest of the body 4 to adjust the direction of the platform, that is, the direction of the first mobile terminal 5 can be freely adjusted, the platform accords with the principle of ergonomics, and the user experience can be further improved.

It will be appreciated that the platform may adjust its direction of rotation by various rotatable mechanisms known in the art, and various specific implementations are not described herein.

The adjustable structure of the placement portion 411 may be further improved, for example, the platform may be configured to be liftable to further enhance the user experience.

In addition, the terminal communication device according to some embodiments of the present invention may further include a wire control unit, a first end of which is connected to the body 4, and a wire control operation portion, which is disposed at a second end of the wire control unit and is communicatively connected to the first mobile terminal through the first interface. The drive-by-wire unit is connected to the body 4 and is communicatively connectable with the first mobile terminal 5 via a first interface.

With age, vision ages, and some users, including some elderly people, have symptoms of hyperopia. They tend to deliberately zoom out from the display of the first mobile terminal 5 when looking at the display. For a user with a serious far vision degree, in the process of operating the physical operation part on the body 4, the operation feeling may be affected by the action of moving the hands away from the head, and discomfort may be generated.

In addition, when the user puts the base on a living room tea table, the user leans against a sofa or puts the base on a bedside table, and the user lays on a bed, the user is not comfortable to directly operate the physical operation part because the body is far away from the base.

Accordingly, the wire control unit can provide a function for replacing the physical operation part in the application scenes, so that the moving range of a user when using the base is enlarged. Specifically, a wire control operation part having a function consistent with that of the physical operation part on the body 4 may be provided on the wire control unit for remote control operation by the user.

Furthermore, the shape, structure and operation mode of each key on the wire control operation part can be kept consistent with those of the physical operation part, so that the recognition degree is improved, and the learning cost is reduced.

Compared with a remote controller, the wire control unit is not easy to lose, and the battery is not required to be replaced, so that convenience can be improved for the old with relative forgetfulness and the children with relative stubborn skin.

Further alternatively, referring to fig. 29, the body 4 is further provided with a data expansion interface for externally connecting expansion devices.

The external expansion devices can be various devices which can be linked with the host, such as printers, scanners, mice, lamps and the like, and particularly can be disease diagnosis and treatment devices which are applicable to the old and are a special group of sphygmomanometers, therapeutic instruments, electrocardiograph testers and the like. The data expansion interface can obviously enhance the expandability of the terminal communication device, so that the function of the terminal communication device is more powerful and easy to use.

The data expansion interface itself may be a lightning, mini, micro-USB or Type-C interface, etc. interfaces commonly found in the market. In terms of communication coupling such as a data interface protocol, a data interface protocol such as a USB protocol or a GPIO may be used.

In particular, the data expansion interface may further include the aforementioned drive-by-wire unit. The data expansion interface is utilized to connect the control unit, so that the control unit is easy to replace when damaged, and the service life can be further prolonged.

In summary, compared to the prior art, in some embodiments of the present invention, by means of the combination of the detachably disposed base and the first mobile terminal 5, the user can perform simple and hierarchical interface operation on the base for the communication action of the first mobile terminal 5, so that even the elderly, children, and the people who are difficult to proficient in using the intelligent terminal device can easily and intuitively realize the remote communication call requirement by means of the physical operation portion of the base. Accordingly, the terminal communication device provided by some embodiments of the present invention can reduce the use and learning costs, and significantly improve convenience.

Optionally, the short message service message in some embodiments above, the data service message has a preset maximum duration, maximum text length or maximum volume, respectively.

In other embodiments of the present invention, there is also provided a communication apparatus including: a display; a processor unit; a memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the methods or steps therein according to any of the embodiments of the present invention.

In other embodiments of the present invention, there is also provided a communication apparatus including: means for performing the method according to any of the embodiments of the invention or its main steps.

Of course, with the electronic device in the above or below embodiments, if the area of the effective display area of the display of the electronic device is large, such as a tablet computer or a display with a folding screen or foldable properties; in addition, when the electronic device does not include display, the display screen of the television may be used to present a user interface of an application program such as instant messaging and to interact with a user on the display screen by using a related video signal output from the electronic device. Correspondingly, on a display with larger display areas including but not limited to the above-mentioned types, two or more contact communication interfaces or other application interfaces such as photo albums can be presented simultaneously.

FIG. 37 illustrates a schematic diagram of a foldable display of an electronic device in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention in which multiple interactive interfaces are simultaneously presented, in FIG. 37, the display 4400 is a display foldable at least along the linear region 4401, and on both sides of the linear region 4401, a first interface 4402 and a second interface 4403 can be presented independently, respectively, wherein the first interface 4402 can be a first contact interface, the second interface 4403 can be a second contact interface or other application interface such as an album, and the contact interface or other application interface can have various properties or features, which can be referred to in the related embodiments, and the electronic device in this embodiment can also be used in combination with the electronic device including, but not limited to, those of FIGS. 9, 10 and photo albumInterface and main interface Surface configuration, menu interface generally applicable to switching of various application interfaces, integrated interaction interface, and single-card display "The contact interfaces, resource providing methods, etc. disclosed in any of the embodiments including the title related embodiments are combined to form new modification examples, and are not described herein.

Thus, it should be noted that: in some embodiments, while a single communication interface or other application interface is presented on the display for example, it is not precluded that multiple contact interfaces and/or multiple application interfaces may be provided simultaneously on the display in these embodiments, where the multiple contact interfaces may include multiple profile interfaces for multiple contacts, respectively, or multiple communication record interfaces for multiple contacts, respectively.

Furthermore, it should be noted that in the method, the communication device, and the electronic apparatus according to some embodiments of the present invention, the mentioned display screen (display screen) generally refers to a screen portion of a display (display) to which the communication device/the electronic apparatus is coupled, preferably a touch display, a touch display screen, or also simply referred to as a display, and may be a separate display unit independent of the electronic apparatus, such as a television, or may be a touch display integrally assembled with the electronic apparatus. In addition, the switching operation for the touch display may be a swipe gesture, such as a single or a continuous multiple of horizontal/vertical swipe gesture. And may not be described in detail elsewhere.

In some embodiments, the touch sensitive area of the touch sensitive display may be activated or deactivated, or may be replaced with a display without touch sensitive functionality, or with a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating specific functions. In some embodiments, the touch pad is a touch sensitive area of the device that, unlike a touch screen, does not display visual output. The touch pad may be a touch-sensitive surface separate from the touch-sensitive display or an extension of a touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch-sensitive display.

In some embodiments, some or all of the operations described herein may be performed using an application executing on a user's device. The circuits, logic modules, processors, and/or other components may be configured to perform various operations described herein. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that such configuration may be accomplished through design, setup, interconnection, and/or programming of particular components depending on the particular implementation, and that the configured components may or may not be reconfigurable for different operations, again depending on the particular implementation. For example, the programmable processor may be configured by providing appropriate executable code; the dedicated logic circuit may be configured by appropriately connecting logic gates and other circuit elements; etc.

Any of the software components or functions described in this patent application may be implemented as software code executed by a processor using any suitable computer language such as, for example, java, C, c++, c#, object-C, swift, or a scripting language such as Perl or Python using, for example, conventional or object-oriented techniques. The software codes may be stored on a computer readable medium as a series of instructions or commands to implement storage and/or transmission. Suitable non-transitory computer readable media may include Random Access Memory (RAM), read Only Memory (ROM), magnetic media such as a hard disk drive or floppy disk, or optical media such as Compact Disk (CD) or DVD (digital versatile disk), flash memory, and the like. The computer readable medium may be any combination of such storage devices or transmission devices.

Computer programs incorporating the various features of the present disclosure may be encoded on various computer readable storage media; suitable media include magnetic disks or tapes, optical storage media such as Compact Discs (CDs) or DVDs (digital versatile discs), flash memory, and the like. The computer readable storage medium encoded with the program code may be packaged with a compatible device or provided separately from other devices. Furthermore, the program code may be encoded and transmitted via a wired optical and/or wireless network (including the internet) compliant with a variety of protocols, allowing distribution, for example, via internet downloads. Any such computer-readable medium may reside or be located within a single computer product (e.g., a solid state drive, hard drive, CD, or entire computer system), and may reside or be located within different computer products within a system or network. The computer system may include a monitor, printer, or other suitable display for providing any of the results mentioned herein to a user.

Unless expressly indicated to the contrary, the expression "a", "an" or "the" is intended to mean "one or more". Unless expressly indicated to the contrary, the use of "or" is intended to mean "inclusive or" rather than "exclusive or". References to "a first" element do not necessarily require that a second element be provided. Furthermore, reference to "a first" or "a second" element does not limit the referenced element to a particular location unless explicitly stated.

All patents, patent applications, publications, and descriptions mentioned herein are incorporated by reference in their entirety for all purposes. No admission is made that any document is prior art.

Alternative embodiments

Embodiment 1, a resource providing method for an electronic device, wherein a plurality of applications are provided in the electronic device, the method comprising:

loading at least one application of the plurality of applications through a display for the electronic device;

and responding to the switching operation of the user on the application program currently presented on the display, and switching and outputting the plurality of application programs through the display.

2. The method of embodiment 1, wherein the plurality of applications includes a first application and/or a collection item program for exposing an identification collection; and the step of loading at least one application of the plurality of applications via a display for the electronic device further comprises:

loading the first application program or the collection item program through the display.

3. The method of embodiment 1 or 2, wherein the interface of the plurality of applications is configured as a top layer of a user interface of an application manager for the plurality of applications; the interface of the first application or collection item is configured on a first page of a user interface top layer of the application manager.

4. The method of embodiment 3, wherein interfaces of a plurality of applications are arranged side-by-side on top of a user interface of the application manager, the step of loading the first application or the collection item via the display further comprising: preferentially loading the first application or the collection item program on a top layer of an application manager user interface relative to other application programs in the plurality of application programs; and

the step of switching the plurality of applications to be output by the display further comprises any of the steps of:

s1, responding to a lateral sliding gesture aiming at the application management program user interface, and scheduling the plurality of application programs to be respectively output through the top layer of the application management program user interface;

s2, responding to a lateral sliding gesture aiming at the application management program user interface, and switching the plurality of application programs in parallel through the top layer of the application management program user interface to be output to the display one by one;

And S4, responding to a lateral sliding gesture aiming at the interface of the current application program, and sequentially outputting the next interface of the current program or the next program in the plurality of application programs through the top layer of the application management program user interface.

5. The method of embodiment 4, wherein the step of preferentially loading the first application or the collection item at a top level of an application manager user interface further comprises: after the electronic equipment is started, the first application program is preferentially loaded on the top layer of the application management program user interface; and

any of the steps S1, S2, S3, or S4 further includes loading a subsequent program of the plurality of application programs, including the collection item program, in response to the lateral swipe gesture.

6. The method of embodiment 4, wherein the step of preferentially loading the first application or the collection item at a top level of an application manager user interface further comprises: after the electronic equipment is started, the collection item program is preferentially loaded on the top layer of the application management program user interface; and

any of the steps S1, S2, S3, or S4 further includes, in response to the lateral swipe gesture, subsequently loading the first application.

7. The method of any of embodiments 2-6, wherein the application management program is an operating system of the electronic device or a program independent of the operating system; and if the application manager is independent of the operating system, the method further comprises: and in response to a start operation of the application management program, loading the application management program through the display.

8. The method of any of embodiments 1-7, further comprising the step of: and providing, by the display, a thumbnail form and respectively associated with the plurality of applications, operable to execute in one-to-one correspondence and output the plurality of applications by the display.

9. The method of embodiment 8, wherein the plurality of options are arranged in a row around the current interface, further comprising the steps of: the plurality of options are presented in a mobile manner in response to a switching operation for the option area.

10. The method according to embodiment 9, wherein the order of the plurality of applications in the rank is configured according to a setting of the order of the plurality of applications by the user and/or the frequency of access of the plurality of applications by the user, respectively.

11. The method of embodiment 9, wherein at least a portion of the plurality of options are arranged laterally below the current interface, the mobile presentation step further comprising: the plurality of options are presented in the option area in a portion-by-portion movement in response to a switching operation for the option area.

12. The method of any of embodiments 8-11, wherein the step of switching output of the plurality of applications by the display further comprises: in response to a user selection among the plurality of options, switching the current interface to an interface corresponding to the selected option on the display, and synchronously focusing the selected option in the option area.

13. The method of embodiment 11, wherein each of the portions includes the same number of options, the same number being 3-6; the width of the option area along the longitudinal direction is 1.5cm-2.5cm; and, the method further comprises the steps of: in response to a switch of an application currently loaded on the display, a focus display of the plurality of options is switched to correspond to the switched application.

14. The method of any of embodiments 1-13, wherein the plurality of applications are executable, each of the plurality of applications being activatable in response to being currently loaded on the display; and the electronic device further comprises an application operation unit virtually provided at the current interface and/or physically provided at the electronic device; the application operation unit is operable by a user to access the plurality of application programs, respectively.

15. The method according to embodiment 14, wherein the application operation unit is functionally and correspondingly variable according to the current program to maintain operability of characteristics of the current program.

16. The method of embodiment 15, wherein the application operation unit includes a key group; the method further comprises the steps of: and respectively calling a plurality of characteristics of the current program in response to the operation of the key array.

17. The method of embodiment 16, wherein the key set comprises: a plurality of virtual push-type keys or toggle-type keys arranged in a row on the right side of the current interface and/or a plurality of physical push-type keys or toggle-type keys correspondingly arranged in a row on an electronic device on the right side of a display integrally assembled with the electronic device; and

the plurality of applications are individually configured for the plurality of physical keys such that a plurality of characteristics of each of the plurality of applications are correspondingly activatable in response to physical actions of the plurality of physical keys, respectively.

18. The method of embodiment 16 wherein the first application is a communication program for a first contact executable to output a communication interface for the first contact through the display, including a message area; the key sets are each associated with at least one communication network; the method further comprises:

In response to a user operation of the key set, outputting a plurality of communication information with the first contact via the at least one communication network in the message area.

19. The method of embodiment 18 wherein the at least one communication network comprises a plurality of communication networks having different traffic properties, the keys being respectively associated with the plurality of communication networks; and the communication information outputting step further includes:

establishing communication with the first contact via the plurality of communication networks to generate the plurality of communication information in response to a user operation on the key set; and

and integrating and outputting the plurality of communication information with the different service properties through the message area.

20. The method of embodiment 19, wherein the plurality of communication networks comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks including a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network; the key group is associated with the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively, and the communication information outputting step further includes:

and in response to the operation of the key group by the user, establishing communication with the first contact through the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network respectively to generate the communication information.

21. The method of embodiment 20 wherein the wireless data transmission network comprises a mobile data network and a wireless local area network, and the method further comprises:

the key set is selectively associated with the mobile telephone network, the mobile data network, or the wireless local area network such that the key set is operable to establish corresponding services based on the associated communication network, respectively.

22. The method of embodiment 21, wherein the plurality of communication information includes: the voice service information, at least two of short message service information and data service information; the communication establishing step further includes:

when the key set is associated with the mobile telephone network, responding to the operation of the key set by a user, establishing communication with the first contact person through the mobile telephone network to generate the voice service information and/or the short message service information;

and when the key group is associated with the wireless data transmission network, responding to the operation of a user on the key group, and establishing communication with the first contact person through the wireless data transmission network to generate the data service message.

23. The method of embodiment 21 wherein the first contact communication interface further includes a toggle option, the selectively associating step including:

The key set is selectively configured to be associated with the mobile telephone network, the mobile data network, or the wireless local area network based on at least one of i) user operation of the handoff option, ii) a connection status of the electronic device with the wireless local area network, or iii) peripherally available communication network conditions.

24. The method of embodiment 23 wherein the step of selectively associating further comprises:

configuring the key set to be associated with the wireless local area network in a communication function in response to the electronic device accessing the wireless local area network; and

the set of keys is configured to be associated with the mobile telephone network in a communication function in response to the electronic device being disconnected from the wireless local area network.

25. The method of any of embodiments 18-24, wherein the first contact communication program is integrated with the operating system, an interface of the first contact communication program being at least a portion of the operating system user interface component.

26. The method of embodiment 25 wherein the corresponding handset number of the first contact in the mobile telephone network and the corresponding identification code in the wireless data transmission network are integrally configured.

27. The method according to embodiment 26, wherein the mobile phone number corresponding to the first contact in the mobile phone network and the identification code corresponding to the first contact in the wireless data transmission network are integrally stored in the same program, and the communication establishing step further includes:

and responding to the operation of the user on the key group, and respectively establishing communication with the first contact person through the mobile phone number and the identification code to generate a plurality of communication information.

28. The method of any of embodiments 14-27, wherein the outputting of the plurality of communication information further comprises:

and integrating and outputting at least two of the voice service information and the short message service information into the message area on the first contact communication interface.

29. The method of embodiment 28 wherein the integrating outputting step further comprises:

outputting the voice service information and/or the short message service information through the message area when the key group is associated with the mobile telephone network;

and outputting the data service message through the message area when the key group is associated with the wireless local area network or the mobile data network.

30. The method of any of embodiments 18-29, wherein the plurality of communication information outputting steps further comprises: individually outputting a most recent one of the plurality of communication information in the message area in response to occurrence of the most recent one; or alternatively

Continuously updating and outputting the latest one of the plurality of communication information on the message area on the first contact communication interface independently;

31. The method of embodiment 30, wherein the outputting step further comprises: outputting the latest one of the at least two of the data service messages individually in the message area in response to occurrence of the latest one of the voice service information, the short message service message, or

And outputting the latest one of at least two of the voice service information and the short message service information to the message area in a continuously updated mode independently.

32. The method of embodiment 30 or 31 wherein the profile information of the first contact is configured separately outside the message area and is comparable to the message area format; the method further comprises the steps of:

Expanding the message area and abbreviated the profile information; and collectively outputting the plurality of messages to the message area.

33. The method of embodiment 32 wherein the profile information of the first contact and the message area are configured substantially centered above and below each other on the first contact communication interface, the plurality of communication information outputting steps further comprising:

outputting at least two of the voice service information and the short message service information to the message area collectively; or alternatively

Collectively outputting the voice service information and/or the short message service information arranged in the order of occurrence through the message area when the key group is associated with the mobile phone network; and when the key group is associated with the wireless data transmission network, collectively outputting the data service messages arranged according to the occurrence sequence through the message area.

34. The method of embodiment 33, wherein the plurality of communication information outputting steps further includes:

integrating the voice service information and/or short message service message to output the latest one of the pieces of information individually in the message area when the key set is associated with the mobile telephone network;

When the key group is associated with the wireless data transmission network, outputting the latest piece of the data service message to the message area in a continuously updated mode;

wherein the data traffic message comprises one or more of the following: audio messages, video messages, picture messages, geographic locations, text messages, files, data.

35. An electronic device, comprising: a processor unit, a memory and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing any of the methods of embodiments 1-34.

36. An electronic device, comprising: a physical key set, a spring probe connector and a communication device, the communication device comprising a display, a processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs,

the physical key set is detachably coupled to the processor unit by the spring probe connector;

wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing any of the methods of embodiments 1-34.

37. The electronic device of embodiment 36, further comprising a base, the spring probe connector being a pogpin connector, the physical key set being configured on the base; the pin hole interface and the probe interface of the pogpin connector are correspondingly arranged on the mobile communication device and the base and are respectively connected with the processor unit and the entity key group;

the one or more programs include an operating system and/or application manager including instructions for performing any of the methods according to embodiments 1-17.

38. The electronic device of embodiments 37 or 36, wherein the one or more programs further comprise a communication program comprising instructions for performing any of the methods of embodiments 18-34 in combination with the application management program; the communication program is integrated with or independent of the operating system; the communication program is further executable by the processor unit to: switching the electronic device between a wireless local area network and a mobile data network according to i) peripheral communication network conditions, ii) at least one of connection or disconnection of the connector.

39. The electronic device of embodiments 37 or 36, wherein the virtual key set corresponds in form to the physical key set.

40. The electronic device of embodiment 39, wherein the virtual key set and the physical key set have a consistency with respect to at least one of: the virtual key group includes a plurality of virtual keys arranged in a row on the right side of the current interface, and the physical key group includes a plurality of physical keys arranged in a row on the right side of the display.

41. The electronic device of any of embodiments 35-40, wherein the one or more programs further comprise an album application, the operating system and/or application management program further comprising instructions executable by the processor unit to cause the electronic device to: responding to a sixth switching operation of a user on the current interface, a seventh switching operation of the interface switching key or a selection operation of a user on an option corresponding to the album application interface in a region where the plurality of options are located, and outputting the album application interface on the display; and

The application operating portion is correspondingly configured to be operable to run a plurality of properties of the album application in response to the album application interface being currently output on the display.

42. The electronic device of embodiment 41, wherein the plurality of characteristics includes a photographing characteristic, a playing characteristic, a pause characteristic; and the key set includes a first key, a second key, and a third key operable to invoke the photographing feature, the playing feature, and the pause feature, respectively, of the album application.

43. The electronic device of embodiment 42, wherein the operating system and/or application management program further comprises instructions that when executed by the processor unit cause the electronic device to functionally reconfigure the first, second, and third keys to be operable to invoke the following features provided by the first contact communication interface, respectively, in response to the first contact communication interface being currently output on the display:

when the first, second and third keys are associated with the wireless data transmission network, i) sending a voice message over the wireless data transmission network; ii) accessing voice messages received over the wireless data transmission network; iii) Establishing an audio and video call through the wireless data transmission network; or alternatively

When the first, second and third keys are associated with the mobile telephone network, a) sending a short message service through the mobile telephone network; b) Accessing a short message service received through the mobile telephone network; c) And establishing voice telephone service through the mobile telephone network.

44. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having one or more processors, comprising:

apparatus for performing any one of the methods according to embodiments 1-34.

45. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium comprising one or more programs for execution by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs comprising instructions that when executed by the one or more processors cause the electronic device to perform the method of any of embodiments 1-34.

46. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of embodiment 45, the one or more programs comprising an operating system and/or application management program comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of embodiments 1-17.

47. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium of embodiment 46, wherein the application management program is integrated with or independent of the operating system, the one or more programs further comprising a communication program comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device in combination with the application management program, cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of embodiments 18-34.

48. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of embodiment 47, wherein the communication program is at least partially integrated with or independent of the operating system.

49. An electronic device, comprising: a display, a processor unit, and a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect a contact; wherein the processor unit is coupled with the display and the touch-sensitive surface unit, the processing unit being programmed to perform the steps of any one of the methods according to embodiments 1 to 34.

50. The electronic device of embodiment 35, wherein the one or more programs include an operating system program and/or an application management program configured to be executed by the processor unit, the operating system program and/or application management program including instructions for performing any of the methods of embodiments 1-17.

51. The electronic device of embodiment 50, wherein the application management program is integrated with an operating system or the application management program is independent of the operating system, the one or more programs further comprising a communication program comprising instructions that when executed by one or more processors of the electronic device in combination with the application management program cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of embodiments 18-34.

52. The electronic device of embodiment 51 wherein the communication program is at least partially integrated with the operating system or is an application independent of the operating system.

53. The method of any of embodiments 8-18, wherein providing at least one information distribution interface in the electronic device, the step of switching output of the plurality of applications via the display further comprises: and outputting the plurality of application programs which are arranged alternately with the at least one information release interface one by one through the display.

54. The method of any of embodiments 8-18, wherein providing at least one information distribution interface in the electronic device, the step of switching output of the plurality of applications via the display further comprises: and outputting the at least one information release interface through the display in a process of switching and outputting the plurality of application programs.

55. The method of embodiment 53 or 54, wherein the plurality of options does not include an option corresponding to the at least one information distribution interface.

56. The method of embodiment 55 wherein the at least one information delivery interface comprises a dynamic or static media delivery interface, the interface output elements of which comprise at least one of text elements, video elements, audio elements, or a combination thereof.

57. An electronic device, comprising: a display, a processor unit, a memory and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing any of the methods of embodiments 1-34.

58. An electronic device, comprising: a memory, a processor unit, one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing any of the methods of embodiments 1-34.

59. A system, comprising: the electronic device of embodiment 58 and a display coupled to the electronic device.

In addition, the apparatus embodiments described above are merely illustrative, in which elements illustrated as separate elements may or may not be physically separate, and elements shown as elements may or may not be physical elements, may be located in one place, or may be distributed over a plurality of network elements. Some or all of the modules may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of this embodiment. Those of ordinary skill in the art will understand and implement the present invention without undue burden.

From the above description of some embodiments, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the various embodiments may be implemented by adding necessary general purpose hardware platforms, or may be implemented by a combination of hardware and software. Based on such understanding, the foregoing aspects, in essence and portions contributing to the art, may be embodied in the form of a computer program product, which may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including, but not limited to, disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) having computer-usable program code embodied therein.

The present invention is described with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (systems) and computer program products according to embodiments of the invention. It will be understood that each flow and/or block of the flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams, and combinations of flows and/or blocks in the flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams, can be implemented by computer program instructions. These computer program instructions may be provided to a processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor, or other programmable communication device to produce a machine, such that the instructions, which execute via the processor of the computer or other programmable communication device, create means for implementing the functions specified in the flowchart flow or flows and/or block diagram block or blocks.

These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable communication device to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce an article of manufacture including instruction means which implement the function specified in the flowchart flow or flows and/or block diagram block or blocks.

These computer program instructions may also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable communications device to cause a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer implemented process such that the instructions which execute on the computer or other programmable device provide steps for implementing the functions specified in the flowchart flow or flows and/or block diagram block or blocks.

In one typical configuration, a computing device includes a processor unit (CPU), input/output interfaces, a network interface, and memory.

The memory may include volatile memory in a computer-readable medium, random Access Memory (RAM) and/or nonvolatile memory, such as Read Only Memory (ROM) or flash memory (flash RAM). Memory is an example of computer-readable media.

Computer readable media, including both non-transitory and non-transitory, removable and non-removable media, may implement information storage by any method or technology. The information may be computer readable instructions, data structures, modules of a program, or other data. Examples of storage media for a computer include, but are not limited to, phase change memory (PRAM), static Random Access Memory (SRAM), dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM), other types of Random Access Memory (RAM), read Only Memory (ROM), electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM), flash memory or other memory technology, compact disc read only memory (CD-ROM), digital Versatile Discs (DVD) or other optical storage, magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other non-transmission medium, which can be used to store information that can be accessed by a computing device. Computer-readable media, as defined herein, does not include transitory computer-readable media (transmission media), such as modulated data signals and carrier waves.

Finally, it should be noted that: the above embodiments are only for illustrating the technical solution of the present invention, and are not limiting; although the invention has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, it will be understood by those of ordinary skill in the art that: the technical scheme described in the foregoing embodiments can be modified or some technical features thereof can be replaced by equivalents; such modifications and substitutions do not depart from the spirit and scope of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention.

Claims

1. A resource providing method for a portable electronic device, wherein a plurality of applications are provided in the electronic device, the method comprising:

s1, loading the application programs on the top layer of the interaction level of the electronic equipment in an exclusive mode after the electronic equipment is started, and outputting the application programs one by one through a display of the electronic equipment;

s2, providing a plurality of options through the periphery of the display in synchronization with the step S1, wherein the options are respectively associated with the plurality of application programs and are operable to activate and output the plurality of application programs through the display in a one-to-one correspondence manner;

S3, responding to the switching operation of a user on the application program currently presented on the display, and switching and outputting the application programs through the display;

wherein the plurality of options are maintained at a perimeter of the display during the switching of the plurality of applications.

2. The method of claim 1, wherein the plurality of applications includes a first application and/or a collection item program for exposing an identification collection; and the step of loading at least one application of the plurality of applications via a display for the electronic device further comprises:

3. The method of claim 2, wherein the interface of the plurality of applications is configured as a top layer of a user interface of an application manager for the plurality of applications; the interface of the first application or collection item is configured on a first page of a user interface top layer of the application manager.

4. The method of claim 3, wherein interfaces of a plurality of applications are juxtaposed on a top level of a user interface of the application manager, the step of loading the first application or the collection item through the display further comprising: preferentially loading the first application or the collection item program on a top layer of an application manager user interface relative to other application programs in the plurality of application programs; and

and S4, responding to a lateral sliding gesture of an interface aiming at the current application program, and sequentially outputting a next interface of the current application program or a next program in the plurality of application programs through the top layer of the application management program user interface.

5. The method of claim 4, wherein preferentially loading the first application or the collection item at a top level of an application manager user interface further comprises: after the electronic equipment is started, the first application program is preferentially loaded on the top layer of the application management program user interface; and

6. The method of claim 4, wherein preferentially loading the first application or the collection item at a top level of an application manager user interface further comprises: after the electronic equipment is started, the collection item program is preferentially loaded on the top layer of the application management program user interface; and

7. The method of any of claims 4-6, wherein the application manager is an operating system of the electronic device or a program independent of the operating system; and if the application manager is independent of the operating system, the method further comprises: and in response to a start operation of the application management program, loading the application management program through the display.

8. The method of claim 7, wherein the plurality of options are provided in a thumbnail form in which the area in which they are located is an option area; the method comprises the steps of,

The method also comprises the steps of:

in response to a switch gesture for the interface of the plurality of applications/the current application, outputting, sequentially/one by one, applications corresponding to the plurality of options through the display in an order of arrangement of the plurality of options in an option area; or alternatively, the process may be performed,

the output order of the plurality of application programs is consistent with the arrangement order of the plurality of corresponding options in the option area; or alternatively, the process may be performed,

the output order of the plurality of applications through the display corresponds to the arrangement order of the plurality of options in the option area.

9. The method of claim 8, further comprising the step of: responsive to a switching operation for the option area, moving the plurality of options to be presented; or alternatively, the process may be performed,

responsive to a switching operation for the option area, moving the plurality of options part by part to be presented in the option area;

the plurality of options are icons or shortcuts for each of the plurality of applications; or alternatively, the process may be performed,

the plurality of options are configured at the bottom of the display/current interface or at the side of the display; or alternatively, the process may be performed,

The plurality of options being located in one or more rows above or below the display/current interface; or in one or more columns on the left/right side of the display/current interface; or alternatively, the process may be performed,

the options area and options therein remain presented across the interface at the bottom of the display/current interface; or alternatively, the process may be performed,

the option area and options therein remain loaded on the current interface or are located at the bottom of the display; or alternatively, the process may be performed,

the options area is a global fixed/floating menu on the display; or alternatively, the process may be performed,

the electronic equipment is portable communication equipment, and the portable communication equipment is: a mobile phone, a smart phone or a tablet computer.

10. The method according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein,

providing at least one information release interface in the electronic device, wherein the step of switching and outputting the plurality of application programs through the display further comprises the following steps: outputting a plurality of application programs which are arranged alternately with at least one information release interface one by one through a display; or alternatively, the process may be performed,

outputting the at least one information release interface through the display in a process of switching and outputting the plurality of application programs;

Wherein the plurality of options does not include an option corresponding to the at least one information distribution interface; the method comprises the steps of,

the at least one information distribution interface comprises a dynamic or static media distribution interface, and the interface output element comprises at least one of a text element, a video element and an audio element or a combination thereof.

11. The method of claim 9, wherein a) at least a portion of the plurality of options are arranged laterally below the current interface; alternatively, b) a first set of the plurality of options is arranged in a single row at the top/bottom of the display, or in a single column beside the display; the method comprises the steps of,

the resource providing method further comprises the steps of: switching presentation of a second set of the plurality of options in the option area in response to a user switching operation for the first set of options;

wherein the switching operation is a sliding operation, and the switching presenting step further includes any one of the following three steps:

i) Moving the first set of options in the direction of the sliding operation to successively present the second set of options;

II) moving the first set of options in the direction of the sliding operation to cancel presentation of the first set of options portion by portion at the display edge, and subsequently moving the second set of options into the options area;

III) moving the first set of options out of the display in the direction of the sliding operation and moving the second set of options into the options area following the first set of options.

12. The method of claim 11, wherein the step of switching output of the plurality of applications by the display further comprises: in response to a user selection among the plurality of options, switching the current interface to an interface corresponding to the selected option on the display, and synchronously focusing the selected option in the option area.

13. The method of claim 11, wherein each of the portions includes the same number of options, the same number being 3-6; the width of the option area along the longitudinal direction is 1.5cm-2.5cm; and, the method further comprises the steps of: in response to a switch of an application currently loaded on the display, a focus display of the plurality of options is switched to correspond to the switched application.

14. The method of claim 12, wherein the plurality of applications are executable, each of the plurality of applications being activatable in response to being currently loaded on the display; and the electronic device further comprises an application operation unit virtually provided at the current interface and/or physically provided at the electronic device; the application operation unit is operable by a user to access the plurality of application programs, respectively.

15. The method of claim 14, wherein the application operating unit is functionally and correspondingly variable from one current application to another to maintain operability of characteristics of the current application.

16. The method of claim 15, wherein the application operation unit comprises a key set; the method further comprises the steps of: in response to an operation for the key group, a plurality of characteristics of the current program are respectively invoked.

17. The method of claim 16, wherein the key set comprises: a plurality of virtual push-type keys or toggle-type keys arranged in a row on the right side of the current interface and/or a plurality of physical push-type keys or toggle-type keys correspondingly arranged in a row on an electronic device on the right side of a display integrally assembled with the electronic device; and

18. The method of claim 16, wherein the first application is a communication program for a first contact executable to output a communication interface for the first contact via the display, including a message area; the key sets are communicatively coupled/associated with at least one communication network, respectively; the method further comprises:

19. The method of claim 18, wherein the at least one communication network comprises a plurality of communication networks having different traffic properties, the key set being communicatively coupled/associated with the plurality of communication networks, respectively; and the communication information outputting step further includes:

20. The method of claim 19, wherein the plurality of communication networks comprises a plurality of wireless communication networks including a mobile telephone network, a wireless data transmission network; the key group is communicatively coupled/associated with the mobile telephone network and the wireless data transmission network, respectively, and the communication information outputting step further includes:

21. The method of claim 20, wherein the wireless data transmission network comprises a mobile data network and a wireless local area network, and the method further comprises:

the key set is selectively communicatively coupled/associated with the mobile telephone network, the mobile data network, or the wireless local area network such that the key set is operable to establish corresponding traffic based on the coupled/associated communication network, respectively.

22. The method of claim 21, wherein the plurality of communications information comprises: voice service information, at least two of short message service information and data service information; the step of establishing communication further comprises:

when the key set is communicatively coupled/associated with the mobile telephone network, in response to a user operation of the key set, establishing communication with the first contact through the mobile telephone network to generate the voice service information and/or the short message service message;

and when the key set is communicatively coupled/associated with the wireless data transmission network, responding to the operation of the key set by a user, establishing communication with the first contact person through the wireless data transmission network to generate the data service message.

23. The method of claim 21, wherein the first contact communication interface further comprises a toggle option, the selectively associating step comprising:

the key set is selectively configured to communicatively couple/associate with the mobile telephone network, the mobile data network, or the wireless local area network based on at least one of i) user operation of the handoff option, ii) a connection status of the electronic device with the wireless local area network, or iii) peripherally available communication network conditions.

24. The method of claim 23, wherein the selectively associating step further comprises:

configuring the key set to be communicatively coupled/associated with the wireless local area network in response to the electronic device accessing the wireless local area network; and

the key set is communicatively coupled/associated with the mobile telephone network is configured in a communication function in response to the electronic device being disconnected from the wireless local area network.

25. The method of claim 22, wherein the first contact communication program is integrated with the operating system, the interface of the first contact communication program being at least a portion of the operating system user interface component.

26. The method of claim 25, wherein the corresponding handset number of the first contact in the mobile telephone network and the corresponding identification code in the wireless data transmission network are integrally configured.

27. The method of claim 26, wherein the corresponding handset number of the first contact in the mobile telephone network and the corresponding identification code in the wireless data transmission network are stored integrally in the same program, and the step of establishing communication further comprises:

28. The method of claim 27, wherein the outputting of the plurality of communication information further comprises:

29. The method of claim 28, wherein the integrating outputting step further comprises:

outputting the voice service information and/or the short message service message through the message area when the key set is communicatively coupled/associated with the mobile telephone network;

And outputting the data service message through the message area when the key group is communicatively coupled/associated with the wireless local area network or the mobile data network.

30. The method of claim 29, wherein the plurality of communication information outputting steps further comprise: individually outputting a most recent one of the plurality of communication information in the message area in response to occurrence of the most recent one; or alternatively

31. The method of claim 30, wherein the outputting step further comprises: outputting the latest one of the at least two of the data service messages individually in the message area in response to occurrence of the latest one of the voice service information, the short message service message, or

32. The method of claim 31, wherein the profile information of the first contact is configured separately outside of the message area and is comparable to the message area format; the method further comprises the steps of:

expanding the message area and abbreviated the profile information; and outputting the plurality of communication information collectively to the message area.

33. The method of claim 32, wherein the profile information of the first contact and the message area are configured substantially centered above and below each other on the first contact communication interface, the plurality of communication information outputting steps further comprising:

When the key group is communicatively coupled/associated with the mobile telephone network, the voice service information and/or the short message service information arranged according to the occurrence sequence are collectively output through the message area; the data service messages arranged in order of occurrence are collectively output through the message area when the key group is communicatively coupled/associated with the wireless data transmission network.

34. The method of claim 33, wherein the plurality of communication information outputting steps further comprise:

integrating said voice service information and/or short message service messages to individually output the latest one of them in said message area when said keypad is communicatively coupled/associated with said mobile telephone network;

when the key set is communicatively coupled/associated with the wireless data transmission network, outputting only the latest one of the data service messages in the message area with continuous updating;

35. An electronic device, comprising: a processor unit, a memory and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 1-34.

wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 1-34.

37. The electronic device of claim 36, further comprising a base, the spring probe connector being a pogin connector, the physical key set being configured on the base; the pin hole interface and the probe interface of the pogpin connector are correspondingly arranged on the mobile communication device and the base and are respectively connected with the processor unit and the entity key group;

the one or more programs include an operating system and/or an application manager comprising instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 1-17.

38. The electronic device of claim 37, wherein the one or more programs further comprise a communication program comprising instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 18-34 in combination with the application management program; the communication program is integrated with or independent of the operating system; the communication program is further executable by the processor unit to: switching the electronic device between a wireless local area network and a mobile data network according to i) peripheral communication network conditions, ii) at least one of connection or disconnection of the connector.

39. The electronic device of claim 37, wherein a virtual key set corresponds in form to the physical key set.

40. The electronic device of claim 39, wherein the virtual key set and the physical key set are consistent for at least one of: the virtual key group comprises a plurality of virtual keys which are arranged in a row on the right side of the current interface, and the physical key group comprises a plurality of physical keys which are correspondingly arranged in a row on the right side of the display.

41. The electronic device of claim 40, wherein the one or more programs further comprise an album application, the operating system and/or application management program further comprising instructions executable by the processor unit to cause the electronic device to: and responding to a sixth switching operation of a user for the current interface or a selection operation of the user for options corresponding to the album application interface in the area where the plurality of options are located, and outputting the album application interface on the display.

42. The electronic device of claim 41, wherein the plurality of characteristics includes a photographing characteristic, a playing characteristic, a pause characteristic; and the key set includes a first key, a second key, and a third key operable to invoke the photographing feature, the playing feature, and the pause feature, respectively, of the album application.

43. The electronic device of claim 42, wherein the operating system and/or application management program further comprises instructions that when executed by the processor unit cause the electronic device to functionally reconfigure the first, second and third keys to be operable to invoke the following features provided by the first contact communication interface, respectively, in response to the first contact communication interface being currently output on the display:

when the first, second and third keys are communicatively coupled/associated with a wireless data transmission network, i) sending a voice message over the wireless data transmission network; ii) accessing voice messages received over the wireless data transmission network; iii) Establishing an audio and video call through the wireless data transmission network; or alternatively

When said first, second and third keys are communicatively coupled/associated with a mobile telephone network, a) sending a short message service through said mobile telephone network; b) Accessing a short message service received through the mobile telephone network; c) And establishing voice telephone service through the mobile telephone network.

Apparatus for performing any of the methods of claims 1-34.

45. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium comprising one or more programs for execution by one or more processors of an electronic device, the one or more programs comprising instructions that when executed by the one or more processors cause the electronic device to perform the method of any of claims 1-34.

46. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of claim 45, the one or more programs comprising an operating system and/or application management program comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device, cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of claims 1-17.

47. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of claim 46, wherein the application management program is integrated with or independent of the operating system, the one or more programs further comprising a communication program comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of an electronic device in combination with the application management program, cause the electronic device to perform any of the methods of claims 18-34.

48. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of claim 47, wherein the communication program is at least partially integrated with or independent of the operating system.

49. An electronic device, comprising: a display, a processor unit, and a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect a contact; wherein the processor unit is coupled with the display and the touch-sensitive surface unit, the processor unit being programmed to perform the steps of any one of the methods of claims 1 to 34.

50. An electronic device, comprising: a display, a processor unit, a memory, and one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the processor unit, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 1-34.